EH170U

Operations manual
for BROMMA TELESCOPIC SPREADER TYPE: EH170U General assembly drawing No:1004850 Serial number: 7773 SWL: 41 tonne Twinlift capacity:2 x 25 tonne Customer: Gottwald Date of shipping: 2005
_____________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB 00 01 ENG rev. .x
Warning!
This Operations manual is intended as a guide to the use and maintenance of Bromma spreaders.
READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS PLACED INTO OPERATION! Bromma Conquip AB or its affiliated - companies (to the extent permitted by law) accept no liability for loss or damage suffered as a result of the use of this manual. If in doubt always refer to the original equipment manufacturer. Refer at all time to the Safety precautions under section 5! DO NOT exeed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the spreader bar. The Safe Working Load is found on the nameplate that is permanently affixed to the side frame of the spreader.
__________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB 00 02 ENG rev.
Table of contents
1 INTRODUCTION 2 SPREADER DATA SHEET 3 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION SPREADER Functional description Design calculations Safety features In-plant testing 4 TESTING RECORDS AND CERTIFICATE 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 6 START-UP PROCEDURES 7 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Maintenance instructions Periodic maintenance procedure Lubrication instructions Instructions for adjustment and repairs of major items 8 SPARE PARTS AND SERVICE Spare parts list by major groups How to order spare parts and/or service 9 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS 10 ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS 11 FAULT FINDING DIAGNOSTICS Hydraulic system Electrical system 12 APPENDICES Units and conversion tables Hydraulic symbols Electrical symbols 13 TTDS
_________________________________________________________________________________
1 Introduction
BROMMA Conquip has since 1967 been the leading manufacturer of telescopic container handling spreaders. A great number of BROMMA spreaders are in service today in ports and terminals around the world. A complete range of fixed length and telescopic spreaders are available, and each one provides high handling efficiency, excellent reliability, ease of maintenance and repair. This Operation Manual describes the many features of the BROMMA spreader. It will guide you in: Maintenance. Repairs. Trouble-shooting. Service. Spare parts.
In the event You should need additional information or support, our sales and/or technical staff will be pleased to assist you.
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
01 01 ENG rev.
2 Spreader - Datasheet
Type Art.No Container Range Capacity
Lifting capacity (evenly loaded) Lifting capacity (10% gravity point off set) Twinlift capacity Twinlift capacity (10% gravity point off set) Lifting lug capacity (gable end) Lifting lug capacity (main beam) Operating Movements Telescoping 20 to 40 or 40 to 20 Twistlock rotation locking or unlocking 90o Electrical Equipment Power voltage Frequency Control voltage Control valve Total power consumption Electrical protection Hydraulic Equipment Pump running Pressure Pump flow Tank capacity Normal running temperature (above ambient) Filter type Filter Pressure line Corrosion protection Blast cleaning to SA 2 - ISO 8501:1 Interzinc 72 50 m Intercure 420 70 m Interfine 629 HS 40 m Interfine 629 HS 40 m Min. coating thickness, total 200 m 41 tonne 41 tonne 2 x 25 tonne 2 x 20,5 tonne 4 x 10 tonne 4 x 10 tonne 30 s 1,5 s 400 V AC 50 Hz 230 V AC 24 V DC 2x2,2 k + 1x3kW + 3+5,5 =15,9 IP 55 100 bar 2 x 14 l/min + 1x18 l/min 1 x 70 l + 2 x 50 l 50C 10 m
EH170U 1004850 20- 40
10 m
______________________________________________________________________________________________________ BROMMA CONQUIP AB 02 01ENG rev..1
3 Technical description
Functional description
Bromma telescopic spreader EH5 (EH12 & EH170) are fabricated as all welded, high quality steel, construction. Two pairs of telescopic beams slide in the centre main frame construction. The telescopic beams are joined together at the ends by end beams, which house the twistlocks, flipper arms and hydraulic valves. The spreader has an inbuilt under clearance of 185 mm. This enables hatchcovers and containers with protrusions up to 185 mm to be handled. If larger clearances are required then overweight extension legs need to be fitted. The spreader is optionally fitted with one set of lifting lugs. Mostly, they are placed at each corner of the gable end. In case the spreader is provided with this device, it can be used for handling of badly damaged containers or noncontainerised cargo. Use only approved slings and shackles. Where the telescopic arms slide in the mainframe they are supported by a number of low friction slides plates, one at each corner of the mainframe (total 4) and on the top and bottom at the end on each telescopic arm (total 8). Sufficient clearance is provided between the slide plates and the structure to allow the beams to flex, enabling distorted containers to be handled. The spreader function (i.e. twistlocks, flippers, telescoping) is operated from the drivers controls in the crane cab. TELESCOPIC SYSTEM The telescoping system is driven by means of an electric motor and reduction gearbox connected to an endless chain. This chain is titted with stacks of spring washers that work as chock absorbers where the chain attaches to the tension rods.. These tension rods are connected to the end beam. The springs allow for changes in the length of the spreader up to plus or minus 7 mm . The springs do not only act as shock absorbers; they also provide a floating possibility for the twistlocks to handle distorted containers. This "floating" action also eliminates the need for corner guide rollers. In the event of a power failure the telescoping motion can be handcranked. The positioning system works with proximity switches for positioning the spreader in the 20', 30' and 40' positions. This system enables the positioning of the twistlocks with an accuracy of plus or minus 3 mm (less than 1/8"). The drive motor incorporates an electric brake that is spring applied and takes electrical power to release.
________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 1 of 3 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 03 09 ENG. rev. x
This brake not only controls the accuracy in stopping the expansion and retraction but also prevents changes from occurring in the spreader length during use. TOWER The main frame of the spreader is connected to the crane through a sliding tower assembly. This enables the centre of gravity lifting point to be moved a maximum of 1,2 meters toward each end of the spreader. This means that unevenly loaded containers can be picked up horizontally, which is specially important when loading or unloading in the guides in the ships cells. After unlocking an unevenly loaded container, the sliding tower assembly automatically returns to the central position FLIPPERS Flat gather guides, commonly called flippers, are fitted to each end beam of the spreader. They are of strong construction and are driven by a powerful hydraulic motor, which enables easy and fast location of the spreader onto the containers. The flipper gather is 155 mm and has a gathering torque of 1200 Nm. The flipper arms are always under pressure and each arm has a shock relief valve, which opens at a pre-set pressure of 45 bar above the normal working pressure. As soon as the shock load ends the flipper returns to the vertical position. Each flipper is controlled by its own solenoid valve and shock relief valve. The flippers work in pairs along the length of the spreader, individually at the gable ends, or all together. The speed of the flipper is approximately 180 in 6 seconds and is controlled by an orifice plug in the pipe connection to the motor. TWISTLOCK Four twistlocks for single container spreader are located in the corners of the spreader to engage and lift the container. A hydraulic cylinder rotates the twistlock and two sensors indicate the position of the twistlock, Locked or Unlocked. A landing pin safety system is provided to assure that the spreader is properly landed on the container before rotating the twistlocks. A spring loaded landing pin near each twistlock is pushed up into the twistlock housing when the spreader is landed on the container. When the spreader is properly landed on a container, the landing pin will activate a proximity switch. Only when all the corners of the spreader are landed, can the twistlocks be turned. At the same time, the blockading key is moved high enough so the blockading stop on the twistlock lever arm passes underneath it. If the spreader is not properly landed the proximity switch will not be activated and
the blockading key will get in the way of the blocking stop. This will stop the twistlocks from turning. CENTER TWISTLOCKS (EH 170U) The EH 170 is equipped with center twistlocks to be able to handle two 20 foot containers at the same time. These center twistlocks are placed in housings on the main frame. The twistlock boxes can be tilted to down position by four hydraulic cylinders. (one per twistlock box). The center twistlocks operate the same way as the end beam twistlocks. SIGNAL LIGHT Near each end of the spreader mainframe there is a set of three signals light, one green, one red, one white, which can be clearly seen from the crane cabin. The green and red lights indicate if corresponding twistlocks are unlocked or locked respectively. The white light indicates when the spreader is properly "landed", and the twistlocks are correctly engaged in the container corner castings. In twinlift spreaders (EH170U), when using the twinlift function, the left side signal lamps are valid for the left side container and the right side lamps are for the right side container. HYDRAULIC UNITS The hydraulic units are protected inside each end beam. The unit consists of a built-in tank, variable displacement piston pump, motor valves and filter. The filter cap is fitted with a pressure relief valve plus or minus 0,14 bar to allow expansion and contraction of air inside the tank. The hydraulic components used are designed to work at over 200 bar but normal working pressure is 100 bar. The hydraulic valves are solenoid operated and can be tested by hand operating. The EH170U has a third hydraulic unit placed in the main beam. This unit provides the four cylinders for center twistlock housings up-down and the four cylinders for lock-unlock in the central twistlocks with power. MAIN ELECTRICAL CABINET The main electrical cabinet is mounted on heavy-duty rubber shock absorbers and is well protected being placed on the tower. Relays, transformers, circuit breakers, timers, hour counters and sockets are mounted in this cabinet. The PLC is also placed on the tower. A junction box including motor protectors is placed inside the main frame.
Design calculations
The spreader structure is designed according to DIN15018 and to the following loading group which represents a container handling crane.
HOISTING GROUP H2 LOADING GROUP B4
LIFTING CASES The following lifting cases are considered: 1. Most frequent load case A symmetrically loaded container of 41 tonne. The permissible stress is determined by analysis of direct loading and fatigue conditions. Depending on intensity of use the structure is suitable for: 2 X 106 lifting cycles "H load case is determining. 2. Exceptional load cases Permissible stresses are determined by analysis of direct loading only. a) A container of 41 tonne weight but loaded unsymmetrically by 10% in the longitudinal direction. "H.Z" load case is determining. b) A container of 41 tonne weight but loaded unsymmetrically by 10% in the longitudinal and lateral direction. "H.S" load case is determining
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
03 02 ENG rev. x
Safety features
The following safety features are normally included in the crane: 1. The spreader should only be hoisted/lowered when all four twistlocks are fully locked/unlocked. 2. The spreader twistlocks should be locked/unlocked when the spreader is Properly "landed" on a container. This being when all four landing switches are actuated. 3. A delay feature on the twistlocks locked/unlocked circuit is installed to ensure the spreader is properly "landed" and not bouncing. This is in the form of a timer whom is adjustable, but normally set to between 1 and 2 seconds. 4. During hoisting the four blockading pins move to the "down" position. This prevents electrically the twistlocks from moving.
NOTE ! When carrying out maintenance on the twistlocks, the blockading pin clamps can be fitted to each corner, to by pass the electric and mechanical blockading when running the twistlock.
5. Telescoping of the spreader is prevented unless all four blockading pins are in the "down" position and the twistlocks are unlocked. Individual switches indicate twistlocks locked, twistlocks unlocked and blockading pins "up". The following safety features are fitted on the spreader: 6. A mechanical blockading device prevents each twistlock from locking/ unlocking unless the blockading pin is "up" position.
__________________________________________________________________________________
In-plant testing
STRUCTURAL Each spreader is fully proof tested in the factory to a minimum of 50% overload prior to delivery. The proof test loading report enclosed illustrates the loads applied to the spreader. All lifting lugs are also proof tested in the factory. The testing is witnessed and certified by a third part inspection official. All spreader twistlocks are individually proof tested, stamped and certified to a loading of 37 tonne. FUNCTIONAL Each spreader is run in the factory prior to delivery being controlled by a specially designed simulator.
__________________________________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB 03 04 ENG rev. x
4 Testing records and certificates
______________________________________________________________________________________________________ BROMMA CONQUIP AB 04 01 ENG rev.
Warnings
5 Safety precautions
READ AND UNDERSTAND THE MANUAL BEFORE THE SPREADER IS PUT INTO OPERATION. The manual contains vital information for the safety of personnel and the correct use of the spreader. Bromma Group will not accept any liability for the use of the spreader for any purposes outside what is described in the manual. DO NOT exeed the Safe Working Load (SWL) of the spreader bar. The Safe Working Load is shown on the nameplate that is permanently affixed to the side frame of the spreader.
Safety precautions
1. The spreader shall be operated and serviced only by authorized personnel. 2. The spreader must only be used for the purpose for which it is designed. 3. DO NOT change system settings and functions. 4. Perform a functional test after any maintenance or repair work. 5. Stay clear of the spreader when in operation. 6. Stay clear of all moving parts, such as guide arms (flippers), moving beams, telescopic chains, etc. A safe distance is 5 meters. 7. DO NOT connect or disconnect electrical connectors while the power is on. 8. DO NOT tamper with hydraulic pressure settings once adjusted by qualified personnel. See chapter 9. Hydraulic system for proper pressure adjustment. 9. DO NOT unlock the spreader while a container is suspended in the air. It could cause personnel injury or property damage.
1 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
05 01 ENG rev.. x
10. Maintain adjustment of all electrical and hydraulic components 11. Inspect the spreader for damage daily. 12. Care must be taken when performing any maintenance inside the spreader frame. It must be carried out under extreme caution and by personnel familiar with risks related to spreader function and movements. Serious injury by crushing can occur 13. Contact Bromma Conquip AB before doing any repair work on the spreader apart from replacing normal wear parts. 14. DO NOT walk or stand beneath the spreader bar during operation. 15. DO NOT attempt to lift a container that is not level (+/- 5). 16. DO NOT crawl beneath a spreader bar for maintenance, repair or adjustment. Never put any body extremity beneath the spreader bar. 17. NEVER STAND BENEATH A SUSPENDED LOAD. 18. DO NOT attempt to restrain the movement of a container, whether laden or empty, by hand or by tagline. 19. DO NOT stand between a container and any construction that many prevent your movement to safety. A definite hazard exists that could cause serious injury or death by being crushed between the container and an obstruction (such as a building or another container). 20. Mobile work platforms which are used in repair and service work on the spreader must be equipped with safety rails and kick plates. 21. It is incumbent on the operator in charge of the crane to restrict the movements of the crane when repair or service work is being performed on crane-mounted spreader. 22. The tower must be moved back to the centre of the spreader before it leaves the container. There must be a good clearance between the Spreader and the container before slewing the crane boom. 23. When welding might be needed on the spreader with SCS2 assembled, make sure that it is properly grounded or dismantle the plug connection and earth cable.
2 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
05 01 ENG rev.. x
WARNING!
Because this spreader is equipped with double-coil flipper arm valves but connected as a single coil valve function, the following may occur: If the operating voltage to the flipper arm valves disappears (intentionally or accidentally), the FLIPPER ARMS move upwards to their starting position. If EMERGENCY STOP is used or if the power supply to the electric motor of the hydraulic power unit is cut of in some other way, the flipper arms stop immediately. The flipper arms start moving again when the power supply to the electric motor of the hydraulic power unit is restored. It is essential to inform the personnel who work close to the spreader about this.
_____________________________________________________________
BROMMA CONQUIP AB 05 02d ENG. rev.
CAUTION!
MOTIONS CAN AUTOMATICALLY RE-START WHEN THE EMERGENCY SPREADER STOP IS RE-SET!
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
05 03 ENG. rev.
ASSEMBLY OF TOWER (drg no 34476) 1 Check spreader and tower for damage.
6 Start - Up procedure
2 Suspend the tower from a suitable forklift or crane (tower weight 1,4 t) using the main lifting pin (pos 1). 3 Remove the protective material from the robalon pads on tower (pos 2). Remove the drive sprocket cover (pos 6). Remove the (2) lifting lugs from main frame of the spreader at the assembly end (pos 3). 5 Lower the flipper arm, at assembly end of the spreader, by slackening hydraulic hoses on the motor. NOTE: Take care that flipper does not fall down and cause injury! 6 Remove top fixings for rubber covers (pos 4). 7 Remove lamp assembly by taking out the quick release fastening from the four pins and lay the lamp assembly in the main frame. 8 Release the gravity point chain, by removing the two screws and the locking device from adjuster. 9 You are now able to slide the tower into the main frame close to the centre. Note the direction of assembly. Arrows are painted on the tower and frame. 10 Now replace the lamp assembly, rubber covers and lifting lugs. If the flipper is rise at this time, care should be taken as it is liable to fall, now that the motor is empty.
______________________________________________________________________________________________________ 1 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 06 02 ENG rev.
11 Remove the drive sprocket cover (pos 6). It is now possible to install the chain, complete with the anchor block fitted. The chain goes, under the first sprocket, over the centre one and under the third. To assist with the chain installation, pull the brake release lever, towards the back of the motor. It is then possible to turn the motor, using the handle supplied. 12 Replace the chain back into it's fixing point and tighten the adjusting screws, until the chain is tight (allow a sag of about 30 mm and place the tower in middle position) and replace the locking device. Grease the chain. 13 Replace sprocket cover. 14 Pass the main plug up through the tower and fix conduit pipes with screws supplied. 15 Place the cable into the top support clamp. 16 Connect the tower motor. The connections are marked u1 and w1 to give correct position. NOTE: Take care, incorrect rotation may result in serious damage! 17 Secure the cable to bracket with suitable cable ties. 18 Fix limit switch detection bar into place (pos 7). 19 Check all bolts are tight and the spreader is clear of all discarded material and tools. Take care that nothing had fallen into the chain.
TOWER FUNCTIONS AND TESTING The tower function is to level/unlevel loaded containers. Any other use of the tower is an abuse of the equipment and could result in serious damage. When the spreader is locked onto a container, it is possible to move the tower in any direction. The tower will stay where it is placed. The return to the middle position is done by the crane driver. When he has driven the tower to yellow or blue, it goes always to the middle position. To test the newly assembled unit, place the blockading pin clamps onto the spreader and lock the twistlocks. With the spreader on the ground, commence to travel the tower towards one end of the spreader. Now hold a piece of metal, i.e. spanner or screwdriver, in front of the stop switch, for the end that the tower is travelling. The tower should now stop. Try the other direction. If both of the limits work, travel the tower to both ends of the spreader, to confirm the limits work on the detection bar. When at each end, unlock the twistlocks and release a clamp, to confirm the tower returns to it's centre position. If any of these functions fail, please seek advice. WARNING! Use the tower only to level loads, or serious damage may occur! Never use the hand crank on the motor with power connected, or serious injury may occur!
Start - Up the spreader

1. Before any connection to container crane, place the main frame of the spreader on trestles or similar about 0,7 m height and in such a way that the flipper arms can be lowered. 2 Inspect the spreader for visible damage. 3. Connect the main current and control supply to the spreader. Connect the 24 pin plug to the service panel. 4. Start the electric motor of the hydraulic units by turning the pump on switch on service panel. 5. For testing of the twistlocks all 4 blockading pins should be in up position. This is achieved by using a blockading pin clamp. In the down position the blockading pins electrically and mechanically block all twistlock rotation. 6. Test all functions of the spreader using the push buttons and switches on service panel. a) When pump on switch is on, both electric motors should be running in gable ends. b) Operate the push buttons to put the spreader in the different length positions. As an additional length, check that the twistlock centre length is marked on the plate positioned on side of the main beam. c) Check that the flippers works in pairs along the length of the spreader, individually at the gable ends, or all together by pressing the appropriate buttons. d) Check that when clamps are fitted to the blockading pins and all pins are up, this will be indicated by the white lights on the spreader. e) Check that the twistlocks lock/unlock and that the light indicators on the top of the spreader main frame indicate red when locked and green when unlocked. 7. Check that the pump operating pressure is 100 bar. the
8. Check each end hydraulic assembly to ensure there are no oil leaks. 9. Note that the solenoid valves operating flippers and twistlocks can be manually operated if required.This is achieved by pushing the end of the solenoid with a small screwdriver. As power is generally always on the solenoid, the plug connection has to be disconnected first. 10. Service and lubrication should be carried out in accordance with the lubrication manual.
7 Maintenance procedures
Maintenance Instructions
IMPORTANT! When the spreader is disconnected from the crane the heating function (if fitted) must always be connected and energised.
Pos. 1
TWISTLOCK (drg no 22808) All twistlock are to be greased through the greasecups 4 per spreader.
Pos. 2
TWISTLOCK CYLINDER & BEARING HOUSING IN TOWER (drg no 22808) Piston rod ends are to be greased. 8 per spreader. Bearing housing in tower. 2 per spreader.
Pos. 3
HYDRAULIC UNIT (drg no 22809) Oil is to be changed after first 50 hours, then after every 1000 hours.
Pos. 4
OIL FILTER (drg no 22809) Filter is to be changed after first 50 hours, then after every 1000 hours of operation or when the indicator is red.
Pos. 5
LIFTING SHAFTS (drg no 22808) (If the spreader/headblock is equipped with lifting shafts). ACTION! To be greased.
Pos. 6
GLIDE PLATE (drg no 22810) The robalon glide plates are to be replaced when the thickness is down to 17 mm. ACTION! To be checked.
1 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 05 ENG rev.3
Pos. 7
GUIDE ARMS (drg no 22808) Shafts are to greased.
Pos. 8
TELESCOPIC GEARBOX (drg no 22808 & 22809) Oil level is to be checked through dismantled oil level plug. Bearings at the gearbox and the pedestal are to be greased through greasecups.
Pos. 9
ALL ROLLER CHAINS AND TENSION WHEEL (drg no 22808) Roller chains and tension wheel are to be checked from abrasion and greased.
Pos. 10
SIGNAL LAMPS (drg no 22810) Vibration proof glow lamp. ACTION! To be checked.
Pos. 11
TELESCOPIC BEAMS (drg no 22808) To be greased as follows: 1. In 20'- position, through greasenipple underneath the mainframe ca 50g/week. 2. In fully expanded position, with a brush on the sliding area under the telescopic beams ca 100g/ at interval min.1000 hour. The amount of grease and service interval depends on spreader use and environmental circumstances which vary from place to place.
Pos. 12
ELECTRICAL MOTORS (Only for EH5) Adjust brakes as per attached instructions.
2 of 2
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 05 ENG rev.3
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

RUNNING-IN OF A NEW SPREADER After 50 and 250 hours 1. Lubricate and check the various points as per the lubrication instructions. 2. Check the telescopic chain. Tighten if it can be moved more than 25 mm in vertical direction. EVERY 100 WORKING HOURS 1. Twistlock: Check the nut and the floating mechanism and ensure that all parts are properly tightened down. Check that the locking pin can be moved easily and that it indicates the correct position (see 'Adjusting the locking pin'). 2. Check that all hydraulic tank mountings are tight. 3. Check that the hydraulic pump pressure is correct. 4. Carefully inspect all hoses, hose clips and hose connections. Defective hydraulic hoses and connections may cause personal injury when jets of liquid escape under high pressure. 5. Leaking hose connections and defective hoses should be rectified immediately. EVERY 1000 WORKING HOURS Lubricate and check the various points as per the lubrication instructions. CAUTION! When working on or in the vicinity of the spreader the electrical supply to the spreader should be disconnected, if possible, to prevent personal injury and material damage. This can be done using the main switch or by disconnecting the power cable. If the work requires that the electrical supply remains connected then staff on or in the vicinity of the spreader must be informed that it could move.
Twistlock pin Nut
1 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG rev. x
TWISTLOCK MAINTENANCE Every 3000 working hours (100,000 containers handled2 or once annually3) 1. Dismantle all four twistlocks (eight on twin-liftspreaders). 2. Inspect all parts. Look for any damage which necessitate their replacement. 3. Check that there are no cracks (or other faults) in the threads of the twistlock pins or 'heads'. Use penetrating fluid to detect fissures. 4. Replace the twistlock pin if cracks are detected. 5. Clean all parts. 6. Lubricate the parts. 7. Reassemble the twistlocks.
Nut Spherical washer
Twistlock pin
Every 6000 working hours (200,000 containers handled4 or every other year5) The twistlock pins and the spherical washers6 shall be replaced. NOTE. See the twistlock drawing and/or the separate adjustment instructions for the adjustment of the twistlock end stop switches after reassembly.
-------------------------2 3
If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter If there is no hour counter or twistlockcounter 4 If the spreader is equipped with twistlock counter 5 If there is no hour counter or twistlock counter 6 Only for floating twistlocks
2 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG rev. x
PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTMENT AND REPAIR OF MAJOR ITEMS OF THE SPREADER

REPLACING THE HYDRAULIC PUMP When ordering a new hydraulic pump always state the direction of rotation as marked on the old pump housing. To replace the hydraulic pump (free-standing pump unit): 1.Turn off the electrical supply using the main switch. 2. Disconnect the inlet , outlet hoses and drainhoses from the pump. 3. Reconnect the inlet and outlet hoses once the pump has been fitted. 4. Reconnect the drain hose to the pump. 5. See drawing no.45316 for setting the pump flow and pressure. NOTE. Every time the pump is emptied, new oil must be added until it starts to run out of the drain hose. SHOCK RELIEF VALVES, general These are cross over relief valves which relieves excess hydraulic pressure caused by external forces on the flipper arms or the telescopic system. The rising hydraulic pressure acts against the spring to open the flow path to the other port. All leakages through these valves at the normal operating pressure of the pump (lower setting than the pump's operating pressure) cause a substantial increase in the temperature of the hydraulic oil. Leaks of this type are often indicated by a hissing sound coming from the relief valve. Possible causes are: * Slides jamming due to poor hydraulic oil * Defective seals * Incorrect pressure setting
3 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG rev. x
ADJUSTING THE TELESCOPIC CHAIN (Drawing no. 38073) 1. Run the spreader to the maximum position (40 foot). 2. Disconnect the power. 3. Remove the locking screws from the adjuster nut. 4. Tighten the adjuster nuts on both sides with a torque wrench to 50 Nm (37 ft-lbs.) alternately one turn at a time . It is important to adjust both sides equally. If not done properly this could cause future problems in operation and reduce the life of the chain. 5. Reinstall the locking screws in the adjusting nut .
Locking screws
Adjusting nut
Cotter pin
Chain lock
REPLACING A BROKEN CHAIN If the chain should break and jump over the chain wheel, repair as follows: 1. Disconnect the electrical supply in the spreader control cabinet by turning off the main switch. 2. Place the telescopic beams in the approximate position for a 30 foot container using a fork lift truck or similar. 3. Turn the adjusting nut counterclockwise a quarter of a turn. 4. Remove the chain pin connected to the shock absorber by pulling out the cotter pin. 5. Remove the chain. 6. Install a new chain or insert a joining link and reinstall the chain and the adjusting nut. 7. Perform the steps described above (Adjusting the telescopic chain). 8. Connect the power supply and make a fine adjustment as per the instructions in 'Setting the spreader length'. 9. Check the distance between the twistlocks as per the instructions in Spreader lengths with different twistlocks'. 10. Lubricate the chain according to drawing 22808, Lubrication points.
4 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG rev. x
REPLACING ROBALON PLATES Robalon plate in main frame 1. Extend the spreader to at least the 30 foot position. 2. Remove the locking plate and replace the Robalon plate.
Telescopic beam lower plates 1. Set the spreader to at least the 20 foot position. 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the electromagnetic telescopic valves. 3. Operate the telescopic drive by manually pressing the valves until the Robalon plate mounting bolts are accessible through the aperture in the lower flange of the main beam. Replace the plates.
Telescopic beam upper plates 1. Set the spreader to at least the 20 foot position. 2. Remove the electrical connectors from the electromagnetic telescopic valves. 3. Operate the telescopic drive by manually pressing the valves until the Robalon plate mounting bolts are accessible. 4. Replace the plates.
DISMANTLING THE TELESCOPIC BEAMS AND END BEAM UNIT If the telescopic beams require checking. 1. Start by removing all the Robalon plates from the ends of telescopic beams. Leave the plates on the main frame in place. 2. Disconnect the power cables and the hydraulic hoses from the end units. Seal all hydraulic hoses correctly. 3. Remove the stud from the drawbar connection in the end beam. 4. Take the weight off the end unit using a fork lift truck and extend the unit to the 40 foot position.
5 of 10 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 07 02 ENG rev. x
5. Secure a spacer between the telescopic beams to prevent lateral movement. 6. Extract the beams from the main frame and inspect them as required. 6. Reassemble the beams and the end units in the reverse order to that in the instructions above.
FLIPPER ARM UNIT (AUTOMATIC FLIPPER ARMS) 1. Remove the outlet plug to alter flipper arm speed. NOTE. When replacing the flipper arm motor ensure that the outlet plug is correctly positioned. 2. Removing and installing bearings a) Remove the flipper arms b) Remove the key c) Drift out the shaft. Once the shaft has been removed the bearing will be pushed out by the middle key. d) Drift out the second bearing. e) Install the parts in the reverse order to dismantle except for that both bearings have to be drifted into position using a pipe of a suitable bore.
6 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG rev. x
ADJUSTING SPREADER LENGTH Sensors: a) Adjust the centre to centre distance between twistlocks for each position by moving the sensors. b) For 30' check the centre to centre distance between twistlock both when extending and retracing the spreader. The accurate distances between the twistlocks are shown in Spreader length with different twistlocks.
Sensor
Sensor plate
SPREADER LENGTH WITH TWISTLOCKS BROMMA ISO Twistlock 20' 30' Floating: 5852 8918
40' 11984
ADJUSTING THE LANDING PIN a) Attach blockading pin clamps at three of the corners. b) At the fourth corner, press the pin upwards. c) When the lower part of the pin is 6 - 7 mm from the bottom plate of the corner, the lamp indicating "spreader landed", shall go on. d) If the distance is not correct, adjust the landing switch and do the test again.
7 of 10 BROMMA CONQUIP AB
Landing switch
Landing pin
07 02 ENG rev. x
e) Proceed in the same way for all four corners. DISMOUNTING THE TWISTLOCK PIN 1. Dismout the twistlock cylinder as described on the next page. 2. Remove the M6 screw and nut from the top of the twistlock. 3. Grab hold of twistlock head. 4. Slack off the twistlock nut. 5. Lower the twistlock pin and guide block. 6. Do not lose the twistlock pin key.
Twistlock nut M6 screw M6 nut
Guide neck
Twistlock MOUNTING housing 1. Perform the steps above in the Twistlock head reverse order. 2. Carry out the adjustment below 3. before mounting the M6 screw and nut. 4. Lubricate according to instructions on drawing 22808, Lubrication points.
Distance between top of twistlock head and bottom of guide block 1-2 mm
Checking the Float 1. Grab hold of the twistlock head. 2. Push or pull the twistlock to one of the corners. 3. Ensure the guide block is touching the twistlock housing bottom plate. If not, the twistlock needs to be adjusted /lowered. 4. If the twistlock is touching the bottom plate, press the twistlock upwards while holding it in the corner. 5. The twistlock should be moving up slightly. If it moves a lot, adjust it higher. 6. If the twistlock does not move at all, it needs to be adjusted down. Adjusting 1. Remove the M6 screw from the top of the twistlock. 2. To lower the twistlock, loosen the twistlock nut slightly. To raise the twistlock, tighten the nut. The distance between the top of twistlock head and the bottom of guide block 1 -2 mm 3. Recheck the float of the twistlock. 4. Reinstall the M6 screw.
Twistlock nut Spherical washer Key
Twistlock pin
8 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
Twistlock head ENG 07 02

rev. x
Removing the Twistlock Cylinder 1. Make sure the power supply is disconnected and the oil pressure is relieved from the Split pin system. 2. Remove the hoses from the cylinder. 3. To avoid oil leakage, thread a plastic bag Spacer over the end of the hoses and secure ring them with straps. 4. Pull out the split pins. Remove the spacer rings and the cylinder. Installing the Twistlock Cylinder 1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order. 2. The hoses must be tightened to 95 Nm (70 ft-lbs) torque. 3. De-aerate the system by running the cylinder several times. Removing Sensors 1. Unscrew the cable connection from the sensor. 2. Loosen the two screws on the switch attachment. 3. Remove the sensor.
Cylinder
Sensor
Installing Sensors 1. Perform the steps above in the reverse order, using blue Loctite to the cable connection. 2. The distance between sensor face and flag is approximately 5-6 mm. Check the sensor by grabbing the twistlock head and moving it around in different positions. If the signal is lost, adjust the sensor closer to its flag. Make sure the flag does not come in contact with the sensor.
Signal cable connection
9 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG rev. x
Checking the tower motor brake 1. Disconnect the power. 2. Remove the crank from its stowed position in the tower. 3. Install the crank at the rear end of the tower motor. 4. Place a torque wrench in the socket on the crank 5. Adjust the torque to 65 Nm. 6. If the torque wrench releases as the 65 Nm torque is reached, the brake adjustment is OK. If it does not release and the motorshaft rotates, the brake must be adjusted. See Inspection and maintenance of BGM8 Tower motor at the end of this section.
Tower motor
Crank
75 Nm
Torque wrench
10 of 10
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
07 02 ENG rev. x
Bromma Manual
Important tightening torques EH5/EH170

Tower and main frame
434Nm 434Nm 434Nm 222Nm
434Nm
End beam
91Nm
6.5 Nm
52Nm
Telescopic motor EH5 / EH170
Telescopic motor EH5U / EH170U
434Nm
52Nm 434Nm
0-1- Month. 03 rev.00
Bromma Conquip
Bromma Manual
Limit switch box EH5 / EH170

91Nm
Twistlock EH5 / EH170
Twistlock EH5U / EH170U
100 Nm 95 Nm
91Nm
Flipper motor and gearbox

250Nm after 200 test cycles
385Nm 91Nm
103Nm after 200 test cycles
Bromma Conquip
0-2- Month. 03 rev.00
H:\DWG\A3\A38\38073A.dwg
1 of 2
Inspection and maintenance periods
Inspection and Maintenance

8.1
Inspection and maintenance periods

Equ ipm ent/com po nen ts Frequency What to do ? Inspecting the brake: Mea sure and set working air gap brake disc, lining P ressure plate C arrier / gearing P ressure rings E xtract the ab raded ma tter Inspect the switch elemen ts and repla ce if necessary (e.g . in case o f burn-out)
BMG4 =Telescopic Motor BMG8 = Tower Motor
Every Year Every third month
8
8.6
Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG 4 and 8
Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG4 = Telescopic Motor BMG8 = Tower Motor
8 6 7
5 2 3 4
22 21 e 10 b a 15 11 12 13 14 16 c 17 18 19 20
Inspecting brake BMG 4 and 8
, setting the working air gap
1. Isolate the moto r and brake from the supply, safeguarding them against un inten tional po wer -up. 2. Remove the following: If fitted, forced- cooling fan for motor and brake ma intenance. F lange co ver or fa n guard (21 ). 3. Pu sh the rubber sealing co llar (5) aside. R elease the clip to do this, if necessary . E xtract the abr aded ma tter. 4. Measur the brake disc (7 ): e If the brak e d isc is: 9 mm on b rake motors up to size 100 .(BMG4) 10 mm on bra ke motor s up to size 1 12.(BMG8) Fit a ne brake disc ( Section "Ch anging brake disc on BMG w 4 and 8
Changing thebrake disk BMG 4 and 8 When fitting a ne w brake disc, in spect the other removed pa rts as well and fit new one s if nece ss ary
1. Iso late the moto r and brake from the supply, safeguarding them against , un inten tional power -up. 2. Remove the following: If fitted, forced coolin g fan F lange co ver or fa n guard (21 ), ci rclip (2 0) and fan (19). 3. Rem ove the ru bber sea ling colla r (5 ) an d the ma nual brake release: S etting nuts ( 18), con ica l coil sp rings (1 7), studs (16), rele ase lever (1 5), dowel pin (1 4). 4. Unscr ew hex nuts (1 0e ), ca refully pull off the brake co il body (1 2) (brake ca ble!) an d take out the brak e spr ings (11). 5. Rem ove the dam ping plate (9 ), pres sur e pla te (8) and brake disc (7, 7b) an d cle an the br ak e com ponents . 6. Fit a ne w brake d isc. 7. Re- install th e br ake comp onents. E xcept fo r the r ubber sea ling colla r, fan and fan guard, se t the working air gap ( Inspe cting brake BMG 4 and 8, settin g the wor king air gap , points 5 through 8) 8. With m anual brake r elease: Use se tting n uts to set the flo ating clear ance "s" between the conical co il springs (pressed flat) an d the settin g nuts ( following illustration).
Brak e
BMG 4 and 8
Floa ting clear ance s [mm]

2
Importan t: This flo ating clerance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate can move up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise reliable braking is not , gu ara nteed. 9. Fit the r ubber sea ling colla r ba ck in place and re-install th e dismantled pa rts.
Note:
T he locka ble man ual brake r elea s e ( type HF) is a lready r elea s ed if a re sistan ce is encountered whe n ope rating the gr ub scre w. T he se lf-reengaging manual b rake re lea s e (type HR) ca n be operated with normal hand pressu re. Imp ortant: In brake motors with self-reengaging manual brake release, the manual brake release lever must be removed after startup /maintenance A bracket . is provided for storing it on the outside of the motor.
Changing Springs
1. Isolate the moto r and brake from the su pply, safeguarding them against un inten tional po wer -up. 2. Remove the following: If fitted, fo rced -cooling fan , For motor and brake ma intenance . F lange cover or fa n guard (21 ), ci rclip (2 0) and fan (19). 3. Remove the ru bber sea ling colla r (5) an d the ma nual brake release: s etting nuts (18 ), conical coil sp rings (1 7), studs ( 16) , release le ver ( 15) , dowel pin (1 4). 4. Unscrew he x nuts ( 10e ), pull o ff the co il body ( 12) . B y app rox. 50 mm (watch the bra ke ca ble!) . 5. Cha nge
brake springs (11).
P os ition the bra ke sp rings symme trically. 6. Re- install th e br ake components. . E xcept fo r the r ubber sea ling colla r, fan an d fan gu ard, set the wor king air ga p ( Ins pecting brake BMG 4 and 8 setting the working air gap , points 5 th rough 8) 7. With manual brake release Use setting nuts to s et floating c learance "s" between : the co nical coil springs (pressed fla t) an d the setting nuts ( following illustration.)
Brak e
BMG 4 and 8
Floa ting clear ance s [mm]

2
Importan t: This floating clearance "s" is necessary so that the pressure plate can move up as the brake lining wears. Otherwise reliable braking is not , gu aranteed . 8. Fit the rubber sealing colla r ba ck in place and re-install th e dismantled pa rts.
Note
Fit new settingnuts (18) an d hexag on nuts ( 10e ) if the re moval pr oced ure is r epeated!
9
9.3
kVA
Work done, working air gap, braking torques of brake BMG 4 - 8
P Hz
Work done, working air gap, braking torques of brake BMG 4-8
Work do ne until main tenance [10 6 J] Workin g air gap [mm] min. 1) ma x. Br aking torque [N m] Br aking torque se ttings Type an d n o. of springs Nor mal Red Order n umber o f spr ings Norma l Red
Brak e type
Fo r motor size
0.25
0.6
135 150 8 135 151 6 40 BMG 4 100 260 75 112M 132S 6 6 -
BMG 8
600
0.3
1.2
184 845 3 135 570 8
1)
Please note when checking the air gap: Parallelism tolerances on the brake disk may give rice to deviation of 0.1 after a test run.
A ddres s lis t
C o n t a c t y o u r B R O M M A l o c a l r e p r e s e n t a t i v e o r S E W A ddres s es below.
G ermany Headquarters P roduc tion S ales S ervic e P roduc tion B ruc hs al S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o E rnst-B lickle-S tra e 42 D-76646 B ruchs al P.O. B ox P os tfach 3023 D-76642 B ruchsal S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o E rnst-B lickle-S tra e 1 D-76676 G raben-Neudorf P.O. B ox P os tfach 1220 D-76671 G raben-Neudorf S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o Alte R icklinger S tra e 40-42 D-30823 G arbs en P.O. B ox P os tfach 110453 D-30804 G arbs en S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o Domagks tra e 5 D-85551 K irchheim S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o S iemens s tra e 1 D-40764 Langenfeld S E W-E UR ODR IV E G mbH & C o Dnkritzer Weg 1 D-08393 Meerane Tel. (0 72 51) 75-0 F ax (0 72 51) 75-19 70 http://www.S E W-E UR ODR IV E .de s ew@ s ew-eurodrive.de Tel. (0 72 51) 75-0 F ax (0 72 51) 75-29 70 Telex 7 822 276
G raben
A s s embly S ervic e
G arbs en (near Hannover)
Tel. (0 51 37) 87 98-30 F ax (0 51 37) 87 98-55 s cm-garbs en@ s ew-eurodrive.de
K irc hheim (near Mnchen) L angenfeld (near Ds s eldorf) Meerane (near Zwickau)
Tel. (0 89) 90 95 52-10 F ax (0 89) 90 95 52-50 s cm-kirchheim@ s ew-eurodrive.de Tel. (0 21 73) 85 07-30 F ax (0 21 73) 85 07-55 s cm-langenfeld@ s ew-eurodrive.de Tel. (0 37 64) 76 06-0 F ax (0 37 64) 76 06-30 s cm-meerane@ s ew-eurodrive.de
Additional address es for s ervice in G ermany provided on reques t! F ranc e P roduc tion S ales S ervic e A s s embly S ales S ervic e Haguenau S E W-US OC OME S AS 48-54, route de S oufflenheim B . P. 185 F -67506 Haguenau C edex S E W-US OC OME S AS P arc d ctivit s de Magellan a 62, avenue de Magellan - B . P. 182 F -33607 P es s ac C edex S E W-US OC OME S AS P arc d f faires R oos evelt A R ue J acques Tati F -69120 Vaulx en Velin S E W-US OC OME S AS Zone indus trielle 2, rue Denis P apin F -77390 Verneuil I t ang E Tel. 03 88 73 67 00 F ax 03 88 73 66 00 http://www.us ocome.com s ew@ us ocome.com Tel. 05 57 26 39 00 F ax 05 57 26 39 09
B ordeaux
Lyon
Tel. 04 72 15 37 00 F ax 04 72 15 37 15
P aris
Tel. 01 64 42 40 80 F ax 01 64 42 40 88
Additional address es for s ervice in F rance provided on reques t! A rgentina A s s embly S ales S ervic e A us tralia A s s embly S ales S ervic e Melbourne S E W-E UR ODR IV E P T Y. LT D. 27 B everage Drive Tullamarine, Victoria 3043 S E W-E UR ODR IV E P T Y. LT D. 9, S leigh P lace, Wetherill P ark New S outh Wales , 2164 S E W-E UR ODR IV E G es .m.b.H. R ichard-S traus s -S tras s e 24 A-1230 Wien Tel. (03) 99 33 10 00 F ax (03) 99 33 10 03 Tel. (02) 97 25 99 00 F ax (02) 97 25 99 05 B uenos A ires S E W E UR ODR IV E AR G E NT INA S .A. C entro Indus trial G arin, Lote 35 R uta P anamericana K m 37,5 1619 G arin Tel. (3327) 45 72 84 F ax (3327) 45 72 21 s ewar@ s ew-eurodrive.com.ar
S ydney
A us tria A s s embly S ales S ervic e Wien Tel. (01) 6 17 55 00-0 F ax (01) 6 17 55 00-30 s ew@ s ew-eurodrive.at
Address list
Belgium Assembly Sales Service Brazil Production Sales Service Sao Paulo SEW DO BRASIL Motores-Redutores Ltda. Rodovia Presidente Dutra, km 208 CEP 07210-000 - Guarulhos - SP Tel. (011) 64 60-64 33 Fax (011) 64 80 33 28 sew@sew.com.br Brssel CARON-VECTOR S.A. Avenue Eiffel 5 B-1300 Wavre Tel. (010) 23 13 11 Fax (010) 2313 36 http://www.caron-vector.be info@caron-vector.be
Additional addresses for service in Brazil provided on request! Bulgaria Sales Sofia BEVER-DRIVE GMBH Bogdanovetz Str.1 BG-1606 Sofia Tel. (92) 9 53 25 65 Fax (92) 9 54 93 45 bever@mbox.infotel.bg
Canada Assembly Sales Service Toronto SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. 210 Walker Drive Bramalea, Ontario L6T3W1 SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. 7188 Honeyman Street Delta. B.C. V4G 1 E2 SEW-EURODRIVE CO. OF CANADA LTD. 2555 Rue Leger Street LaSalle, Quebec H8N 2V9 Tel. (905) 7 91-15 53 Fax (905) 7 91-29 99 www.sew-eurodrive.ca Tel. (604) 9 46-55 35 Fax (604) 946-2513 Tel. (514) 3 67-11 24 Fax (514) 3 67-36 77
Vancouver
Montreal
Additional addresses for service in Canada provided on request! Chile Assembly Sales Service Santiago de Chile SEW-EURODRIVE CHILE Motores-Reductores LTDA. Panamericana Norte No 9261 Casilla 23 - Correo Quilicura RCH-Santiago de Chile Tel. (02) 6 23 82 03+6 23 81 63 Fax (02) 6 23 81 79
China Production Assembly Sales Service Colombia Assembly Sales Service Croatia Sales Service Czech Republic Sales Praha SEW-EURODRIVE S.R.O. Business Centrum Praha Lun 591 16000 Praha 6 Tel. 02/20 12 12 34 + 20 12 12 36 Fax 02/20 12 12 37 sew@sew-eurodrive.cz Zagreb KOMPEKS d. o. o. PIT Erddy 4 II HR 10 000 Zagreb Tel. +385 14 61 31 58 Fax +385 14 61 31 58 Bogot SEW-EURODRIVE COLOMBIA LTDA. Calle 22 No. 132-60 Bodega 6, Manzana B Santaf de Bogot Tel. (0571) 5 47 50 50 Fax (0571) 5 47 50 44 sewcol@andinet.com Tianjin SEW-EURODRIVE (Tianjin) Co., Ltd. No. 46, 7th Avenue, TEDA Tianjin 300457 Tel. (022) 25 32 26 12 Fax (022) 25 32 26 11
Denmark Assembly Sales Service Estonia Sales Tallin ALAS-KUUL AS Paldiski mnt.125 EE 0006 Tallin Tel. 6 59 32 30 Fax 6 59 32 31 Kopenhagen SEW-EURODRIVEA/S Geminivej 28-30, P.O. Box 100 DK-2670 Greve Tel. 4395 8500 Fax 4395 8509 http://www.sew-eurodrive.dk sew@sew-eurodrive.dk
Address list
Finland Assembly Sales Service Great Britain Assembly Sales Service Greece Sales Service Hong Kong Assembly Sales Service Hong Kong SEW-EURODRIVE LTD. Unit No. 801-806, 8th Floor Hong Leong Industrial Complex No. 4, Wang Kwong Road Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel. 2-7 96 04 77 + 79 60 46 54 Fax 2-7 95-91 29 sew@sewhk.com Athen Christ. Boznos & Son S.A. 12, Mavromichali Street P.O. Box 80136, GR-18545 Piraeus Tel. 14 22 51 34 Fax 14 22 51 59 Boznos@otenet.gr Normanton SEW-EURODRIVE Ltd. Beckbridge Industrial Estate P.O. Box No.1 GB-Normanton, West- Yorkshire WF6 1QR Tel. 19 24 89 38 55 Fax 19 24 89 37 02 Lahti SEW-EURODRIVE OY Vesimentie 4 FIN-15860 Hollola 2 Tel. (3) 589 300 Fax (3) 780 6211
Hungary Sales Service India Assembly Sales Service Ireland Sales Service Dublin Alperton Engineering Ltd. 48 Moyle Road Dublin Industrial Estate Glasnevin, Dublin 11 Tel. (01) 8 30 62 77 Fax (01) 8 30 64 58 Baroda SEW-EURODRIVE India Pvt. Ltd. Plot No. 4, Gidc Por Ramangamdi Baroda - 391 243 Gujarat Tel. 0 265-83 10 86 Fax 0 265-83 10 87 sew.baroda@gecsl.com Budapest SEW-EURODRIVE Kft. H-1037 Budapest Kunigunda u. 18 Tel. +36 1 437 06 58 Fax +36 1 437 06 50
Italy Assembly Sales Service Japan Assembly Sales Service Korea Assembly Sales Service Luxembourg Assembly Sales Service Macedonia Sales Skopje SGS-Skopje / Macedonia "Teodosij Sinactaski 6691000 Skopje / Macedonia Tel. (0991) 38 43 90 Fax (0991) 38 43 90 Brssel CARON-VECTOR S.A. Avenue Eiffel 5 B-1300 Wavre Tel. (010) 23 13 11 Fax (010) 2313 36 http://www.caron-vector.be info@caron-vector.be Ansan-City SEW-EURODRIVE KOREA CO., LTD. B 601-4, Banweol Industrial Estate Unit 1048-4, Shingil-Dong Ansan 425-120 Tel. (031) 4 92-80 51 Fax (031) 4 92-80 56 master@sew-korea.co.kr Toyoda-cho SEW-EURODRIVE JAPAN CO., LTD 250-1, Shimoman-no, Toyoda-cho, Iwata gun Shizuoka prefecture, P.O. Box 438-0818 Tel. (0 53 83) 7 3811-13 Fax (0 53 83) 7 3814 Milano SEW-EURODRIVE di R. Blickle & Co.s.a.s. Via Bernini,14 I-20020 Solaro (Milano) Tel. (02) 96 98 01 Fax (02) 96 79 97 81
Malaysia Assembly Sales Service Johore SEW-EURODRIVE SDN BHD No. 95, Jalan Seroja 39, Taman Johor Jaya 81000 Johor Bahru, Johor West Malaysia Tel. (07) 3 54 57 07 + 3 54 94 09 Fax (07) 3 5414 04
Address list
Netherlands Assembly Sales Service Rotterdam VECTOR Aandrijftechniek B.V. Industrieweg 175 NL-3044 AS Rotterdam Postbus 10085 NL-3004 AB Rotterdam Tel. +31 10 44 63 700 Fax +31 10 41 55 552 http://www.vector.nu info@vector.nu
New Zealand Assembly Sales Service Auckland SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. P.O. Box 58-428 82 Greenmount drive East Tamaki Auckland SEW-EURODRIVE NEW ZEALAND LTD. 10 Settlers Crescent, Ferrymead Christchurch Tel. 0064-9-2 74 56 27 Fax 0064-9-2 74 01 65 sales@sew-eurodrive.co.za Tel. 0064-3-3 84 62 51 Fax 0064-3-3 85 64 55 sales@sew-eurodrive.co.nz
Christchurch
Norway Assembly Sales Service Peru Assembly Sales Service Poland Sales Lodz SEW-EURODRIVE Polska Sp.z.o.o. ul. Pojezierska 63 91-338 Lodz Tel. (042) 6 16 22 00 Fax (042) 6 16 22 10 sew@sew-eurodrive.pl Lima SEW DEL PERU MOTORES REDUCTORES S.A.C. Los Calderos # 120-124 Urbanizacion Industrial Vulcano, ATE, Lima Tel. (511) 349-52 80 Fax (511) 349-30 02 sewperu@terra.com.pe Moss SEW-EURODRIVE A/S Solgaard skog 71 N-1599 Moss Tel. (69) 2410 20 Fax (69) 2410 40 sew@sew-eurodrive.no
Portugal Assembly Sales Service Romania Sales Service Russia Sales St. Petersburg ZAO SEW-EURODRIVE P.O. Box 193 193015 St. Petersburg Tel. (812) 3 26 09 41 + 5 35 04 30 Fax (812) 5 35 22 87 sew@sew-eurodrive.ru Bucuresti Sialco Trading SRL str. Madrid nr.4 71222 Bucuresti Tel. (01) 2 30 13 28 Fax (01) 2 30 71 70 sialco@mediasat.ro Coimbra SEW-EURODRIVE, LDA. Apartado 15 P-3050-901 Mealhada Tel. (0231) 20 96 70 Fax (0231) 20 36 85 infosew@sew-eurodrive.pt
Singapore Assembly Sales Service Slovenia Sales Service Celje Pakman - Pogonska Tehnika d.o.o. UI. XIV. divizije 14 SLO 3000 Celje Tel. 00386 3 490 83 20 Fax 00386 3 490 83 21 pakman@siol.net SEW-EURODRIVE PTE. LTD. No 9, Tuas Drive 2 Jurong Industrial Estate Singapore 638644 Tel. 8 62 17 01-705 Fax 8 61 28 27 Telex 38 659
10
Address list
South Africa Assembly Sales Service Johannesburg SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Eurodrive House Cnr. Adcock Ingram and Aerodrome Roads Aeroton Ext. 2 Johannesburg 2013 P.O.Box 90004 Bertsham 2013 SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED Rainbow Park Cnr. Racecourse & Omuramba Road Montague Gardens Cape Town P.O.Box 36556 Chempet 7442 Cape Town SEW-EURODRIVE (PROPRIETARY) LIMITED 2 Monaceo Place Pinetown Durban P.O. Box 10433, Ashwood 3605 Tel. + 27 11 248 70 00 Fax +27 11 494 23 11 ljansen@sew.co.za
Capetown
Tel. +27 21 552 98 20 Fax +27 21 552 98 30 Telex 576 062
Durban
Tel. +27 31 700 34 51 Fax +27 31 700 38 47
Spain Assembly Sales Service Sweden Assembly Sales Service Switzerland Assembly Sales Service Thailand Assembly Sales Service Chon Buri SEW-EURODRIVE (Thailand) Ltd. Bangpakong Industrial Park 2 700/456, Moo.7, Tambol Donhuaroh Muang District Chon Buri 20000 Tel. 0066-38 21 40 22 Fax 0066-38 21 45 31 sewthailand@sew-eurodrive.co.th Basel Alfred lmhof A.G. Jurastrasse 10 CH-4142 Mnchenstein bei Basel Tel. (061) 4 17 17 17 Fax (061) 4 17 17 00 http://www.imhof-sew.ch info@imhof-sew.ch Jnkping SEW-EURODRIVE AB Gnejsvgen 6-8 S-55303 Jnkping Box 3100 S-55003 Jnkping Tel. (036) 34 42 00 Fax (036) 34 42 80 www.sew-eurodrive.se Bilbao SEW-EURODRIVE ESPAA, S.L. Parque Tecnolgico, Edificio, 302 E-48170 Zamudio (Vizcaya) Tel. 9 44 31 84 70 Fax 9 44 31 84 71 sew.spain@sew-eurodrive.es
Turkey Assembly Sales Service USA Production Assembly Sales Service Assembly Sales Service Greenville SEW-EURODRIVE INC. 1295 Old Spartanburg Highway P.O. Box 518 Lyman, S.C. 29365 SEW-EURODRIVE INC. 30599 San Antonio St. Hayward, California 94544-7101 SEW-EURODRIVE INC. Pureland Ind. Complex 200 High Hill Road, P.O. Box 481 Bridgeport, New Jersey 08014 SEW-EURODRIVE INC. 2001 West Main Street Troy, Ohio 45373 SEW-EURODRIVE INC. 3950 Platinum Way Dallas, Texas 75237 Tel. (864) 4 39 75 37 Fax Sales (864) 439-78 30 Fax Manuf. (864) 4 39-99 48 Fax Ass. (864) 4 39-05 66 Telex 805 550 Tel. (510) 4 87-35 60 Fax (510) 4 87-63 81 Tel. (856) 4 67-22 77 Fax (856) 8 45-31 79 Istanbul SEW-EURODRIVE Hareket Sistemleri San. ve Tic. Ltd. Sti Bagdat Cad. Koruma Cikmazi No. 3 TR-81540 Maltepe ISTANBUL Tel. (0216) 4 41 91 63 + 4 41 91 64 + 3 83 80 14 + 3 83 80 15 Fax (0216) 3 05 58 67 seweurodrive@superonline.com.tr
San Francisco
Philadelphia/PA
Dayton
Tel. (9 37) 3 35-00 36 Fax (9 37) 4 40-37 99 Tel. (214) 3 30-48 24 Fax (214) 3 30-47 24
Dallas
11
Address list
USA Additional addresses for service in the USA provided on request! Venezuela Assembly Sales Service Valencia SEW-EURODRIVE Venezuela S.A. Av. Norte Sur No. 3, Galpon 84-319 Zona Industrial Municipal Norte Valencia Tel. +58 (241) 8 32 98 04 Fax +58 (241) 8 38 62 75 sewventas@cantr.net sewfinanzas@cantr.net
12
8 Spare parts and service

Spare parts list by major groups
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
08 01 ENG rev.
Page 1 of 1 Article No: Drawing No: Serial No: Customer: Standard: Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1004850 GENERAL ASSEMBLY 1004850 EH170U Gottwald 440V AC - 115V AC - 60Hz / CANopen Material / Article No. sign: rev: RGT date: 2005-07-15 -
Quant Title 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 Frame EH170U Telescopic beam unit Tower Tension rod Tension rod Frame std. components Tower std. components Twistlock assembly Twistlock assembly Cable chain assy. Tower, Cable chain assy. Twin twenty housing Hydraulic assy. Pump unit assy. Twin, Pump unit assy. Flipper arm assy. Gearbox assy. telescopic Gearbox assy. tower Decoration Electrical system LED-panel mount. det. LED-cover assy. El.customised
Dwg No. 1002141 24142 24161 23854 23855 24143 17023 1002945 1002946 37409 39047 17652 39311 34375 39217 24169 39055 44768 16444 1002493 1001444 1002189 1002655
Art. No. 1002141 24142 24161 23854 23855 24143 17023 1002945 1002946 37409 39047 17652 39311 34375 39217 24169 39055 44768 16444 1002493 1001444 1002189 1002655
Remarks Frame std 16930, Lifting beam 23951 & 23952, Main beam twin twenty 16164, Main beam 62493 Telescopic beam 38860, Gable end 16989
ISO, STD, LEFT ISO, STD, RIGHT
Floating ISO, 100 Floating ISO, 100
SCS / CANopen parallel interface Bolted on twinhousing (Blue LED) 115V AC / SCS / CANopen parallel interface
THIS DRAWING IS COPYRIGHT AND IS THE PROPERTY OF BROMMA CONQUIP AB. THE DESIGN AND OR CONSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED THEREIN MAY NOT BE COPIED OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF THE OWNER.
48 3 33 47 4 32 49
1 35 36 37
50
16 26 34 17 10 21
20 14 7 39 43 38 8 39 9
11 5
24 15 29 23 6 38 22 43 44 20 28 38 43 46 39 43 42 30 45
SIGN DATE GENERAL ASSY SERIAL No SPREADER TYPE SURFACE TREATMENT
43 44 38 43 41 18
12 31 25
40 38 36
19 38 43 39 27
TOLERANCE GENERAL SS-ISO 2768
DESIGNED PLOT DATE
Illtek 021029 Exploded View Tower

A Partek Company
EH5
SCALE E
REVISION
ARTICLE No
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52001
EH5 Tower New standard

DRAWING SP-52001
PART NO
401517 38863 24161 1 51624 54662 71529 39026 53137 45476 401372 56242 700737 71520
DESCRIPTION
GLIDE PLATE ASSY TOWER CHAIN ASSY TOWER SEE OTHER DRAWING LIFTING SHAFT 90x334 LOCKING SHAFT ASSY TUBE 1 1/2"CHAIN ROBALON PLATE LOWER GLIDE PLATE UPPER TOWER EH5 CRANK ASSY EH5 CHAIN ATTACHMENT CABLE CLAMP D=34 CHAIN DUPLEX 1 1/2" CHAIN LOCK DUPLEX 1 1/2"
QTY
1 1 1 0 1 1 4 4 8 1 1 2 1 2
POS
0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
REMARKS
Include pos.6,7,14,20 Include pos. 5,9,11,12,15,23,24
See SP-52002 Included in Pos 48 Included in Pos 48
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 4
PART NO
401518 43075 401534 401074 39171 39174 75497 78218 75051 75713 700736 75052 75055 39173 75292 75268 39170
DESCRIPTION
STEERING PIN LOCKING PLATE 12X12X40 CABLE ATTACHMENT COVER PLATE BRACKET UPPER RIGHT BRACKET LOWER RIGHT SCREW MF6S 8X 35 FZB 10.9 SCREW M6S 12X120 FZB 8.8 SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8 SCREW MC6S 6X 30 FZB 8.8 SCREW M6S 24x160 FZB 8.8 NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 BRACKET LOWER LEFT WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB BRACKET UPPER LEFT
QTY
16 1 4 1 1 1 32 2 4 1 2 4 2 1 4 1 1
POS
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
REMARKS
Include pos. 10,17,21,26,34
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 4
PART NO
74339 72191 85482 75291 54528 75328 75225 75090 70006 401471 401547 75328 70006 401546 24199 700457 45596
DESCRIPTION
WASHER TBRSB 21X52X8 FZB SCHACKLE "RAK GALV" CHAIN HLZ 4.5-2 L=250 WASHER BRB 13X24X2.5 FZB HB200 ATTACHMENT CABLE WAGON WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 SCREW M6S 8X 22 FZB 8.8 NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB SCREW M6S 8X 35 FZB 8.8 ANGEL BAR ANGLE BAR WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 SCREW M6S 8X 35 FZB 8.8 ANGLE BAR FRAME SCS2 SNAP HOOK LIFTING SHAFT ASSY
QTY
4 4 3 4 1 10 2 16 16 1 1 32 5 1 1 1 1
POS
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
REMARKS
Included in Pos 48 Included in Pos 48
Included in Pos 48 Include Pos. 3,4,32,33,47
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 3 av 4
PART NO
46679 24263
DESCRIPTION
MOUNTING EL.CAB. SPREADER CABINET TOWER
QTY
4 1
POS
49 50
REMARKS
See also drawing SP-52013
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 4 av 4
14
11 35 10 33 34 39 36 43
20 12 19 18 29 45 25 8 24 23 22 9 13 21 12 6 13 12 15 5 41 3 31 38 48 47 17 37 28 30 42 27
40 32 1 26 7 44
46 16
SIGN DESIGNED PLOT DATE
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
SPREADER TYPE
Illtek 021002
EH5 ll Exploded View Tower gear box assy
SURFACE TREATMENT
SCALE E
REVISION
ARTICLE No
DRAWING NUMBER
A Partek Company
SP-52002
EH5 Tower Gearbox Assy

DRAWING SP-52002
PART NO
58549 54659 52196 51233 53129 36609 34379 52150 44756 71328 71546 71548 48188 71547
DESCRIPTION
GEARBOX R97 ELM.BRAKE 360-404V MOTOR SHELF EH5 TOWER CHAIN COVER TOWER EH5 COVERPLATE CHAIN WHEEL EH5 CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5 25 CHAIN WHEEL CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5 TRANSMISSION SHAFT DIA 80 SHAFT ASSY EH5 GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" BEARINGHOUSE SNL 518-615 SEALING TSNA 518A TOWER DISTANS BEARING BUSH
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 2
POS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
REMARKS
Part no for gearbox is 72157 and for only El motor is 58538
SEAL KIT
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 4
PART NO
71519 71520 70622 71539 71549 74119 51517 44196 75092 76847 75052 73965 79513 75225 75286 70474 75008
DESCRIPTION
CHAIN 1 1/2" DUPLEX TOWER CHAIN LOCK DUPLEX 1 1/2" SCREW SK6SS 12X 12 14.9 BEARING 22218 CCK W33 TOWER DISTANCE COVER BEARINGHOUSE ASNH518-615 CHAIN WHEEL TOWER EH5 13 LOCKING PLATE 1X20X46 SCREW M6S 6X 20 FZB 8.8 KEY 22X14X100 SMS2307 NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB KEY 22X14X100 SMS 2306 KEY 18X11X100 RK SCREW M6S 8X 22 FZB 8.8 SPRING PIN 5X30 FRP SCREW M6S 20X 80 FZB 8.8 SCREW M6S 20X 70 FZB 8.8
QTY
1 1 1 2 4 1 1 2 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 4 1
POS
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 26 27 28 29 30
REMARKS
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 4
PART NO
76848 75052 1 75051 70477 75225 75285 70479 75292 74339 70622 75267 75267 44769 70919 71521 75052
DESCRIPTION
SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8 FULLT NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB SEE REMARKS SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8 SCREW M6S 16X 80 FZB 8.8 SCREW M6S 8X 22 FZB 8.8 LOCKING WASHER M20 NUT M20 M6M FZB KLASS 8 WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200 WASHER TBRSB 21X52X8 FZB SCREW SK6SS 12X 12 14.9 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 8 FZB WASHER NORD-LOCK M 8 FZB WASHER WASHER NORD-LOCK M20 CHAIN LOCK1/2 LINK DUPL.1 1/2" NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB
QTY
2 4 1 4 4 3 1 2 4 4 1 4 3 1 4 1 4
POS
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
REMARKS
CAP (SEW)
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 3 av 4
PART NO
74339
DESCRIPTION
WASHER TBRSB 21X52X8 FZB
QTY
4
POS
48
REMARKS
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 4 av 4
13 15 16 14
1 32 25 8 26 36 37 22 24 18 5 20 19 12
4 3
21 23 31 10 34 11
33 35 2
29 17 6 28 30 27
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
SPREADER TYPE
Illtek 020903 Exploded View Frame

A Partek Company
EH5
SURFACE TREATMENT
SCALE E
REVISION
ARTICLE No
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52003
EH5 Frame
DRAWING SP-52003
PART NO
16997 43072 401278 401401 43036 401279 1 401277 1 47805 75052 38865 1 48392 FRAME LIFTING LUG ASSY GLIDE PLATE FRAME FRAME COVER ASSY GLIDE PLATE 80X40X20 20STOP ASSY SEE REMARKS LANDING BUFFER ASSY SEE REMARKS PLATE NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB COVER SEE REMARKS CLIP
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1 4 2 4 1 4 0 4 0 1 6 1 0 3
POS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 15 16
REMARKS
Include pos.10,11,21,23,31,34, Included in Glide plate assy See drawing SP-52004 Include pos.12,19,20
Include pos.17,27,28,29,30 See lamp assy SP- 52010 Include pos.25,26,32,36,37 See Drawing SP 52006
See Electric drawing part list Complete clip with screw,washer and nut
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 3
PART NO
401281 75497 75092 54855 75051 75328 75090 79830 49853 75607 401280 401282 75295 51110 75055 76332 71328 SHIM
DESCRIPTION
QTY
2 2 2 1 6 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 4 1
POS
17 18 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 33
REMARKS
SCREW MF6S 8X 35 FZB 10.9 SCREW M6S 6X 20 FZB 8.8 FLAT BAR SCREW M6S 20X 90 FZB 8.8 WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB WASHER SRB 14X28X2 FZB SLEEV SCREW M6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8 20BUFFER HOLDER FOR GLIDE PLATE WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB LIFTING LUG WELD NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 GREASE FITTING KR1/8 STRAIGHT GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8"
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 3
PART NO
75292 71328 401276 79141
DESCRIPTION
WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200 GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" BUFFER SCREW M6S 12X 35 FZB 8.8
QTY
12 4 1 2
POS
34 35 36 37
REMARKS
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 3 av 3
17 19 25 18 10 20 24
16 15 11 2 9 3 10
13 12 15 14
22 21 23
6 5
7 8
4 6
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
SPREADER TYPE
Illtek 021002 Exploded View Telescopic Beam

A Partek Company
EH5 ll
SURFACE TREATMENT
SCALE E
REVISION
ARTICLE No
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52004
EH5 Telescopic Beam

DRAWING SP-52004
PART NO
38861 24142 62595 24168 44615 44614 75756 75055 70538 24167 1 401528 401529 401530
DESCRIPTION
GLIDE PLATE ASSY TELESCOPIC BEAM ASSY FLIPPER ARM FLIPPER ARM GLIDE PLATE LOWER 20X100X200 GLIDE PLATE UPPER 25X100X250 SCREW MF6S 12X 70 FZB 10.9 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 WASHER BRB 13X24X2 FZB HB200 FLIPPER ARM SEE REMARKS BUFFER ASSY BUFFER SHIM PLATE
QTY
2 1 1 1 2 2 4 4 4 1 3 1 1 2
POS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
REMARKS
Include pos. 4,5,6,7,8 and pos 3 on drawing SP-52003 Assy with 2 Beams and 1 Gable end Please note! Rubber buffer not included, see item 11 Please note! Rubber buffer not included, see item 11
Please note! Rubber buffer not included, see item 11 See Drawing SP-52009 Include pos.12,13,14,15,16 Included in pos.11 Included in pos.11
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 2
PART NO
75783 75291 75055 51593 75330 51593 76842 75292 47678 75052 75292 70918
DESCRIPTION
SCREW M6S 12X 50 FZB 8.8 WASHER BRB 13X24X2.5 FZB HB200 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 ATTACHMENT FLIPPER ARM B=45 SCREW MC6S 16X 50 FZB 8.8 ATTACHMENT FLIPPER ARM B=45 SCREW M6S 20X110 FZB 8.8 WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200 SPACER (M20) NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200 WASHER NORD-LOCK M16 FZB
QTY
2 4 2 1 2 1 4 8 4 4 8 2
POS
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
REMARKS
Included in pos.11 Included in pos.11 Included in pos.11 Included in pos. 19 Included in pos. 19 Include Pos.17, 18, 25.
Included in pos. 19
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 2
15
2 3 38
53 54
55
231 41 23 65 37
47 10 13 12 16 17 59 19 58 40
4 34 35 43
45 11 44 61 18 14 51 14 25 28 57 49 33 56 42
62 60
20 28 29
32 7 24 22 39 31 30 46
27 26
8 9 74 63
36
71 68 67 72 73 52 64 69 70
SPREADER TYPE SURFACE TREATMENT TOLERANCE GENERAL SS-ISO 2768
69
SIGN DESIGNED PLOT DATE DATE
70
66 65
SERIAL No
GENERAL ASSY
Illtek
020926
EH5
SCALE E
REVISION
ARTICLE No
Exploded View Hydraulic Assy End beam

A Partek Company
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52005
EH5 Hydraulic Assy

DRAWING SP-52005
PART NO
76526 56350 74564 44447 71864 71877 79801 71297 78371 76196 56360
DESCRIPTION
HYDRAULIC OIL ISO VG 32 HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87 COUPLING GE10-SR 3/8" COUPLING RESTRICT.GE10SR 1.2MM COUPLING SV10-S COUPLING GE12-SR 1/2" PRESSURE FILTER (50L) PI3605FILTER INSERT SHOCK RELIF VALVE 140 BAR HYDRAULIC MOTOR INCL.CHOCKVALV 300CC HOSE 821-06/KL 580/P86/P86
QTY
50 2 13 3 6 2 1 1 3 3 1
POS
REMARKS
50L OIL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 SEE DRAWING SP-52009 FOR MORE DETAILS
24 June 2003
Sida 1 av 6
PART NO
71872 71874 44553 71764 78960 71290 73380 71320 72005 58016 56334 73096 700735
DESCRIPTION
COUPLING GE20-S 1 1/16"-12 UNF COUPLING GE12-S 9/16"-18 UNF DRAIN PIPE EH5 COUPLING 3.5/28 AIR BREATHER 3"MY" VALVE RHD12-S NON RETURN COUPLING EDKO 12-S HYDRAULIC PUMP PVQ10 ELMOTOR 2.2kW 380/415/440/480 HOSE 821-06/KL 460/P86/P86 HOSE 821-06/KL 560/P86/P87 VALVE DG4V-3-2C-MU-H7-60 VALV BLOCK
QTY
2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 4 1
POS
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24
REMARKS
WHEN YOU ORDER SEAL KIT FOR THIS PUMP PLEASE STATE K4264
WHEN YOU ORDER SEAL KIT PLEASE STATE PART NO K4222 AND SOLENOID 70422
24 June 2003
Sida 2 av 6
PART NO
75195 75090 75328 71871 70157 56350 71866 57419 56349 56348 56348 71343 56349
DESCRIPTION
SCREW MC6S 8X100 12.9 DIN912 NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 COUPLING GE12-SR 3/8" COUPLING VSTI 3/8"-JE HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87 COUPLING GE10-SR 1/4" HOSE 821-04/KL 630/P86/P86 HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87 HOSE 821-04/KL1720/P86/P87 HOSE 821-04/KL1720/P86/P87 SIGHT GLASS AS240 R 3/4" HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87
QTY
2 2 2 2 4 1 4 2 2 2 2 2 2
POS
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
REMARKS
24 June 2003
Sida 3 av 6
PART NO
56350 56349 57425 75375 44552 45965 71896 70084 75055 79019 46799 34224 39221
DESCRIPTION
HOSE 821-04/KL 480/P86/P87 HOSE 821-04/KL 580/P86/P87 HOSE 821-06/KL 770/P86/P86 SCREW MC6S 5X 30 12.9 OBEH SUCTION PIPE EH5 PLUG VSTIR 1/2" KOMPL. COUPLING KOR20-12-S COUPLING MTNIP.ST-04-R FORM A NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 PLASTIC RING FOR COUPLI. 71764 FLAP GB. EH130/600 GASKET HYD.TANK EH5 HYDR.TANK LID EH5
QTY
2 1 1 16 1 1 1 1 4 1 2 1 1
POS
38 39 40 41 43 44 45 46 49 51 52 53 54
REMARKS
24 June 2003
Sida 4 av 6
PART NO
75212 K3726 75294 1 1 70040 75290 70403 79281 75293 75552 401400 401399
DESCRIPTION
SCREW M6S 6X 25 FZB 8.8 O-RING (HYDRV./BLOCK) WASHER BRB 10.5X22X2 FZB HB200 SEE REMARKS SEE REMARKS SCREW SK6SS 6X 10 8.8 SCREW M6S 10X 30 FZB 8.8 CUP SPRING 23X10.2X1.25 D-2093 PLUG IN BOX 8' OFF WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2 WASHER SRKB 7X25X1.5 FZB FLATBAR FLAP
QTY
10 4 4 1 1 1 2 2 1 14 6 1 1
POS
55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 64 65 66
REMARKS
KEY FOR MOTOR SHAFT ON EL.MOTOR PART NO 72005 KEY FOR PUMP PART NO 71320
24 June 2003
Sida 5 av 6
PART NO
44762 44760 75669 75098 75329 79265 75159
DESCRIPTION
FLAT BAR FLAP EH5 SCREW M6S 6X 30 FZB 8.8 NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB WASHER BRB 4.3X 9X0.8 FZB HB2 SCREW MC6S 4X 25 FZB 8.8 NUT M 4 LOC-KING FZB
QTY
1 1 14 14 4 4 4
POS
67 68 70 71 72 73 74
REMARKS
24 June 2003
Sida 6 av 6
8 6 5 2 7
18 26 25 1 7 4 5 7 3 9 10 13 15 16
12 11 23 22 19 20 24 21 28 27 14 17
30
SIGN DESIGNED PLOT DATE DATE GENERAL ASSY SERIAL No
29
SPREADER TYPE SURFACE TREATMENT TOLERANCE GENERAL SS-ISO 2768
Illtek 020910
EH5 Exploded View Telescopic Gearbox Assy
SCALE E
REVISION
ARTICLE No
DRAWING NUMBER
A Partek Company
SP-52006
EH5 Telescopic Gearbox Assy

DRAWING SP-52006
PART NO
53596 53603 53604 53605 73562 74243 73573 53595 53594 75212 700730 73564 51515 51664 SHAFT DISTANCE DISTANCE DISTANCE BEARING 22212 CC W33 LOCKING RING SGA 60 RUBBER SEALING V-70A COVER COVER SCREW M6S 6X 25 FZB 8.8 KEY 18X11X80 KEY 18X11X 40 CHAIN WHEEL E112-1-11 WASHER 6X21X80
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 12 1 1 1 1
POS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
REMARKS
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 2
PART NO
75285 75286 75289 71328 39055 401287 75008 75292 75052 79785 75294 75119 62345 700743 79680 77779
DESCRIPTION
LOCKING WASHER M20 SPRING PIN 5X30 FRP SCREW M6S 20X 35 FZB 8.8 GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" GEARBOX ASSY TELESCOPIC PLATE SCREW M6S 20X 70 FZB 8.8 WASHER BRB 21X36X3 FZB HB200 NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB SCREW M6S 10X 50 FZB 8.8 WASHER BRB 10.5X22X2 FZB HB200 NUT M10 LOC-KING FZB EL MOTOR 3 KW BRAKE 230V GEARBOX KA87 COUPLING GEARBOX+ELMOTOR KA87 BRAKE ASSY 230V BM4 INCL.HR
QTY
1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 4 8 4 1 1 1 1
POS
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
REMARKS
Include Pos.27-30
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 2
25
25 24 9
20 28 29 S* 17 S* 17 3 14 19 26 1
17
28 20 4
15 9 10 22 13 28 21 17 S* 17 15 23
30
12 16
11 2
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
SPREADER TYPE
Illtek 020926
EH5 Exploded View Twistlock ISO Floating
SURFACE TREATMENT
SCALE E
REVISION
ARTICLE No
DRAWING NUMBER
A Partek Company
SP-52007
EH5 Twistlock Assy Type1 Part no 62343

DRAWING SP-52007
PART NO
62343 16060 22238 53968 43653 79098 44524 700647 54049 74147 37704 70429 75055 75295
DESCRIPTION
TWISTLOCK ASSY TYPE1 ISO TWISTLOCK PIN ISO GUIDE BLOCK ISO FLOATING WASHER SPHERICAL 20X69.5/42.5 TWISTLOCK ARM ASSY T.1 KEY 12X 8X 20 TK DIN6885B NUT M39 TWISTLOCK FLOAT. SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8 SPACER RING HYDRAULIC CYL. 32/20-100/85 BLOCKADING PIN SPRING SF-TF 4,5X22X90 FZB NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2
POS
0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
REMARKS
Complete Twistlock assy include pos.1-4,6-17,19-30
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 2
PART NO
74044 71328 74970 57095 700763 700685 57069 43654 75098 75293 46609 75268 79850 48916
DESCRIPTION
LOCK PIN R.R 3,0 GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" CLAMP 04-430 PP PAD FOR SWITCH H=12 SCREW M6S 6X100 FZB 8.8 SCREW M6S 6X130 FZB 8.8 PAD FOR SWITCH H=45 BLOCKADING PIECE NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2 LOCKING PLATE WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB COVER PLATE DEP 4 SENSOR ATTACHMENT
QTY
2 2 6 2 4 2 1 1 1 2 2 12 3 1
POS
15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 29 30
REMARKS
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 2
EH5 Twistlock Assy Type2 Part no 62344

DRAWING SP-52007
PART NO
62344 16060 22238 53968 57059 79098 44524 700647 54049 74147 37704 70429 75055 75295
DESCRIPTION
TWISTLOCK ASSY TYPE2 ISO TWISTLOCK PIN ISO GUIDE BLOCK ISO FLOATING WASHER SPHERICAL 20X69.5/42.5 TWISTLOCK ARM T.2 KEY 12X 8X 20 TK DIN6885B NUT M39 TWISTLOCK FLOAT. SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8 SPACER RING HYDRAULIC CYL. 32/20-100/85 BLOCKADING PIN SPRING SF-TF 4,5X22X90 FZB NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 2
POS
0 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
REMARKS
Complete Twistlock assy include pos.1-3,5-17,19-30
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 2
PART NO
74044 71328 74970 57095 700763 700685 57069 43654 75098 75293 46609 75268 79850 48916
DESCRIPTION
LOCK PIN R.R 3,0 GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" CLAMP 04-430 PP PAD FOR SWITCH H=12 SCREW M6S 6X100 FZB 8.8 SCREW M6S 6X130 FZB 8.8 PAD FOR SWITCH H=45 BLOCKADING PIECE NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2 LOCKING PLATE WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB COVER PLATE DEP 4 SENSOR ATTACHMENT
QTY
2 2 6 2 4 2 1 1 1 2 2 12 3 1
POS
15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 28 29 30
REMARKS
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 2
9 10 3 S*
6 7 13 4 5 2
1 10 11 Single Sensor assembly SP10 8 10 12
6 9 10 15 S* 7 13 4 5 2 8 10 10 11 12
Dual Sensor assembly SP11

SIGN DESIGNED PLOT DATE DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
SPREADER TYPE
Illtek 020926
EH5 ll Exploded View Sensor Assy
SURFACE TREATMENT
SCALE E
REVISION
ARTICLE No
DRAWING NUMBER
A Partek Company
SP-52008
Single Sensor Assy Part no 38084 SP-52008

Pos Part no
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 38084 38082 400267 38087 74970 53951 700647 75268 75102 75422 75328 75090 76728 79850
Description
SENSOR SINGEL ASSY SINGLE SENSOR ATTACHMENT PLATE PROTECTION PLATE CLAMP 04-430 PP PAD FOR SWITCH H=22 SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB SCREW M6S 8X 30 FZB 8.8 SCREW M6S 8X 25 FZB 8.8 WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB WASHER SRKB 9X28X2 FZB COVER PLATE DEP 4
Qty
0 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 6 4 2 1
Remarks
Include pos.2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13 Welded parts on frame
den 10 oktober 200
Sida 1 av 1
Dual Sensor Assy Part no 38085 SP-52008

Pos Part no
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 38085 38083 400267 38086 74970 53951 700647 75268 75102 75422 75328 75090 76728 79850
Description
DUAL SENSOR ASSY DOUBLE SENSOR ATTACHMENT PLATE PROTECTION PLATE CLAMP 04-430 PP PAD FOR SWITCH H=22 SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB SCREW M6S 8X 30 FZB 8.8 SCREW M6S 8X 25 FZB 8.8 WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB WASHER SRKB 9X28X2 FZB COVER PLATE DEP 4
Qty
1 0 2 1 2 2 4 4 4 2 8 6 4 2
Remarks
Include pos.2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13 Welded part on Frame
den 10 oktober 200
Sida 1 av 1
9 19 16 3 17 1 13 15 12 7 5 6
20 21 10
22 8 2 19
18 11
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
SPREADER TYPE
Illtek 021029 Exploded View Gearbox

A Partek Company
EH5 ll
SURFACE TREATMENT
SCALE E
REVISION
ARTICLE No
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52009
EH5 Flipper Gearbox Assy Part no 53275

DRAWING SP-52009
PART NO
53275 51176 55503 51177 54465 54463 54590 51284 72010 76196 75049 70548 79683 75295
DESCRIPTION
GEAR BOX ASSY TYPE 1 GEAR HOUSING FLIPPER SMALL SHAFT FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL COVER FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03 GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03 BUSHING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING BEARING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING KEY 20X12X 30 TK HYDRAULIC MOTOR INCL.CHOCKVALV 300CC SCREW MC6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8 SCREW M6S 16X 55 FZB 8.8 KEY 32X8X7 WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 8
POS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 15
REMARKS
Include pos.1-8,11-12,15-18 ( Pos.3 Drawn)
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 2
PART NO
71328 78493 75055 78371 76922 76915
DESCRIPTION
GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" SCREW MC6S 12X150 FZB 8.8 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 SHOCK RELIF VALVE 140 BAR VALVE BLOCK CHARLYNN SEAL KIT CHAR-LYN HYD.MOTOR
QTY
3 3 3 2 1 1
POS
16 17 18 20 21 22
REMARKS
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 2

DRAWING SP-52009
PART NO
60629 51176 55503 51177 54465 54463 54590 51284 72010 76900 76196 75049 70548 79683
DESCRIPTION
GEAR BOX ASSY TYPE 2 GEAR HOUSING FLIPPER SMALL SHAFT FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL COVER FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03 GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03 BUSHING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING BEARING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING KEY 20X12X 30 TK GREASE FITTING R 1/8" 90GR HYDRAULIC MOTOR INCL.CHOCKVALV 300CC SCREW MC6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8 SCREW M6S 16X 55 FZB 8.8 KEY 32X8X7
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1
POS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
REMARKS
Include pos.1-8,11-12,15,17-20 ( Pos.3 Mirrow inverted)
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 2
PART NO
75295 78493 75055 76332 78371 76922 76915
DESCRIPTION
WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB SCREW MC6S 12X150 FZB 8.8 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 GREASE FITTING KR1/8 STRAIGHT SHOCK RELIF VALVE 140 BAR VALVE BLOCK CHARLYNN SEAL KIT CHAR-LYN HYD.MOTOR
QTY
8 3 3 2 2 1 1
POS
15 17 18 19 20 21 22
REMARKS
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 2

DRAWING SP-52009
PART NO
60628 51176 55503 51177 54465 54463 54590 51284 72010 76900 76196 75049 70548 79683
DESCRIPTION
GEAR BOX ASSY TYPE 1 GEAR HOUSING FLIPPER SMALL SHAFT FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL COVER FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03 GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03 BUSHING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING BEARING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING KEY 20X12X 30 TK GREASE FITTING R 1/8" 90GR HYDRAULIC MOTOR INCL.CHOCKVALV 300CC SCREW MC6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8 SCREW M6S 16X 55 FZB 8.8 KEY 32X8X7
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 1
POS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
REMARKS
Include pos.1-8,11-12,15,17-20 ( Pos.3 Drawn)
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 2
PART NO
75295 78493 75055 76332 78371 76922 76915
DESCRIPTION
WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB SCREW MC6S 12X150 FZB 8.8 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 GREASE FITTING KR1/8 STRAIGHT SHOCK RELIF VALVE 140 BAR VALVE BLOCK CHARLYNN SEAL KIT CHAR-LYN HYD.MOTOR
QTY
8 3 3 2 2 1 1
POS
15 17 18 19 20 21 22
REMARKS
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 2

DRAWING SP-52009
PART NO
56230 51176 55503 51177 54465 54463 54590 51284 72010 76196 75049 70548 79683 75295
DESCRIPTION
GEAR BOX ASSY TYPE 2 GEAR HOUSING FLIPPER SMALL SHAFT FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL COVER FOR FLIPPER HOUSING SMALL GEAR WHEEL 4-50-2541-03 GEAR WHEEL 4-16-2541-03 BUSHING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING BEARING FOR FLIPPERHOUSING KEY 20X12X 30 TK HYDRAULIC MOTOR INCL.CHOCKVALV 300CC SCREW MC6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8 SCREW M6S 16X 55 FZB 8.8 KEY 32X8X7 WASHER NORD-LOCK M12 FZB
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 1 1 1 8
POS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 15
REMARKS
Include pos.1-8,11-12,15-18 ( Pos.3 Mirrow inverted)
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 2
PART NO
71328 78493 75055 78371 76922 76915
DESCRIPTION
GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" SCREW MC6S 12X150 FZB 8.8 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 SHOCK RELIF VALVE 140 BAR VALVE BLOCK CHARLYNN SEAL KIT CHAR-LYN HYD.MOTOR
QTY
3 3 3 2 1 1
POS
16 17 18 20 21 22
REMARKS
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 2
27
Red
19
28
11 23 24 8 26 10
E14
29
B22
E27
BA15D
BA15S
30 31 32
7 14 15 12 34 35 36 33 4 20
Green Clear
5 2
9 25
3 21
13 16 17 22 6
Blue
18
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
SPREADER TYPE
Illtek 020918 Exploded View Lamp Assy 3 lamps

A Partek Company
EH5
SURFACE TREATMENT
SCALE E
REVISION
ARTICLE No
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52010
Lamp Assy Part no 61094

DRAWING SP-52010
PART NO
61094 71016 71018 73118 37432 85335 70390 73361 44382 70456 75092 79148 75293 75098
DESCRIPTION
SIGNAL LAMP ASSY LAMP LARGE RED WISKA LAMP LARGE GREEN WISKA LAMP LARGE CLEAR WISKA PLATE BRASS TUBE D=14X1,5 L= 50 RUBBER BUFFER 45 SHORE 17-1396 LAMP SOCKET BA15D WISKA ADAPTER WASHER LAMP SOCKET PLUG FOR 2 TERMINATION SCREW M6S 6X 20 FZB 8.8 WASHER BRB 6.7X14X1.5 FZB HB2 WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2 NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 2 4 3 1 1 6 6 14 14
POS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12 13 14 15 16 17
REMARKS
Include pos. 1-6, 10, 12-17
Include pos. 33,34,35,36
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 3
PART NO
71417 71418 71822 74600 71436 71435 71438 71437 71434 76392 73816 73817 75622 73495 K1415 76866 76866
DESCRIPTION
LAMP GLOBE RED (LARGE) LAMP GLOBE GREEN (LARGE) LAMP GLOBE CLEAR (LARGE) LAMP GLOBE BLUE (LARGE) BULB 220V 60W B22 BULB 220V 40W B22 BULB 24V 40W B22 BULB 130V 40W B22 BULB 60W 230V E27 BULB 24V 24W BA15S BULB 24V 25W Ba15d BULB 220V 25W Ba15d BULB 130V 25W BA15d BULB 110V 25 W E14 SEAL FOR SIGNAL LAMP GLOBE LARGE SCREW MCS 4X7 MSSING OBEH. SCREW MCS 4X7 MSSING OBEH.
QTY
1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 1 1
POS
19 20 21 22 23 23 23 23 24 25 26 26 26 27 28 29 30
REMARKS
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 3
PART NO
700238 x 44912 76866 76868 76867
DESCRIPTION
LAMP HOUSING SEE REMARKS WASHER SCREW MCS 4X7 MSSING OBEH. WASHER IZ 4.3 FZB WASHER BRB MSSING 4.3 OBEH
QTY
1 1 1 2 2 2
POS
31 32 33 34 35 36
REMARKS
Included in complete lamp assy
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 3 av 3
Lamp Assy Part no 61095

DRAWING SP-52010
PART NO
61095 71016 71018 73118 37432 85335 70390 73361 44382 70456 75092 79148 75293 75098
DESCRIPTION
SIGNAL LAMP ASSY LAMP LARGE RED WISKA LAMP LARGE GREEN WISKA LAMP LARGE CLEAR WISKA PLATE BRASS TUBE D=14X1,5 L= 50 RUBBER BUFFER 45 SHORE 17-1396 LAMP SOCKET BA15D WISKA ADAPTER WASHER LAMP SOCKET PLUG FOR 2 TERMINATION SCREW M6S 6X 20 FZB 8.8 WASHER BRB 6.7X14X1.5 FZB HB2 WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2 NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 2 4 3 1 1 6 6 14 14
POS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 12 13 14 15 16 17
REMARKS
Include pos. 1-6, 11-17
Include pos. 33,34,35,36
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 3
PART NO
71417 71418 71822 74600 71438 71437 71435 71436 71434 76392 75622 73816 73817 73495 K1415 76866 76866
DESCRIPTION
LAMP GLOBE RED (LARGE) LAMP GLOBE GREEN (LARGE) LAMP GLOBE CLEAR (LARGE) LAMP GLOBE BLUE (LARGE) BULB 24V 40W B22 BULB 130V 40W B22 BULB 220V 40W B22 BULB 220V 60W B22 BULB 60W 230V E27 BULB 24V 24W BA15S BULB 130V 25W BA15d BULB 24V 25W Ba15d BULB 220V 25W Ba15d BULB 110V 25 W E14 SEAL FOR SIGNAL LAMP GLOBE LARGE SCREW MCS 4X7 MSSING OBEH. SCREW MCS 4X7 MSSING OBEH.
QTY
1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 0 1 1
POS
19 20 21 22 23 23 23 23 24 25 26 26 26 27 28 29 30
REMARKS
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 3
PART NO
700238 x 44912 76866 76868 76867 76867
DESCRIPTION
LAMP HOUSING SEE REMARKS WASHER SCREW MCS 4X7 MSSING OBEH. WASHER IZ 4.3 FZB WASHER BRB MSSING 4.3 OBEH WASHER BRB MSSING 4.3 OBEH
QTY
1 1 1 2 2 2 2
POS
31 32 33 34 35 36 36
REMARKS
Included in complete lamp assy
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 3 av 3
2 6 35 36 33 34
47 39 46 42 43 45 44 48 41 7 54 40 37 38
52 53
14
28 29 27 25 8 30 31 32 26
13 1 48 49 50 51
10 11 15 16 4 23 18 22 17 20 21 24 19 12
SIGN DESIGNED PLOT DATE DATE GENERAL ASSY SERIAL No SPREADER TYPE SURFACE TREATMENT TOLERANCE GENERAL SS-ISO 2768
Illtek 020911 Exploded View Telescopic Drive

A Partek Company
EH5
SCALE E
REVISION
ARTICLE No
DRAWING NUMBER
SP-52012
EH5 Telescopic Drive

DRAWING SP-52012
PART NO
23855 16441 38073 400242 400244 23854 61698 37409 39047 46744 400241 38862 38084 38085
DESCRIPTION
TENSION ROD TELESCOPIC DRIVE ATT. ASSY CHAIN ASSY TENSION ROD PIN ASSY END STOP ASSY TENSION ROD SHOCK ABSORBER CABLE CHAIN ASSY CABLE CHAIN TOWER ASSY SHAFT (TENSION ROD PIN ASSY) WASHER PEDESTAL BEARING SENSOR SINGEL ASSY DUAL SENSOR ASSY
QTY
1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
POS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
REMARKS
See Telescopic assy Drawing SP-52006 Include pos.7,37,38 Include pos. 10,11,15,16 Include pos. 49,50,51,55
Includ pos.39,40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,54 Include pos.25,26,27,28,29,30,31,32 Include pos.33,34,35,36 Included in pos.4 Included in pos.4 Include pos. 17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24 See Drawing SP-52008 See Drawing SP-52008
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 1 av 4
PART NO
75267 75365 46773 46765 51659 41794 73562 73950 74243 71328 37408 46771 75499 75150 75323 79834 79835
DESCRIPTION
WASHER NORD-LOCK M 8 FZB SCREW M6S 8X 16 FZB 8.8 SHAFT CHAIN WHEEL WASHER WASHER BEARING 22212 CC W33 KEY 12X 8X 30 DIN 6885 B TK LOCKING RING SGA 60 GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" CABLE CHAIN GLIDE BLOCK SCREW MC6S 5X 16 FZB 8.8 NUT M 5 LOC-KING FZB WASHER BRB 5.3X10X1 FZB HB200 SCREW MC6S 5X 20 FZB SCREW MC6S 5X 12 FZB
QTY
2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 2 3 3 1 1
POS
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
REMARKS
Included in pos.4 Included in pos.4 Included in pos.12 Included in pos.12 Included in pos.12 Included in pos.12 Included in pos.12 Included in pos.12 Included in pos.12 Included in pos.12 Included in pos.8 Included in pos.8 Included in pos.8 Included in pos.8 Included in pos.8 Included in pos.8 Included in pos.8
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 2 av 4
PART NO
75445 38996 75497 75090 75328 71512 47468 53434 59899 59897 53435 74686 75098 75293 75694 71529 71686
DESCRIPTION
WASHER NORD-LOCK M 5 FZB CABLE CHAIN TOWER SCREW MF6S 8X 35 FZB 10.9 NUT M 8 LOC-KING FZB WASHER BRB 8.4X16X1.5 FZB HB2 CHAIN LOCK SIMPLEX 1 1/2" 177H CHAIN SIMPLEX 1 1/2"177H 119 LINK SHOCK ABSORBER LINK L1=341 L2=381 TUBE 35X2 L=196
QTY
1 1 4 4 4 4 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 4 2 2 36
POS
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
REMARKS
Included in pos.8 Included in pos.9 Included in pos.9 Included in pos.9 Included in pos.9 included in pos.3 included in pos.3 Included in pos.7 Included in pos.7 Included in pos.7 Included in pos.7 Included in pos.7 Included in pos.7 Included in pos.7 Included in pos.7 Included in pos.7 Included in pos.7
NUT SHOCK ABSORBER NUT M30 LOC-KING FZB KLASS 8 NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2 SCREW M6S 6X 55 FZB 8.8 TUBE 1 1/2"CHAIN CUP SPRING 71X36X4 No18
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 3 av 4
PART NO
46757 75267 78498 70142 75099 71633 46743 SHIM
DESCRIPTION
QTY
4 2 2 2 2 2 1
POS
49 50 51 52 53 54 55
REMARKS
Include in pos.5 Include in pos.5 Include in pos.5
WASHER NORD-LOCK M 8 FZB SCREW M6S 8X 40 FZB 8.8 CLAMP 01-110 PP SCREW M6S 6X 40 FZB 8.8 NUT M30 ML6M FZB END STOP
Included in pos.7 Include in pos.5
den 10 oktober 2002
Sida 4 av 4
5 9 3 8 7 6 4 2
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
SPREADER TYPE
Illtek 021029
EH5 ll Exploded View Frame, Power cabinet
SURFACE TREATMENT
SCALE E
REVISION
ARTICLE No
DRAWING NUMBER
A Partek Company
SP-52013
EH5 Electric Cabinet

DRAWING SP-52013
PART NO
46679 24473 1 77906 86254 78557 75607 75291 75055 79961
DESCRIPTION
MOUNTING EL.CAB. ELECTRIC CABINET SEE REMARKS SCHACKLE M6 STAINLESS CHAIN HL3 L=160 SS2343 RUBBER BUFFER 17-1480-50 SCREW M6S 12X 40 FZB 8.8 WASHER BRB 13X24X2.5 FZB HB200 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 WASHER TBRSB 13X36X6 FZB
QTY
4 1 1 2 1 1 2 3 2 1
POS
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
REMARKS
Include pos. 5,6,7,8,9
Included in Electric Cabinet
24 June 2003
Sida 1 av 1
21 23
22
6 7
13 30 12 27 26 11 28
8 17 19 18 20
3 14 16 4 15 10 2 24 5 25
32 31 35 34 33 1 29
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
SPREADER TYPE
Illtek
031013 Exploded View Twinlift boxes
EH170 U
SURFACE TREATMENT
SCALE E
REVISION
ARTICLE No
DRAWING NUMBER
A Partek Company
SP-52014
17652
SP-POS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Twin Housing Assy SP-DRAWING NO: 52014

PART NO
17646 17607 17643 39076 400887 23805 400888 39909 39908 39916 39915 402534 39891 78489 75055 75291
DESCRIPTION
RETRACTABLE TWISTLOCK ASSY LEFT RETRACTABLE TWISTLOCK HOUSE LEFT RETRACTABLE TWISTLOCK HOUSE RIGHT PIVOT PIN RETRACTABLE HOUSING PIN RETRACTABLE CYLINDER CYLINDER CONNECTION OFFSET LINK CYLINDER PIN TRIP/SLIDE WELDMENT LEFT HAND TRIP/SLIDE WELDMENT RIGHT HAND SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET LEFT SENSOR MOUNTING BRACKET RIGHT SPACER CYLINDER 65/40-250 TWINL.EH170 SCREW MC6S 12X180 FZB 8.8 NUT M12 LOC-KING FZB DIN 985 WASHER BRB 13X24X2.5 FZB HB200
QTY
1 1 1 2 2 2 4 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 8 4
REMARKS
See Drawing SP -52015
NOTE
den 19 november 2003
Page 1 of 2
SP-POS
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
PART NO
74970 75100 75268 79850 75052 700348 70009 74270 75335 75119 75294 75783 62907 701244 70145 76914 700646 75268 700641
DESCRIPTION
CLAMP 04-430 PP SCREW M6S 6X 45 FZB 8.8 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB COVER PLATE DEP4 NUT M20 LOC-KING FZB SHLD BOLT.D=24/M20X70 LG.12.9 SPLIT PIN 3,2X25 SPLIT PIN 3.2X63 FZB WASHER BRFB 26X45X4 FZB HB200 NUT M10 LOC-KING FZB WASHER BRB 10.5X22X2 FZB HB200 SCREW M6S 12X 50 FZB 8.8 RETRACTABLE TWISTLOCK ASSY RIGHT WASHER TBRSUB 26X65X10 STEEL F CLAMP 02-218 PP (SIZE 2) CLAMP 02-214-PP SCREW M6S 6X 70 FZB 8.8 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB COVER PLATE DEP2
QTY
8 8 8 4 2 2 8 4 4 2 2 6 1 4 8 8 8 8 4
REMARKS
NOTE
See Drawing SP -52015
Page 2 of 2
19 3 1 14 29 28 23 24 26
2 12
17 21
27 29 11 13
25
S*
20
19 25 26 24 23
15 30 6
18 10 31
8 16 22 5
S*
DATE
GENERAL ASSY
SERIAL No
SPREADER TYPE
Illtek 031027
EH170 U Exploded View Retractable Twistlock Assembly
SURFACE TREATMENT
SCALE E
REVISION
ARTICLE No
DRAWING NUMBER
A Partek Company
SP-52015
62907
SP-POS
2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Twin Twistlock Assy Right SP-DRAWING NO: 52015

PART NO
61751 62906 402514 402515 39879 701243 16060 22238 61687 53968 44524 74955 75631 74147 71328 74044
DESCRIPTION
SENSOR MOUNTING WELDMENT TRIP/SLIDE WELDMENT PLUNGER SENSOR TRIP BLOCKADING KEY BLOCKADING PIN SPRING 2X25X58 DIN2098 TWISTLOCK PIN ISO GUIDE BLOCK ISO FLOATING CYLINDER ARM ASSY RIGHT WASHER SPHERICAL 20X69.5/42.5 NUT M39 TWISTLOCK FLOAT. NUT M16 LOC-KING FZB WASHER 22X34X4 FZB DIN 1440 HYDRAULIC CYL. 32/20-100/85 GREASEFITTING NO.208 R1/8" LOCK PIN R.R 3,0
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
REMARKS
NOTE
Page 1 of 2
SP-POS
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
PART NO
402258 402257 700322 74970 79850 75100 75268 700647 75098 75293 70918 79098
DESCRIPTION
CYLINDER BOLT SPACER RING SPRING PIN 6X36 FRP CLAMP 04-430 PP COVER PLATE DEP4 SCREW M6S 6X 45 FZB 8.8 WASHER NORD-LOCK M 6 FZB SCREW M6S 6X 75 FZB 8.8 NUT M 6 LOC-KING FZB WASHER BRB 6.4X12X1.5 FZB HB2 WASHER NORD-LOCK M16 FZB KEY 12X 8X 20 TK DIN6885B
QTY
1 1 2 6 3 6 6 1 1 2 1 1
REMARKS
NOTE
Page 2 of 2
How to order spare parts and/or service
All ordering of Bromma spare parts must be done by the Bromma e-commerce website. To order the requested spare parts some important information must be available. The serial no. of the spreader. See Data Sheet chapt. 3or the dataplate mounted on main frame of the current spreader. The requested Art no. and the quantity needed. See Spare part list. Registered User To be able to log in at the Bromma e-commerce site you must be a registered user. To become a registered user you have to fill in the Application Form on the Bromma website. After a few days you will receive an User ID and a password by e-mail. When you are a regitered user fill in your User ID and password at the fields on the Bromma e-commerce website (www.bromma.com) to log in. Then follow the instructions on the screen. Search Function If you do not find the parts requested on the e-commerce site or if you have any other problems finding valid part numbers you can use the search function on the website or call your local Bromma dealer. The phone number is published on the website
at www.bromma.com/distributors/index.asp
FOR SERVICE AND SPARE PARTS PLEASE CONTACT: BROMMA CONQUIP AB Krossgatan 31-33 S-162 26 VLLINGBY SWEDEN Telephone no. 46 +8 620 09 00 Fax no. 46 +8 739 37 86 Telex no. 12224
To avoid damage to property or personal injury when replacing parts, always use BROMMA CONQUIP AB original parts.
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
08 02 ENG rev.2
9 Hydraulic circuit diagrams
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
09 01 ENG rev.
10 Electrical wiring diagrams
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
10 01 ENG rev
GETTING STARTED
WITH
SCS
REV 3
Index
Node Hardware ............................................................................................................... 4
DIGITAL I/O ................................................................................................................................................ 4
General............................................................................................................................ 4 The X2 connector............................................................................................................ 5 Node ID....................................................................................................................... 5 Main Supply................................................................................................................ 6 CAN ............................................................................................................................ 6 The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors).................................................................. 7 I/O Groups .................................................................................................................. 7 Common junction........................................................................................................ 8 Internal jumper bars .................................................................................................... 8 Connecting a switch.................................................................................................... 9 Connecting a valve...................................................................................................... 9 I/O Modules .............................................................................................................. 10
APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................................... 10
ABE (Application Builder Environment) ................................................................................... 10 System view .............................................................................................................. 10 Pin configuration....................................................................................................... 11 Component view ....................................................................................................... 11 Load view.................................................................................................................. 14
ANYBUS ..................................................................................................................................................... 15
General.......................................................................................................................... 15 Connecting the B1 node............................................................................................ 15 Connecting the A1 node............................................................................................ 16 The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus) ............................................................. 16
APPLICATION WITH A ANYBUS INTERFACE ................................................................................ 18
ABE............................................................................................................................... 18
ANYBUS GATEWAY................................................................................................................................ 20
General.......................................................................................................................... 20 BCAN - Status LEDs ................................................................................................ 21 Power connector........................................................................................................ 21 BCAN connector....................................................................................................... 21 Node address key switches ....................................................................................... 21 Serial port connector ................................................................................................. 21
APS .............................................................................................................................................................. 22
Absolute encoder on the telescope................................................................................ 22 General...................................................................................................................... 22 The RS485 component.............................................................................................. 22 From bits to millimetres (scale) ................................................................................ 23
REV 3
Teach......................................................................................................................... 23
EXTERNAL EE-PROM ............................................................................................................................ 24
General...................................................................................................................... 24 Hardware................................................................................................................... 24 Software .................................................................................................................... 25 Activate the EE-prom ............................................................................................... 26
REV 3
Node Hardware
Below is a picture of a SCS2 node.
X1- I/O Connector
X2- I/O, bus & supply Connector
X3- I/O Connector
I/O LED 1-48
Field bus
RS232 (X5)
Display & Power LEDS
Digital I/O General

Here follows an example of how to build up a Can bus system with two nodes one with one input and the other with one output.
Switch Input Slave (A1)
CAN network (BCAN)
SCS2
B1 Master Output Valve
REV 3
The X2 connector
The three connectors X1,X2&X3 have different connection keys to avoid the possibility of connecting them in the wrong place. It is important to choose the correct one.This is easy to check, on the connecting side of the connector just below the mounting screw there is a number 7, 8 or 9. The X2 should be marked 8
Front view of X2 connector
connection key
Node ID
All nodes in a system must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins 9,19,29,39,49 on the X2 connector, where pins being connected to the ground pin (10) correspond to zeroes and pins left unconnected are correspond to ones. A master node (B1) has pins 10,9,19,29,49 connected together. (Commonly used as a spreader Node) A slave node on the crane A1 has pins 10,19,29,39,49 connected together. Start with making ID jumpers.
And connect to the X2 connectors, one as B1 and one as A1.
REV 3
Main Supply
24Volt AC or DC powers the node internally. The signals are doubled in the connector due to the current limit of single pins. DC voltage can be applied in either direction. The potential is measured between the A section and the B section. Name Pin number in connector 24INA X2/42 Potential 1 24INA X2/43 24INB X2/45 Potential 2 24INB X2/44
CAN
The CAN net connection is placed in the X2 connector. All nodes in the system have to be connected equal (bus topology) to CAN High and CAN Low to be able to establish communication. Name Pin number in connector CAN High X2/30 CAN Low X2/40 Here is a schematic with the X2 connectors of two nodes, one A1 and one B1 with node id, CAN bus and power supply connected.
ID SUPPLY CAN BUS + 24V Supply
Low
CAN Bus High ID

9 10 19 29 30 40 42 43 44 45 49 10 19 29 Pin no. 30 39 40 42 43 44 45 49
B1 X2
A1 X2
CAN-bus
24V SUPPLY 6 REV 3
The X1 and X3 connectors (I/O-connectors)

Just like the X2 connector the X1 and X3 connectors are keyed to avoid connecting them in the wrong place. The X1 can be identified by the number 7 on the front of the connector, and the X3 connector by the number 9. connection key
I/O Groups
There are 48 digital I/O on a node. Each I/O can be configured as either an input or an output via the software. The I/O 1 to 44 are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups. I/O 45 to 48 are single I/Os. Each group has a Common junction. This makes it possible to have different voltages in each group.
Name
Description General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output Common junction for I/O-9 to I/O-12 Description
X1 pin number
I/O-9 I/O-10 I/O-11 I/O-12 Common/Supply 3

Name
26 16 6 7 8
X3 pin number
I/O-48 General purpose input or output Common/Supply 15 Common junction for I/O-48
30 20
REV 3
Common junction
This point is to be connected to live or neutral depending on if the group is used for inputs or outputs, Inputs need neutral and outputs need live as showed below. Inputs can be viewed upon as relay coils and outputs as switching contacts.
G roup used as Input

L/24V D C N / 0V D C
G roup used as O utput
SC S
9 10 11 12 9
SC S 10 S 11 SC
12
26
16
26
16
I/O M oduls
In the picture is one I/O group used as inputs on the left, and on the right the same group is used as outputs.
Internal jumper bars

To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 and the X3 connector also has groups of pins linked together to be used basically as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding switches/valves with common potential. Pin number 12 13 14 22 23
(Only in X1)
Link configuration
Pin number 17 18 19 27 28 29 37 39 38
(Only in X1) 36
Link configuration
24
32 33 34
(Only in X1) 45
REV 3
Connecting a switch
Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the switch into A1. One of the jumper groups is fed with live and supplies the switch, the other jumper group is connected to neutral and supplies the I/O group.
L/24V Supply N/0V Supply Internal jumper groups
Switch Cablage
6 7 8 12 13 1 4 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 26 27
X1 Connector
11 12 10
One Input group
SCS Internal
Connecting a valve
Here is one example of how to use the internal jumpers while connecting the valve into B1. One of the jumper groups is connected to Neutral and supplies the valves secondary side, the other jumper group is connected to live and supplies the I/O group.
L/24V Supply N/0V Supply Internal jumper groups
Valve Cablage
6 7 8 12 13 1 4 16 17 18 19 22 23 24 26 27
X1 Connector
11 12
10
One output group
SCS Internal
REV 3
I/O Modules
To be able to adapt the I/Os to the system voltage each I/O channel have a solid-state interface relay (OPTO 22). This makes it possible to choose input or output and a voltage range of 12-230 VAC/DC. Each module has a led indicating active state. On the output modules there is a 3 Amp fuse. These modules are located inside the SCS cover. The cover has a lens for each channel, so the I/O status can be seen from the outside. LED FUSE
Application ABE (Application Builder Environment)

System view
When ABE is started a new application is automatically started, and the default view is the system view. The system view enables the user to select a node configuration in the software, the application compares the hardware with the software configurations and these have to be equal to work. You may also set system properties in this view. Some properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved. In the system view we have to activate the A1 node in the soft ware. The B1 is the master and is active per default.
Menu tabs
System properties
10
REV 3
Pin configuration
Next menu tab is pin configuration, all present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. (1) Make sure tab A1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 9 the following name switch. (2) Comment field is optional. (3)
Activate tab B1 in the view (1) and do the same for Port id# 9 with following name VALVE. (2)
Note: The red color of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected or that any of the letters are unaccepted. Space between words is not accepted instead use _. A red field makes it impossible to compile the application.
Component view
Next menu tab is the component view The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette displaying all components is available in the view. The palette can be made visible by pressing components if it is not already visible.
Available component pallet
11
REV 3
Select the OD timer (On Delay timer) component from the available component pallet (1). Its located in the Digital tab (2).
1 Place the component on Page 1 in the view with the left mouse button. Then press the right button to get the arrow back.
Right click the mouse on the left red dot and work your way to the input SWITCH and left click.
Do the same thing on the right red dot and choose the output in this case VALVE
12
REV 3
Put the arrow on the component and right click, and select properties.
Put the delay time to two seconds (in mille seconds). The instance name is an internal component address and should not be changed. When ready press OK. Instance name
Delay time
If the application needs to be saved before it is ready choose Save. The file will be stored as a spi file.
When the application is ready choose Compile. The file will then be saved as a loadable file spr and is of curse editable.
13
REV 3
Load view
The last view is the Load view. From this view it is possible to download and up load applications to and from a connected SCS system. Press the Download button and a dialogue box will appear, choose the desired spr file and press the Open button.
Download
Choose file and press open
Then ABE verifies the action in the progress bar. First ABE sends the file to the connected node. The progress is displayed in the connected node bar as percent. Current transfer completed (%) Then the system distributes the file over the CAN-bus to the rest of the nodes (if necessary). When the download is ready this dialogue box appears. Current transfer completed (%) Total transfer completed (%)
14
REV 3
Anybus General
Here follows an example of how to build up the same system as before with two nodes, but the B1 node has one output and one input and on the A1 node is the input replaced with an Anybus interface
Outside net
Slave (A1) with anybus CAN network (BCAN) B1 Master Input Switch Valve Output SCS2
Connecting the B1 node

Connect the B1 node as in the Digital I/O chapter, and add a switch to Port id# 1 as in the picture below
G roup used as Input
L /24V D C N / 0V D C
G roup used as O utput
SC S
1 2 3 4 9
SC S 10 S 11 SC
12
44
31
41
43
42
26
16
I/O M oduls
15
REV 3
Connecting the A1 node

Connect power supply, can bus and an ID jumper as A1 in the X2 connector. An Anybus card is also to be mounted and connected inside the hood where the digital I/Os are located.
The Anybus card (in this case for Profibus)

This card is used for translation between different field buses and a standardized format read by the SCS system.
There is a D-sub connector on the card for connecting to outside net (1), and a selector for termination resistance (2) and two selectors used for setting hard ware identification of the unit in the outside net (3). 1 2 3 Item 3.
HW address
*10
*1
4 3 The four LEDs are used for showing the state of the communication from the Anybus-card and the outside net. 1:not used 2:(green) on-line on the Fieldbus 3:(red) off-line on the Fieldbus 4:(red) indicate faults on the Fieldbus side as follows: Flashing 1hz-Error in configuration: IN and/or OUT length set during initialization of the module is not equal to the length set during configuration of the network. Flashing 2hz-Error in user parameter data: the length/contents of the user parameter data set during initialization of the module is not equal to the length/contents set during configuration of the network. Flashing 4hz-Error in initialisation of the Profibus communication ASIC.
16
REV 3
The Anybus card is to be mounted inside the hood on the right upper corner of the node
Connect an Anybus jumper to the D-sub connector on the Anybus card. And connect to the outside connector on the connection rail beside the card. On the connection rail the wires from the D-sub should be connected in the following order from the right 8 3 5 (for Profibus) Fieldbus connector used for connecting to the outside interface.
17
REV 3
Application with a Anybus interface ABE

Open the application used in the digital chapter. Get in to the pin configuration view and remove the switch from A1, add a new switch to B1 in Port id# 1 Then get in to the component view and set the cursor on the OD timers input connector (on the left) and press Disconnect, the connection point turns red if a connection is acquired for the component to function.
Get an Input bit(1) from the available component menu under the Anybus tab (2) and place it out in front of the OD timer and also take an or gate from gates 1 and a split from digital.
Connect the switch to the split, the input bit and the split to the or and the or to the OD timer. Yore connection should now be as below.
Choose an Output bit and connect it to the split
Note: A red dot on any of the components makes it impossible to compile the application.
18
REV 3
Right click on in/output bits and choose properties. In the properties menu it is possible to configure following. Note is a free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port. Bit number is the bit number of the chosen byte in Anybus interface. (0-7) Byte number is the start byte in the Anybus interface. (0-63) Node is where the any bus card is located (in this case A1)
Note: The size of the data areas is decided of the highest byte in the application, in both directions separately. The two sizes have to be equal on both sides of the Anybus card (outside master/any bus) to be able to establish contact. If the outside areas is bigger than in the application is it possible to put an empty byte to make the areas match.
19
REV 3
Anybus gateway General

Compared to a conventional SCS node the Anybus gateway does not have any digital or analogue I/Os, no internal battery backing up the event log (locally The anybus gateway is used in cases where a physical I/O is not needed; one example is when the SCS system is connected as a slave unit (via a anybus card in the crane node) on the crane PLC.
Status LEDs Anybus card (in this case Profibus) Power connector BCAN connector Node address key switches Serial port connector
20
REV 3
BCAN - Status LEDs

There are three green LEDs for Power, BCAN and Anybus indicating operating status and one red LED indicating error status. Power LED is lit when power is applied and system starts to execute. BCAN LED is lit when the BCAN communication interface is operating normally and flashing when the communication interface is not working as intended. Anybus LED is flashing when the Anybus interface is not configured and lit when configured and operating normally. (Between the node and the anybus card) Error LED is unlit when system is running normally and lit when an error has occurred.
Power connector
The power connector is a Phoenix Contact 2pin header (MC1,5/2-G-3,81). 24Volt DC powers the node internally.
NAME DESCRIPTION PIN NUMBER
VCC GND
10 to 28 V DC 1 Ground 2
BCAN connector
The BCAN connector is a Phoenix Contact 3pin header (MC1,5/3-G-3,81). All nodes in the system have to be connected equal (bus topology) to CAN High and CAN Low to be able to establish communication.
NAME DESCRIPTION PIN NUMBER
CAN H CAN L
CAN high CAN low
1 2
Node address key switches

There are five switches selecting node address. The node identity is defined by using the same bit pattern as the conventional nodes. For example to configure a gateway node as an A1 (crane) node: set DIPswitch 1 to ON and DIP switch 2-5 to OFF. Or to configure a gateway node as an A2 (crane) node: set DIPswitch 2 to ON and DIP switch 1,3,4 and 5 to OFF. A1
A2
Serial port connector

The serial port connector is used when connecting the SCS2 Anybus Gateway to a computer serial port. (Corresponds to X5 on the conventional SCS nodes) Use a 9-pol D-sub extension lead to connect.
21
REV 3
APS Absolute encoder on the telescope

General
The absolute encoder should be connected to the RS485 port. (Channel A at X2/38 and channel B at X2/37) In the ABE component pallet under the analogue tab, the RS485 port component is located. It is also possible to rescale the information from the sensor to be able to work or monitor the actual measurements (in for instance mm), the tool for this is the scale component. The scale component is also located under the analogue tab. Teach is used for storing positions Add the RS485 port component from the analogue tab The scale component makes it possible to translate the sensor value to the mechanical distance
The RS485 component

This component is used to access the RS485 interface. The component is made to handle some different types of protocol in this case slin. The parameters: Node: each node has one RS485 input. To direct the component in the software to the correct hardware input, choose node corresponding to what node the sensor is wired to. Protocol: it is possible to choose between some different standardised protocols to suit the sensor used. When using the SSI protocol some more information is needed. (See sensor/manufacture for data) Code type: determines how the sensor value (bit pattern) shall be read when converting to a decimal value (made internally in the component). Gray or Binary. Input resolution: how many steps (bits) per revolution. Max revolutions: how many revolutions that are supported by the sensor.
22
REV 3
From bits to millimetres (scale)

Retract the spreader to the mechanical end stop, measure the distance between the single twistlocks, note the value down, read the sensor value with the ABE online and make a note of this. Expand the spreader to the mechanical end stop and repeat the same procedure. Note: It is very important that the sensor doesnt wraparound (when counting up, after the highest value it starts at zero again), the retracted value should be low and the expanded value should be larger. Right click on the scale component and choose properties And fill in the noted values as following. The measured max value in millimeters The measured min value in millimeters The up loaded max value from the ABE online The up loaded min value from the ABE online Then verify the scale, put the spreader in some different positions measure and compare with the scaled value.
Teach
To be able to store positions the APS component is equipped with a storing function called TEACH. By giving the teach command and expand or retract command it is possible to move the spreader in a lesser speed (defied by the parameter PWM value for teach in APS properties) to the required length, for position 20ft, hold the teach command and give the go to position 20ft command. The value is now stored in the spreader memory (NV RAM). Repeat this procedure on all the required positions. The connection point for teach The connection points for position direct commands The connection points for expand/ retract commands
Note: If the scale is made correctly it is possible to verify the spreader length by activating the teach command, when the teach function is active the sensor value input on the APS is displayed on the B1 display. Beware of if a "position direct command" is given at the same time that position is destroyed.
23
REV 3
External EE-prom
General
In the external EE-prom it is possible to store information as spreader ID, twistlock counters, running time etc. this makes it possible to replace the node(s) in the system without loosing this information.
Hardware
The EE-prom is to be connected in to the node as following. Name Pin number in Cable connector 10V supply X2/36 Red Serial data X2/16 Blue Serial clock X2/26 Green Signal ground X2/6 Black The EE-prom is located in a gland. The gland should be mounted solid near by the SCS node within the cable range.
24
REV 3
Software
A spreader properties component needs to be added in the application, that make the system try to find the EE-prom at boot. The spreader properties component (1) is located in the misc tab (2) in the available component menu.
4 3 2 1
The spreader properties contains twistlock counters and a time counter etc. To make the counters work some info is needed, connect the available signals corresponding to the connection points on the left of the component (3). The information is possible to send out as analogue words true the bus to the outside net (if present), the connection points for these values is located on the right of the component (4).
25
REV 3
Activate the EE-prom

The EE-prom is activated after the Serial number value is set. The BMS have to be connected to the node that the EE-prom is connected to. Left click on the Serial number key in the BMS spreader info tab. In the current key dialogue box down in the left corner there should now be seen serial number. Put the spreader serial number in the value bar and press the set button to store and activate the EE-prom. It now displays the different values.
The Spreader info tag
The get all button
The information from the EE-prom is possible to upload with the BMS from the spreader info tag. Connect the BMS to the system and press the get all button.
26
REV 3
User Manual
Version 1.03
Revision
PA1 PA2 PA3 A PB1 PB2 PB3
Issued by
Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems Andy Lewis, Bromma Conquip Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems GO, AL Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems
Date
2000-05-26 2000-08-09 2000-10-10 2000-10-10 2001-01-22 2002-06-04 2003-06-10
Measures
First draft. Corrections More corrections Version 1.0 PID component, Online monitoring (manual and tutorial), *.apd changed to *.spr, Figure numbering corrected, Allowed character set. Revision after system release 1.04 Revision after system release 1.05
Printed: 03-10-16 10.51
Document:
Project: Date: Version:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Prepared by: Research & Development
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
2(86)
Table of contents
1 2
2.1 2.2 2.3
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................5 INSTALLING ABE...........................................................................................................5

HW requirements .................................................................................................................................................... 5 Installation ............................................................................................................................................................... 5 Disclaimer................................................................................................................................................................. 5
3
3.1 3.2 3.3
USER INTERFACE .........................................................................................................6

Main window............................................................................................................................................................ 6 Error control............................................................................................................................................................ 6 Multiple language support ...................................................................................................................................... 6
3.4 General functions..................................................................................................................................................... 6 3.4.1 File..................................................................................................................................................................... 6 3.4.2 Edit .................................................................................................................................................................... 7 3.4.3 Settings .............................................................................................................................................................. 7 3.4.4 Tools .................................................................................................................................................................. 7 3.4.5 Help ................................................................................................................................................................... 8
4
4.1
SYSTEM VIEW ................................................................................................................9

General ..................................................................................................................................................................... 9
4.2 Functionality ............................................................................................................................................................ 9 4.2.1 Author................................................................................................................................................................ 9 4.2.2 Last date saved .................................................................................................................................................. 9 4.2.3 Creation date.................................................................................................................................................... 10 4.2.4 Version number ............................................................................................................................................... 10 4.2.5 Revision number.............................................................................................................................................. 10 4.2.6 Spreader type ................................................................................................................................................... 10 4.2.7 Drawing number .............................................................................................................................................. 10 4.2.8 Customer.......................................................................................................................................................... 10 4.2.9 Comments........................................................................................................................................................ 10
5
5.1
PIN CONFIGURATION VIEW........................................................................................11

General ................................................................................................................................................................... 11
5.2 Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 11 5.2.1 Address key ..................................................................................................................................................... 11 5.2.2 Exists port........................................................................................................................................................ 11 5.2.3 Anybus I/O ...................................................................................................................................................... 12
2(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
3(86)
6
6.1
COMPONENT VIEW .....................................................................................................12

General ................................................................................................................................................................... 12
6.2 Page functionality .................................................................................................................................................. 13 6.2.1 Adding pages ................................................................................................................................................... 13 6.3 Component functionality ...................................................................................................................................... 13 6.3.1 Adding a component........................................................................................................................................ 13 6.3.2 Moving a component ....................................................................................................................................... 14 6.3.3 Selecting multiple components........................................................................................................................ 14 6.3.4 Cutting / coping / pasting components ............................................................................................................ 14 6.3.5 Delete a component ......................................................................................................................................... 14 6.3.6 Connecting / disconnecting components ......................................................................................................... 14 6.3.7 Online monitoring............................................................................................................................................ 14
7
7.1 7.2
LOAD VIEW...................................................................................................................15
General ................................................................................................................................................................... 15 Functionality .......................................................................................................................................................... 15
COMPONENTS .............................................................................................................16
8.1 Controllers.............................................................................................................................................................. 16 8.1.1 TLC4 Twistlock Controller 4 ....................................................................................................................... 16 8.1.2 TLC8 Twistlock Controller 8 ....................................................................................................................... 19 8.1.3 FAC Flipper Arm Controller ........................................................................................................................ 23 8.1.4 DPS Discrete Positioning System................................................................................................................. 25 8.1.5 Tower Head block ........................................................................................................................................ 28 8.1.6 APS Automatic Positioning System ............................................................................................................. 31 8.1.7 MPS Memory position system...................................................................................................................... 35 8.1.8 Twin Telescope................................................................................................................................................ 39 8.1.9 TwinUpDown .................................................................................................................................................. 41 8.1.10 PID................................................................................................................................................................... 45 8.1.11 AutoTuner........................................................................................................................................................ 49 8.2 AnyBus ................................................................................................................................................................... 52 8.2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 52 8.2.2 Anybus System ................................................................................................................................................ 53 8.2.3 Output Word .................................................................................................................................................... 54 8.2.4 Output Byte ..................................................................................................................................................... 54 8.2.5 Output Bit ........................................................................................................................................................ 55 8.2.6 Input Word....................................................................................................................................................... 55 8.2.7 Input Byte ........................................................................................................................................................ 56 8.2.8 Input Bit........................................................................................................................................................... 56 8.3 Guards .................................................................................................................................................................... 57 8.3.1 Spreader stop ................................................................................................................................................... 57 8.3.2 TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System .......................................................................................................... 57 8.3.3 Analogue guard ............................................................................................................................................... 58 8.3.4 Digital guard .................................................................................................................................................... 59 8.4 Gates ....................................................................................................................................................................... 60 8.4.1 AND ................................................................................................................................................................ 60 8.4.2 NAND.............................................................................................................................................................. 61
3(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
4(86)
8.4.3 8.4.4 8.4.5 8.4.6 8.4.7 8.4.8 8.4.9
NOR................................................................................................................................................................. 61 OR ................................................................................................................................................................... 62 NOT................................................................................................................................................................. 63 XOR................................................................................................................................................................. 63 SR Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 64 RS Latch .......................................................................................................................................................... 64 Logical gate ..................................................................................................................................................... 65
8.5 Digital ..................................................................................................................................................................... 65 8.5.1 OD Timer On Delay Timer........................................................................................................................... 65 8.5.2 UpDn Counter Up Down Counter ................................................................................................................ 66 8.5.3 OSC - Oscillator .............................................................................................................................................. 66 8.5.4 Split ................................................................................................................................................................. 67 8.5.5 Pulse ................................................................................................................................................................ 67 8.6 Miscellaneous ......................................................................................................................................................... 68 8.6.1 Constant........................................................................................................................................................... 68 8.6.2 Dead end.......................................................................................................................................................... 69 8.6.3 Spreader properties .......................................................................................................................................... 69 8.6.4 Memory ........................................................................................................................................................... 71 8.6.5 Digital buffer ................................................................................................................................................... 72 8.6.6 Analogue buffer............................................................................................................................................... 72 8.7 Analogue................................................................................................................................................................. 74 8.7.1 RS485 port....................................................................................................................................................... 74 8.7.2 IN0 > IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 74 8.7.3 IN0 * IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 75 8.7.4 IN0 / IN1.......................................................................................................................................................... 75 8.7.5 IN0 IN1......................................................................................................................................................... 75 8.7.6 IN0 + IN1 ........................................................................................................................................................ 76 8.7.7 Scale ................................................................................................................................................................ 76 8.7.8 AnalogueLatch ................................................................................................................................................ 77 8.7.9 Filter ................................................................................................................................................................ 77
TUTORIAL.....................................................................................................................79
4(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
5(86)
1 Introduction
ABE Application Builder Environment has been developed to create and manage spreader programs specifically for the Bromma Conquip SCS2 system used on Spreaders. This tool gives the programmer/user the possibility of configuring and programming the logic of the SCS2 via a graphical interface. In principal ABE generates a binary file describing the interconnection between the graphical objects the user has tied together. This file, when downloaded onto the target system, connects the precompiled objects within the target system together according to the functionality described by the user. Hence all logical objects, components, reside within the target system and the program file generated by ABE determines their interconnection. The objects, from no on referred to as components, within ABE contain a varying amount of logic ranging from basic Boolean instruction sets to Spreader specific blocks of functionality which can be altered in behaviour via parameter settings. The components containing specified Spreader functions are developed to ensure that years of Spreader experience is re-used and also contain the interlocking for generating fault and event messages to the onboard NVRAM (log). This programming tool is intended for use by staff with adequate knowledge of both the system and the functionality of the Spreader/Crane in which it shall be used only. Any alterations or new programs causing failure in functionality due to logical faults in the program are the responsibility of the person/company carrying out this work.
2 Installing ABE
2.1 HW requirements
The minimum requirements to run this application on your PC are: an Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000. at least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2). at least 2Mb of free disk space.
2.2

Installation
Close any other applications running under windows. Insert the CD into your station. Run the file Setup.exe. Follow the instructions on the screen.
2.3
Disclaimer
Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved. Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners. Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice. Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.
5(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
6(86)
3 User interface
ABE-application is divided into four main functions. This chapter describes the four main functions of the program. Remark: Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are: [a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and _ (underscore). No other characters must be used.
3.1
Main window
The main window of the application consists of one large frame. The four tabs at the bottom of this window represent the four main functions of the program. The toolbar at the top of the window is used for common operations. The application supports tool tips. The application is designed to work on a laptop computer with a display size of 800 * 600 pixels or more.
3.2
Error control
Error control of the program file is performed after every operation. The errors found are marked red. The error control can be turned off/on from the Settings menu.
3.3 3.4 3.4.1
Multiple language support General functions File
The default language is English. Additional languages can be requested from Bromma Conquip AB.
The toolbar functions are File, Edit, Settings, Tools and Help. Each function is described below.
Two types of files are available. Type *.spr is a compiled file ready to download onto the SCS2. Type *.spi is an intermediate file. Use Save or Save As... if you are not able to generate downloadable program file but want to continue your work later on. The file extension will then be *.spi.
3.4.1.1 New
Creates a new program file for editing.
3.4.1.2 Open
Opens a program file for editing/viewing.
3.4.1.3 Save As...

Prompts the user to supply a new filename to which the project will be saved. The file extension will be *.spi.
3.4.1.4 Save
Saves the current project. The file extension will be *.spi.
3.4.1.5 Compile
Generates and prompts you to save a downloadable program file used in the SCS2. The file extension will be *.spr.
3.4.1.6 Print
Prints the Component view.
3.4.1.7 Exit
Exits the application.
6(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
7(86)
3.4.2
Edit
3.4.2.1 Cut
Selected components will be cut and saved to the clipboard.
3.4.2.2 Copy
Selected components will be copied to the clipboard.
3.4.2.3 Paste
Content of clipboard will be pasted into selected page in the Component view. If connections match existing ports theses will also be pasted into the page.
3.4.2.4 Find
Finds a text string in component comments, component identifiers or an actual component.
3.4.3
Settings
3.4.3.1 Error Control

Turns the error control on/off.
3.4.3.2 Show hints

Turns the tool tips on/off.
3.4.3.3 Show component connection info

Turns information at component connection points on/off.
3.4.4
Tools
3.4.4.1 Export Pin configuration view

Exports a list of current Pin configuration as an html page for viewing in a web browser.
3.4.4.2 Export Component documentation

Exports a list of available components an their properties as a html page for viewing in a web browser.
3.4.4.3 Export parameters

Exports the selected components parameters to a file.
3.4.4.4 Import parameters

Imports parameters from a file to current project.
3.4.4.5 Show Ladder, Show function blocks

Shows the current project in Ladder format. Note that one cannot add, delete or online monitor components when ladder look activated.
7(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
8(86)
3.4.5
Help
3.4.5.1 About
Short information about ABE such as version, current number of components etc.
8(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
9(86)
4 System view
4.1 General
The system view provides a way of enabling and disabling (connecting/disconnecting) nodes and setting system properties such as version number, author, comments and date of modification. The nodes are named A1-A4 for the nodes intended to be fitted to the crane and B1-B8 for the nodes intended to be fitted to the Spreader. Each node name corresponds to a unique address key setting. The system view allows the user to set up the node configuration by checking the desired nodes. A fixed set of checkboxes are available that represent the used nodes in the system. The enabled nodes then have to be present in that system. An exception is if the EXISTS function is used. This function can then replace a node on the bus with an input on the master node. The B1-node is selected by default, since every system has to contain exactly one Master node, B1. Four crane nodes and seven spreader nodes are available for selection. Checkboxes for enabling Twistlock redundancy as well as Spreader stop have to be checked here as well if these functions are used.
Figure 4:1 System view
4.2
Functionality
The system view enables the user to select a node configuration. By filling in the checkboxes you determine the lay-out (topology) of the system. You also determine on which nodes (B1 & B2) you are to have the twistlock redundancy and Spreader stop enabled. Each node configuration gives the respective node a unique ID represented by the address key. You may also set system properties in this view. Some properties will be updated automatically when a project is saved. The properties are:
4.2.1 4.2.2
Author Last date saved
This is the author of the spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.
Displays the date when the current project was last saved. Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.
9(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
10(86)
4.2.3
Creation date
Displays the date of the current projects creation. The creation date is only changed upon creating a new project. Displayed in the format 1999-06-28 14:45.
4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8
Version number Revision number Spreader type Drawing number Customer
A user selectable version number. Maximum version number is 99.99.
The revision number is incremented each time the specific project is compiled.
A text field representing the type of spreader that the current program is intended for. Contains text of max 80 characters.
A number corresponding to the electrical drawing belonging to the current project. Contains text of max 80 characters.
This property is to contain the name of the customer who will use the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.
4.2.9
Comments
This is a text field intended for general comments regarding the Spreader program. Contains text of max 80 characters.
10(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
11(86)
5 Pin configuration view

5.1 General
The pin configuration view is presented as a tabular view of the system, where each tab represents a node. An I/O list corresponding tags will be available for all enabled nodes in the system. The top tabs indicate which node is displayed. A tag is composed of its Item identifier and its Comment. The used I/O not yet connected is marked red. The Port id# field contains a port id, the numerical ID of the I/O number of the SCS2. The Connection field is either IN, OUT or NC (Not connected) and if its a digital, analogue, PWM or Encoder signals. These fields cannot be edited. Remark: Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are: [a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and _ (underscore). No other characters must be used.
Figure 5:1 Pin configuration view
5.2
Functionality
This view allows you to change the tag for all port numbers on all nodes in the system. Within this view you give each individual I/O its nick name, Item Identifier, to make the program more comprehensible, you also assign any comments to the I/O. The connection type (IN/OUT) will be updated automatically as the Spreader program is altered in the component view; i.e. the direction of the I/O point is decided when the I/O is connected. Note that ABE will only permit I/O configuration that is supported by the current SCS2 HW, hence the digital I/O direction can only differ outside of groups of four apart from the last four I/O points in the list (45-48) which can configured individually.
5.2.1
Address key
The address key field illustrates how the address key should be linked for the viewed node. This pattern corresponds to the required connection on the X2 connector on the SCS2 HW.
5.2.2
Exists port
The exists port is used in case versatility on the number of used nodes is required. By letting an Input replace a node within a system one can then have for instance three nodes active in one case and two node plus the selected input active in another case, and still run the system without having to re-configure it. This can be useful when different models of Spreaders are to be used within the same system.
11(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
12(86)
5.2.3
Anybus I/O
With this button you can view all anybus inputs and outputs in current Spreader program.
6 Component view
6.1 General
The component view is where components are deployed and connected. A palette displaying all components is available in the view. To add a component, select the component from the Palette and place it on your work space with the mouse. Remark: Allowed characters when giving names to Item identifiers, Comments, Components and Tags are: [a, b, c..., z], [A, B, C..., Z], [0, 1, 2,..., 9] and _ (underscore). No other characters must be used.
Figure 6:1 Component view
Figure 6:2 Palette
Components may be dragged within a page to change the layout. Each page can be resized vertically.
12(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
13(86)
The following table describes some reoccurring terminology in this manual. Name Output tag Symbol Description An Output tag is an intermediate variable used for making the program more readable and efficient. Note. Changing the name of an Output tag must be followed by a change of the corresponding Input tag(s) An Input tag is used to connect to an existing Output tag. Note. Changing the name(s) on Input tag(s) must be followed by a change of the corresponding Output tag. A component contains logic. The components range from simple Boolean (AND, OR etc) to those with full functionality specifically for Spreaders (APS etc.). Some of the components contain parameters. By double clicking (or right clicking and selecting properties) the component, its properties/parameters are displayed and can be edited. A component also carries component connection points (round circles). A red coloured connection indicates that it has to be connected before a compilation can be performed. Once the connection point is connected it turns white. This means that it is connected correctly. If a connection point is white although it is not connected it is optional to connect it or not. A connection to a physical output. The displayed name is the Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view. Multiple connections are not possible for an Output port. A connection to a physical input. The displayed name is the Item identifier found in the Pin configuration view. A multiple connection to same Input port is indicated with two vertical lines on the connection. This is made to remind the user that the Input port has been connected at least once before. Information about the generic name of the component connection is shown above each connection point when turned on. The function can be turned on/off from the Settings menu.
Input tag Component
Component connection
Output port Input port Multiple connections
Component connection information
6.2
Page functionality
One page contains one set of interconnected components with no feedback in the connections. Reuse of signals may be accomplished by adding variable tags, and referring to those tags wherever necessary. The component view provides the following functionality:
6.2.1 6.3 6.3.1
Adding pages Component functionality Adding a component
By clicking on the last page or by placing a component on the last page will add a new page below it.
In each page, components may be manipulated. Operations on components are:
This operation adds the component currently selected in the palette to a page. Simply click the desired component and then click the location you wish to place this component on the current page youre working on.
13(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
14(86)
6.3.2 6.3.3 6.3.4
Moving a component Selecting multiple components Cutting / coping / pasting components
Moving a component is a matter of dragging it around using the mouse.
Multiple selection of components is possible using key modifiers (shift / ctrl).
The copied and cut components will be placed on the clipboard, allowing components to be pasted on pages in the same application or in other ABE applications.
6.3.5 6.3.6
Delete a component Connecting / disconnecting components
By selecting a component and pressing delete it is removed from the page.
Drawing a line from one connection point to another makes connections between components. One can also connect a component by right clicking a connection point and selecting a connection from the available lists displayed (I/O, Components instances, Tags). Clicking with the right mouse button over a connected connection point will give you the option to disconnect.
6.3.7
Online monitoring
Online monitoring is performed under Component view. The same spreader program must be present in both ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always download your current spreader program to the SCS2 or upload the spreader program from the SCS2. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2. Start online monitoring by pressing the Start online monitoring button. Automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval, if Auto is checked The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status. Stop online monitoring by pressing the Stop online monitoring button (same button as Start online monitoring button).
14(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
15(86)
7 Load view
7.1 General
The load view provides functionality to download and upload Spreader programs. The connection to the system is selected in the connection box; the possible choices are, Com1 and Com2. Current status of the transfer is displayed in the three progress bars.
Figure 7:1 Load view
7.2
Functionality
When the download button is pressed the user is prompted to point out the file to download to the system. It has to be a compiled downloadable program file (*.spr-file). The current status of a download process from the PC to the system is shown in the top progress bar. The distribution transfer between nodes is shown in the two progress bars at the bottom of the page. The upload button allows the user to retrieve a program file from a connected system and save it to a file.
15(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
16(86)
8 Components
Terminology: In this section the follow terms are used: False = 0 = logical low level True = 1 = logical high level Parameter Instance name: Every component used in a project will be given a unique instance name, which can be seen by clicking the right mouse button on a component and selecting properties. This unique instance name is seen in the field next to the title Instance name. The instance name is used to be able to trace every component instance throughout the project. The name can be altered, but no two instances of a component can have the same name, since this is the ID used by the system to determine the interconnection between components. State transition diagrams: The state transition diagrams describe the behaviour of the components in general. Terminology in the diagrams is not the same as in the port listings found in corresponding subsections. The text found in the diagrams is more explicit than the complete listing. Example: In the state transition diagram for TLC4 the following text tag can be found: not All unlocked This text tag is equal to NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4). The latter expression is rather big and makes the diagram difficult to understand. Descriptions (when relevant) like the one above will be made for those sections that contain State transition diagrams.
8.1 8.1.1
Controllers TLC4 Twistlock Controller 4
The Twistlock Controller 4 (TLC4) is used to control four Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the functionality and interlocks for a standard Twistlock operation with four Twistlocks. The component prevents the Twistlock from changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection of unlock and always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it also sends event and warning messages to the log function of the system.
8.1.1.1 State transition diagram

Not All unlocked = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4) All unlocked = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2 AND Unlocked 3 AND Unlocked 4 Unlock after landed = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any) Lock after landed = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any) States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached. All outputs are set false. STARTUP: This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left. A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states). LOCK_ALL: Lock all Twistlocks. UNLOCK_ALL: Unlock all Twistlocks. IDLE: When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not changed from previous state.
16(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
17(86)
For all s tates : Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0 LOCK_ALL [ Lock after landed OR (landed override AND Lock) ]
[ not All unlocked ]
[ All locked ]
STARTUP
[ Lock after landed OR (landed override AND Lock) ]
[ Unlock after landed OR (landed override AND Unlock) ]
IDLE
[ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ]
[ All unlocked ] DISABLED [ All unlocked ]
[ Unlock after landed OR (landed override AND Unlock) ] UNLOCK_ALL
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC4
8.1.1.2 Input ports

Input Landed override Type Digital Description Overrides landed signals. Makes it possible to unlock/lock if not all sensors are active. This port must be connected if enabled in hardware configuration. Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). Unlock command to unlock all Twistlocks. Lock command to lock all Twistlocks.
Enable
Digital
Unlock command Lock command
Digital Digital
17(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
18(86)
Unlocked 1,...,Unlocked 4 Locked 1,..., Locked 4 Landed 1,..., Landed 4
Digital Digital Digital
Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on unlocked sensor 1 to 4. Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on locked sensor 1 to 4. Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on landed sensor 1 to 4
8.1.1.3 Output ports

Output Unlock Lock Locked signal Unlocked signal Landed signal Type Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Description Unlock signal to all Twistlocks. Lock signal to all Twistlocks. All Twistlocks are locked. All Twistlocks are unlocked. All Twistlocks are landed.
8.1.1.4 Parameters
Parameter Delay Unit Milliseconds [ms] Milliseconds [ms] Description Time after all landed sensors are true and lock or unlock command will be able to execute. Time until a warning message will be prompted if not all sensors are made follow an output from the component. (e.g. Locked 1,..., Locked 4 shall become true within this time when a lock output has gone high.) Time from the first landed input has gone active until the system should expect all the landed inputs active and vice versa, the time from which the first landed signal goes low until all landed signals should have gone low If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur.
Timeout Twistlocks
Timeout landed
Milliseconds [ms]
Enable logging
Digital
8.1.1.5 Message logging

This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.
18(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
19(86)
Code 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 118 119 175 176 177 178 244 245
Message TLC_NO_SENSOR TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT ED TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV ATED TLC_LOCK_COMMAND TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND TLC_LOCKED TLC_UNLOCKED TLC_LANDED TLC_UNLANDED
Description No twist-lock sensor inputs active during system start. One twist-lock indicating both locked and unlocked. Timeout while locking. Locked signal has not been received after output to valve. Locked sensor lost during operation. Sensor lost without command/output when Twistlocks are all locked. Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal has not been received after output to valve. Unlocked sensor lost during operation. Sensor lost without command/output when Twistlocks are all unlocked. All landed sensors not received after first landed and timeout. Landed sensor not released when the other sensors not active and a timer has timed out When override input is set to true and previous state is false. When override input is set to false and previous state is true. Twist-lock lock command received Twist-lock unlock command received All Twistlocks have been locked All Twistlocks have been unlocked The spreader has been landed. The Spreader has been totally lifted (not landed)
8.1.2
TLC8 Twistlock Controller 8
The Twistlock Controller 8 (TLC8) is used to control eight Twistlocks at the same time. This component incorporates the functionality and interlocks for a Twistlock operation with eight Twistlocks. The component prevents the Twistlock from changing state unless the landed pins have been active for the specified time, it also prevents pre-selection of unlock and always keeps the outputs from the component active. Apart from the pure functionality of this component it also sends event and warning messages to the log function of the system.

Twin is down (two containers): not All unlocked = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8) All unlocked = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 8 Twin is up (single container): not All unlocked = NOT (Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,...,AND Unlocked 4) All unlocked = Unlocked 1 AND Unlocked 2,..., AND Unlocked 4 Unlock after landed = when an unlock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any) Lock after landed = when a lock command is given after landed on all corners (and delay has elapsed if any) States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached.
19(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
20(86)
All outputs are set false. STARTUP: This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left. A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states). LOCK_ALL: Lock single and twin Twistlocks. LOCK_SINGLE: Lock single Twistlocks. UNLOCK_ALL: Unlock single and twin Twistlocks. UNLOCK_SINGLE: Unlock single Twistlocks. IDLE: When a lock or unlock command has resulted in a complete sequence this state is reached. Lock/unlock outputs are not changed from previous state.
For al l states: T ransition is m ade to DISABLED state if SpreaderStop = 1or Enabl e = 0
LOCK_ALL
LOCK_SINGLE
[ T win is down ] [ T win i s up ]
[ All locked ] [ Al l locked ] [ Unlock after landed OR (l anded override AND Unlock) ] ST ART UP [ Lock after landed OR (landed overri de AND Lock) ] [ Lock after landed OR (landed override AND Lock) ]
IDLE
[ Unlock after landed OR (landed override AND Unl ock) ]
enabl e = 1
[ All unlocked ] DISABLED [ T wi n is down ] T win is up
[ All unlocked ]
UNLOCK_ALL
UNLOCK_SINGLE
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TLC8
20(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
21(86)
8.1.2.2 Input ports

Input Landed override Type Digital Description Overrides landed signals. Makes it possible to unlock/lock if not all sensors are active. This port must be connected if enabled in hardware configuration. Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). Unlock command to unlock all Twistlocks. Lock command to lock all Twistlocks. Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on unlocked sensor Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on unlocked sensor
Enable
Digital
Unlock command Lock command Twin unlocked 1 Twin unlocked 4 Single unlocked 1 Single unlocked 4 Twin locked 1 Twin locked 4 Single locked 1 Single locked 4 Twin landed 1 Twin landed 4 Single landed 1 Single landed 4 Twin is up
Digital
Digital
Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on locked sensor Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on locked sensor
Digital
Digital
Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on landed sensor Sensor input from Twistlocks. Status on landed sensor Input signal telling that Twinboxes are up. Single Twistlocks are enabled only. Input signal telling that there is a TTDS fault. Disables lock operations.
Digital
Digital
TTDS Fault
Digital

Output Type Description
21(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
22(86)
Unlock single Unlock twin Lock single Lock twin Locked signal Unlocked signal Landed signal
Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital
Unlock signal to single Twistlocks. Unlock signal to twin Twistlocks. Lock signal to single Twistlocks. Lock signal to twin Twistlocks. All Twistlocks are locked. All Twistlocks are unlocked. All Twistlocks are landed.
8.1.2.4 Parameters
Parameter Delay Unit Milliseconds [ms] Milliseconds [ms] Description Time after all landed sensors are true and lock or unlock command will be able to execute. Time until a warning message will be prompted if not all sensors are made follow an output from the component. (e.g. Locked single 1,..., Locked single 4 shall become true within this time when a lock output has gone high.) Time from the first landed input has gone active until the system should expect all the landed inputs active and vice versa, the time from which the first landed signal goes low until all landed signals should have gone low If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur.
Timeout Twistlocks
Timeout landed
Milliseconds [ms]
Enable logging
Digital

This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 60 61 62 63 Message TLC_NO_SENSOR TLC_MULTIPEL_SENSOR TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING TLC_LOCKED_SENSOR_LOST Description No twist-lock sensor inputs active during system start. One twist-lock indicating both locked and unlocked. Timeout while locking. Locked signal has not been received after output to valve. Locked sensor lost during operation. Sensor lost without command/output when Twistlocks are all locked.
22(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
23(86)
64 65 66 67 118 119 175 176 177 178 244 245
TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_MISSING TLC_UNLOCKED_SENSOR_LOST TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_MISSING TLC_LANDED_SENSOR_STUCK TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_ACTIVAT ED TLC_LANDED_OVERRIDE_DEACTIV ATED TLC_LOCK_COMMAND TLC_UNLOCK_COMMAND TLC_LOCKED TLC_UNLOCKED TLC_LANDED TLC_UNLANDED
Timeout while unlocking. Unlocked signal has not been received after output to valve. Unlocked sensor lost during operation. Sensor lost without command/output when Twistlocks are all unlocked. All landed sensors not received after first landed and timeout. Landed sensor not released when the other sensors not active and a timer has timed out When override input is set to true and previous state is false. When override input is set to false and previous state is true. Twist-lock lock command received Twist-lock unlock command received All Twistlocks have been locked All Twistlocks have been unlocked The spreader has been landed. The Spreader has been totally lifted (not landed)
8.1.3
FAC Flipper Arm Controller
The FAC component is used for grouping and controlling a number of Flippers determined by a parameter of the component. The function sets either the up or down output at all times depending on the parameter settings. The inputs to the component generate event messages to the onboard log if enabled.

States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached. All outputs are set false. STARTUP: This state is reached every time the system is starting up or when DISABLED state is left. A decision is made if lock or unlock sequence should be initiated (i.e. a transition to those states). IDLE: This state is reached emedeately after UP or DOWN states have been reached. UP: All Flippers are sent up. DOWN: All Flippers are sent down.
23(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
24(86)
For all s tates : Trans ition is m ade to DISABLED s tate if SpreaderStop = 1or Enable = 0
UP
[ UpCom m and ]
START_UP
IDLE
[ DownCom m and ]
DISABLED
DOWN
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: FAC
8.1.3.2 Input ports

Input Up command Down command Enable Type Digital Digital Digital Description Command to send all Flippers up. Command to send all Flippers down. Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect).

Output Flipper up 1,..., Flipper up n Type Digital Description Up signal to Flipper 1 to n. The number of Flippers (n) is derived from the parameter Number of Flippers. Down signal to Flipper 1 to n. The number of Flippers (n) is derived from the parameter Number of Flippers.
Flipper down 1,..., Flipper down n
Digital
8.1.3.4 Parameters
Parameter Number of Flippers Unit Number Description The number of Flippers to be controlled.
24(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
25(86)
Operation mode
Option
Impulse (only impulse required for the command to execute) or Constant (constant command required). If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur.
Enable logging
Option

This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 246 247 Message FAC_UP_COMMAND FAC_DOWN_COMMAND Description Flipper up command received Flipper down command received
8.1.4
DPS Discrete Positioning System
The DPS is used for controlling the chain telescope of a Spreader with proximity switch or screw limit switch box indicating the stops. The component can be used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as well as systems using expand/retract commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions are chosen via a component parameter. Parts of its behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant commands etc are selected by parameters. The intermediate positions are designed to have two sensors per stop but will perform correctly with one sensor per intermediate position provided it is connected (in the software) to both the inputs of that position on the component. The outputs of the component are interlocked to unlocked and landed. The feedback from the component is a signal indicating what position has bee reached as well as a signal indicating that any valid stop has been reached. The component generates a number of events and warnings if positions arent reached within a parameter adjusted time etc. The DPS component is equipped with an fast I/O concept, this means that the component sampels the input sensors at a higher frequency and sets the actuators according to the internal logic. This will improve the overall performance of the component. To utilise this feature please note that the position sensors and actuators must be physically connected to the same node and that no logic is to be placed on the components outputs (Expand, Retract). If sensors and actuators not connected to the same node the fast I/O concept will be disabled.

States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached. All outputs are set false. STARTUP: Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state. IDLE: Waiting for command input. EXPAND: Expanding to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached. RETRACT:
25(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
26(86)
Retracting to next stop. Next stop is either next closest stop or a stop decided according to which Return to position X command is given. A transition is made to IDLE state when next stop is reached. CONSTANT REPEAT: When stopped at a position a new constant command is required to go to another position. Depressed keys or similar must be released before a new command will be excepted. Example: 1. Expand command is given. 2. Next stop is reached. 3. The telescope stops. 4. Expand command is released. 5. New expand command is given. 6. The telescope continues. DELAY: A delay is made for a time defined by Stop delay time (parameter). This delay is only performed if Delay is set in Operation mode (parameter) else ignored. currentCommand = is always EXPAND or RETRACT. The command inputs Retract / Expand command or Return to position X. These command inputs are internally converted to EXPAND or RETRACT depending on current position and desired position.
[ desiredStop = currentStop, Operation m ode = Delay ]
EXPAND
[ desiredStop = current Stop, Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat ]
[ currentCom m and = EXPAND ]
DELAY
[ Delay perform ed ]
IDLE
[ com m andInput = NO_CMD ]
CONSTANT REPEAT
[ currentCom m and = RETRACT ] [ desiredStop = currentStop, Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat ] RETRACT [ desiredStop = currentStop, Operation m ode = Delay ] START_UP [ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ] DISABLED
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: DPS
8.1.4.2 Input ports
26(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
27(86)
Input Expand command Retract command Return to position 0 Return to position n Sensor 0 ... Sensor n
Type Digital Digital Digital
Description Input command to expand telescope to next stop. Input command to retract telescope to next stop. Input command to expand telescope to predefined stop. The number of predefined stops is set by the parameter Number of stops. Sensor input. Example with 4 stops: Stop number 1 has Stop sensor 1, Stop number 2 has Stop sensor 2 + 3, Stop number 3 has Stop sensor 4 + 5, Stop number 4 has Stop sensor 6. Etc..
Digital
Any landed All unlocked Enable
Sensor input from landed sensors. Prevents telescoping when landed. Sensor input from unlocked sensors. Permits telescoping when unlocked. Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). Enables slave mode. Telescope will run at full speed, only Retract and Expand commands are enabled and no stops are enabled
Slave
Digital

Output Expand Retract In position 0,..., Reached stop n In position Type Digital Digital Digital Digital Description Output to expand telescope. Output to retract telescope. Output signal indicating that the specific valid stop has been reached. Output signal indicating that a valid stop has been reached.
8.1.4.4 Parameters
Parameter Unit Description
27(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
28(86)
Timeout
Milliseconds [ms]
Time permitted from when an output is turned on until a valid position should be reached. If this time is exceeded the motion will be stopped and a warning generated. Impulse, Delay and Constant repeat. Time the telescope is delayed (stopped) at each stop. The number of stops in use. If set to true (checked) the storing of messages will be turned on otherwise no generated messages will be stored.
Operation mode Delay at each stop Number of stops Enable logging
Option Milliseconds [ms] Number Option

This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 68 69 70 71 179 180 181 182 Message DPS_TIMEOUT DPS_SENSOR_MISSING DPS_SENSOR_LOST DPS_MULTIPEL_SENSOR DPS_EXPAND_COMMAND DPS_RETRACT_COMMAND DPS_GOPOS_COMMAND DPS_STOP_REACHED Description No valid stop reached within timeout time. The expected sensor has not been reached within specified sequence. Position sensor has been lost without any command given More than one position sensor active simultaneously. Expand command received Retract command received A command to go to a certain position received A valid position has been reached
8.1.5
Tower Head block
The Tower component is used to adjust the point of gravity.

States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached. All outputs are set false. STARTUP: Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state. IDLE: Waiting for command input. FEED_LEFT:
28(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
29(86)
Feeds the Tower to the left. FEED_RIGHT: Feeds the Tower to the right. CENTER: Centres the tower. The Tower is centred when both At left sensor and At right sensor is true. DELAY: A delay is performed for a time defined by Direction change time (parameter).
FEED_LEFT
FEED_RIGHT
[ Feed right ] [ Feed left ]
START_UP
IDLE
[ Center ]
[ Delay perform ed ]
DISABLED CENTER DELAY
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Tower
8.1.5.2 Input ports

Input Enable Type Digital Description Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). Enables feeding in right direction. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). Enables feeding in left direction. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). Position sensor input. Position sensor input.
Enable right
Digital
Enable left
Digital
Right end sensor At right sensor
Digital Digital
29(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
30(86)
At left sensor Left end sensor Right command Left command Centre command
Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital
Position sensor input. Position sensor input. Input command to feed head block right. Input command to feed head block left. Input command to feed head to the centre position.

Output In centre At right side At left side Feed right Feed left Type Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Description Output signal telling Head block is in centre position. Output signal telling Head block is to the right. Output signal telling Head block is to the left. Output signal to feed Head block right. Output signal to feed Head block left.
8.1.5.4 Parameters
Parameter Operation mode Delay Timeout Unit Option Milliseconds [ms] Milliseconds [ms] Description Constant or Impulse. Impulse is only valid for the Centre command Time before a change of direction will take effect. Time permitted from when an output is turned on until a valid position should be reached. If this time is exceeded the motion will be stopped. If set true (checked) Right end sensor and Left end sensor does not need to be connected. If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur.
Use end stops
Option
Enable logging
Option

This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging.
30(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
31(86)
Code 325 326 327 328 329 330 369
Message TOWER_CENTER_COMMAND TOWER_LEFT_COMMAND TOWER_RIGHT_COMMAND TOWER_REACHED_CENTER_POS TOWER_REACHED_LEFT_POS TOWER_REACHED_RIGHT_POS TOWER_TIMEOUT
Description Centre command is given. Feed left command is given. Feed right command is given. Tower has reached centre position. Tower has reached left position. Tower has reached right position. Tower has not reached the desired position within the time limit.
8.1.6
APS Automatic Positioning System
The APS component is used for positioning the chain telescope using an absolute encoder input to read the position of the chain. Due to the feedback from the sensor, self-correcting is possible if the Spreader is knocked out of position. It is possible to use both proportional controls (PWM) as well as on/off control with this component. The component can be used both with telescopic system using direct commands for each position as well as systems using expand/retract commands to increment/decrement between the positions. The number of positions is chosen via a component parameter as well as are certain parts of its behaviour such as if it requires impulse commands or constant commands etc. The absolute value (count) for each position is done via teach in functionality.

States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached. All outputs are set false. STARTUP: Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state. IDLE: Waiting for command input. Expand command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state. Retract command or Go position command (depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state. EXPAND: Expands telescope. PWM expand output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window. PWM expand output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window. PWM expand output is set to zero if in Stop window. Digital expand output is set to false if in Stop window else true. RETRACT: Retracts telescope. PWM retract output is set to maximum (High speed) if not in Low speed window or in Stop window. PWM retract output is set to minimum (Low speed) if in Low speed window. PWM retract output is set to zero if in Stop window. Digital retract output is set to false if in Stop window else true. DELAY: Performs a delay (Stop delay time) at each stop if Delay is selected in Operation mode (parameter) Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.
31(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
32(86)
CONSTANT_REPEAT: A new Expand or Retract command must be given to leave this state if Constant repeat is selected in Operation mode (parameter). Expand and retract outputs are set to false in this state.
EXPAND
[ Operation m ode = Delay ]
DELAY
[ desiredPos ition > currentPos ition ] [ Operation m ode = Im puls e, des iredPosition = currentPos ition ] [ Operation m ode = Delay, des iredPos ition = currentPos ition ]
[ Delay perform ed ] STARTUP IDLE
[ no button is pres s ed ] [ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ] [ Operation m ode = Im puls e, des iredPos ition = current Pos ition ] [ desiredPos ition < currentPos ition ]
[ Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat, des iredPos ition = currentPos ition ]
DISABLED
RETRACT
[ Operation m ode = Cons tant repeat ]
CONSTANT REPEAT
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: APS
8.1.6.2 Teaching telescope positions

This component has to be taught the absolute value (encoder count) of each position. This is done by having the Teach input go high and at the same time giving the command of the current position to be taught. The current value of the encoder is then saved onboard the Spreader. All positions, that have been enabled via the parameter Number of stops, have to be taught a value.
8.1.6.3 Input ports

Input Type Description
32(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
33(86)
Enable
Digital
Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). Command to teach in new positions. When this signal is true any Go position command will store a new position for corresponding stop. Enables slave mode. Telescope will run at full speed, only Retract and Expand commands are enabled and no stops are enabled. Input signal indicating that all hooks are in up position. Only used for twin telescopic Spreaders. I.e. if nothing is connected here telescoping is permitted, can also be used as a general permit. Input result from landed sensors. Command to feed to defined positions 0,...,n. Command to retract telescope. Command to expand telescope. Scaled input signal of the current position.
Teach
Digital
Slave mode
Digital
Hooks are up
Digital
Any landed Go position 0 Go position n Retract command Expand command Current position
Digital Digital
Digital Digital Analogue

Output Stop position0 Stop position n In position In position 0 In position n PWM retract Type Analogue Description Output signal indicating the stored positions for the corresponding stop. Output signal indicating that a valid stop has been reached. Output signal indicating that the specific valid stop has been reached. PWM output to control the telescope.
Digital Digital
PWM Range 0-1000
PWM expand
PWM Range 0-1000
PWM output to control the telescope.
Digital retract
Digital
Digital output to control the telescope.
33(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
34(86)
Digital expand Digital high speed
Digital Digital
Digital output to control the telescope. Digital output for high speed telescoping in two-speed system.
8.1.6.5 Parameters
Parameter Delay at each stop Unit Milliseconds [ms] Milliseconds [ms] Description Delay time at each stop if Expand or Retract command is given and Delay is enabled under Operation mode. Time until from when an output is turned on until a valid position should be reached. If this time is exceeded the motion will be stopped and a warning generated. The number of stops enabled. If enabled the APS will feed back the telescope to its original position if it of some reason has got out of position. Impulse: sequence completes until a new command is given Delay: delay at each stop Constant repeat: when a stop is reached a new expand or retract command must be given. Stop window Millimetre [mm] Signal window Millimetre [mm] Distance from defined stop to be considered as a stop. Window around the desired position in which a signal indicating that the correct position has been reached is given. Hysterisis for impact detection. Delay after impact detected to run.
Timeout
Number of stops Auto correction
Number Option
Operation mode
Option
Impact range Impact off delay timer
Millimetre [mm] Milliseconds [ms]
Length of travel
Millimetre [mm]
Distance between minimum and maximum positions. Time between minimum and maximum positions. Ramp gain.
Time of telescope
Milliseconds [ms]
Ramp Gain
Number [value *1000]
34(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
35(86)
Ramp offset Time to reach max speed
Millimetre [mm] Milliseconds [ms]
Ramp offset for stop speed The time it shall take to reach max speed. Proportional part of the PI regulator
Proportional Gain
Integral Gain
Integral part of the PI regulator
PWM value for teach Reverse Min PWM output Reverse Max PWM output Forward Min PWM output Forward Max PWM output Enable logging
Number Number Number Number Number Option
PWM output when teach enabled. Minimum value on PWM that causes a reversed movement. Maximum value on PWM that causes a reversed movement Minimum value on PWM that causes a forward movement. Maximum value on PWM that causes a forward movement. If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur.

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 183 184 185 186 187 272 396 397 398 399 Message APS_TIMEOUT APS_EXPAND_COMMAND APS_RETRACT_COMMAND APS_GOPOS_COMMAND APS_STOP_REACHED APS_TEACH_COMMAND APS_IMPACT_ON APS_AUTOCORR_ON APS_IN_VALUE_OUT_OF_T EACH_RANGE APS_IMPACT_OUT_OF_SIG_ WIN Description The telescope hasn't reached its' position within time limit. Expand command received Retract command received Command to go to a specific position received The desired position reached Teach in command received Impact is detected Spreader is auto correcting The position value is not within the teached range. Spreader is bumped out of signal window.
8.1.7
MPS Memory position system
The MPS component stores either a predefined value or a value set during run time and can then position the twin telescope to this/these positions on given commands. The MPS uses an absolute input value and can either be used to return the twin telescope to a number of predefined positions (taught in and stored in the NVRAM). The driver also has
35(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
36(86)
the possibility of storing the current position in a volatile memory of the SCS2 and then returning to this position via a command until the power is cycled or a new position is stored.

States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached. All outputs are set false. STARTUP: Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state. IDLE: Waiting for command input. Expand command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position (depending on current position) makes a transition to EXPAND state. Retract command, Returned to logged position command (depending on current position) and Go to predefined position (depending on current position) makes a transition to RETRACT state. EXPAND: Expands the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop. RETRACT: Retracts the Twin boxes until position is within range Stop window from desired stop.
RETRACT
[ desiredPos ition < currentPos ition ]
[ desiredPos ition = currentPos ition ]
STARTUP
IDLE
[ desiredPos ition = currentPos ition ] [ SpreaderStop = 0, Enable = 1 ] [ desiredPos ition > currentPos ition ] DISABLED EXPAND
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: MPS
36(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
37(86)
8.1.7.2 Input ports

Input Enable Type Digital Description Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). Scaled input signal reading the current position. Command to feed Twin boxes to predefined position 0,...,n
Current position Return to predefined position 0 ... Return to predefined position n Returned to stored position 0 ... Returned to stored position n Store new position 0 ... Store new position n Teach
Analogue Digital
Digital
Command to feed Twin boxes to logged position 0,...,n Command to log new positions. When this signal is true the current position will be stored in the RAM of the SCS2. Command to teach in new positions. When this signal is true any Go to pre-defined position command will store a new position for corresponding stop.
Digital
Digital

Output Current reference position Predefined position 0 Predefined position n Predefined position 0 Predefined position n Logged position 0 Logged position n In position Type Analogue Analogue Description Signal indicating the currently desired position. Signal indicating the positions for the corresponding predefined stop. Signal indicating the positions for the corresponding predefined stop. Output signal indicating the positions for the corresponding logged stop. Output signal indicating that any position has been reached & logged or predefined). Output signal to expand Twin boxes. Output signal to retract Twin boxes.
Analogue
Analogue
Digital
Expand Retract
Digital Digital
37(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
38(86)
8.1.7.4 Parameters
Parameter Stop window Operation mode Unit Millimetre [mm] Option Description Offset from stop to be considered as a stop. Impulse: sequence completes until a new command is given Constant: when a stop is reached a new expand or retract command must be given. Predefined positions Number The number of stops that will be stored in none volatile memory. (I.e. positions will be available after shutting down system.) The number of stops that will be stored in volatile memory. (I.e. positions will be lost when shutting down system.) Time from when an output is turned on until a valid position should be reached. If this time is exceeded the motion will be stopped and a warning generated. If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur.
Storable positions
Number
Timeout
Milliseconds [ms]
Enable logging
Option

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 281 282 280 284 285 Message MPS_TEACH_PREDEF_POS MPS_GO_PREDEF_POS MPS_TEACH_LOGGED_POS MPS_GO_LOGGED_POS MPS_TIMEOUT Description Teach command received. Command to go to a pre-defined position has been received. A command to store a new value for a log position has been received. A command to return to a log position has been received. The twin-legs haven't reached their requested position within time limit.
38(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
39(86)
8.1.8
Twin Telescope
The Twin Telescope component transfers the commands to expand and retract the twin telescope to the necessary outputs. The component, although it doesnt hold much functionality, is useful for the event log.

States: DISABLED: When enable goes false or Spreader Stop is activated this state is reached. All outputs are set false. STARTUP: Unconditional transition is made to IDLE state. IDLE: Waiting for command input. Expand command makes a transition to EXPAND state if In 45ft sensor is false. Retract command makes a transition to RETRACT state if one not In zero left sensor is true and if not In zero right sensor is false. EXPAND: Expands the Twin boxes as long as Expand command is given and In 45ft is false. RETRACT: Retracts the Twin boxes as long as Retract command is given and both In zero left and In zero right sensors are false.
EXPAND
[ Expand, !in45Pos ] [ !Expand OR in45Pos ]
STARTUP
IDLE
[ !SpreaderStop, Enable ] [ Retract, !inZeroPos Left, !inZeroPos Right ] DISABLED
[ !Retract OR (inZeroPos Left, in ZeroPos Right) ]
RETRACT
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: Twin Telescope
39(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
40(86)
8.1.8.2 Input ports

Input Enable Type Digital Description Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). Sensor input signal. Sensor input signal. Sensor input signal. Command input to retract the twin boxes. Command input to expand the twin boxes.
In 45ft In zero right In zero left Retract command Expand command

Output Retract Expand Type Digital Digital Description Output signal to retract twin boxes. Output signal to expand twin boxes.
8.1.8.4 Parameters
Parameter Timeout Unit Milliseconds [ms] Description Time until from when an output is turned on until a valid position should be reached. If this time is exceeded the motion will be stopped and a warning generated. If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur.
Enable logging
Option

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 273 274 275 276 Message TWINTELE_EXPAND_COMMAND TWINTELE_RETRACT_COMMAND TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_LEFT TWINTELE_REACHED_ZERO_RIGHT Description Expand command received Retract command received Left console reached zero gap position Right console reached zero gap position
40(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
41(86)
277 278 279
TWINTELE_EXPANDING TWINTELE_RETRACTING TWINTELE_TIMEOUT
Twinlegs expand in motion Twinlegs retract in motion Hasn't reached an end stop when in motion within time limit
8.1.9
TwinUpDown
The TwinUpDown component is designed to be used on the twin telescopic Spreaders. The component performs the twin up and twin down sequences automatically upon the commands twin up and twin down. The sequence for twin down consists of the twin units separating until the Left attach & right attach permits have been made. Thereafter the hooks situated on the tension rod are lowered and finally the twin boxes are lowered. The sequence for twin up consists of the hooks on the tension rod being raised followed by the twin boxes being raised. The twin consoles are now retracted until the zero position switches are made, the retract output is active for a short off-delay after that to ensure that both units are fully retracted. When a complete up sequence has been performed a pulse is given on the output Twin up ready pulse , which in turn can be used for instance to run the Spreader back to the correct single 40ft position.
41(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
42(86)

TWIN_UP 1 : [ !allTwinUp || !hookLeft Disconnected || !hookRight Disconnected ] 2 : [ !allTwinUp || !(hook LeftDis connected && hookRightDis connected) ] TWIN_DOWN [ twinDownReques tM ]
RAISE_BOXES
CONNECT
[ !allTwinUp ]
[ allTwinUp ] [ hookLeftConnected && hook RightConnected ]
RAISE_HOOKS
1 : [ !allTwinUp || !hookLeftDis connected || !hookRight Disconnected ]
[ hookLeftDis connected && hookRightDis connected ] 2 : [ !(twinInZeroPos Left && twinInZeroPosRight) ]
BOXES_DOWN
INCH_IN 2 : [ las tTwinUpStateM != OFF _DELAY_INCH && twinInZero Pos Left && twinInZeroPos Right && energis eInchInM ] 3:
[ anyTwinUp ]
[ !anyTwinUp ]
HOLD_UP 1 : [ !(twinInZeroPos Left && twinIn ZeroPos Right) || delayM.is Tim eout() ] Trans ition to IDLE s tate if twinDownCom m and
HOLD_DOWN OFF_DELAY_INCH
H*
H*
Trans ition to IDLE s tate if twinUpCom m and
[ twinUpCom m and ] [ twinDownCom m and ]
1 : [ twinDownReques tM) || (twin DownCom m and && hookLeft Connected && hookRightConnected ]
IDLE 2 : [ anyTwinUp && !(hook LeftConnected && hook RightConnected) ] 2 : [ twinUpReques tM ] 1 : [ !anyTwinUp && hook LeftConnected && hook RightConnected ] 3: STARTUP
DISABLED
Figure 8:1 State transition diagram: TwinUpDown
42(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
43(86)
8.1.9.2 Input ports

Input Enable Type Digital Description Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). Sensor input indicating that Twin boxes are up. Sensor input indicating that right hook is down. Sensor input indicating that left hook is down. Sensor input indicating that position has been reached to attach twin boxes on right side. Sensor input indicating that position has been reached to attach twin boxes on left side. Sensor input indicating that hook is up on right side. Sensor input indicating that hook is up on left side. Sensor input indicating that Twin boxes has reached zero position on right side. Sensor input indicating that Twin boxes has reached zero position on left side. Sensor input indicating that chain is in 40ft position. Permits down motion if set to true. Permits up motion if set to true. Command to send Twin boxes down. Command to send Twin boxes up.
Twin box up 1 Twin box up 4 Hook connected right Hook connected left Right attach permit
Digital
Left attach permit
Digital
Hook disconnected right Hook disconnected left Twin in zero right
Twin in zero left
Digital
Chain in 40ft Permit twin down Permit twin up Twin down command Twin up command
8.1.9.3 Output port

Output Twin up ready pulse Twin down Twin up Type Digital Digital Digital Description Signal telling that up sequence is completed. Signal to lower Twin boxes. Signal to raise Twin boxes.
43(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
44(86)
Disconnect twin unit left Disconnect twin unit right Connect twin unit left Connect twin unit right Inch to zero gap Inch to connect left Inch to connect right
Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital
Signal to disconnect left hook. Signal to disconnect right hook. Signal to connect left hook. Signal to connect right hook. Signal to inch in Twin boxes. Signal to inch out left Twin box. Signal to inch out right Twin box.
8.1.9.4 Parameters
Parameter Timeout Twin down Unit Milliseconds [ms] Milliseconds [ms] Milliseconds [ms] Option Description Time until a warning message will be prompted if sequence doesnt complete. Time until a warning message will be prompted if sequence doesnt complete. Time until a warning message will be prompted if sequence doesnt complete. If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur.
Timeout hook
Timeout Twin inching
Enable logging

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 Message TWIN_BOXES_UP_TIMEOUT TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_UP_TIMEOUT TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_UP_TIMEOUT TWIN_ATTACHLEFT_TIMEOUT TWIN_ATTACHRIGHT_TIMEOUT TWIN_HOOK_LEFT_DN_TIMEOUT TWIN_HOOK_RIGHT_DN_TIMEOUT Description Twin boxes have failed to get to their upper position within time limit. Left hook has failed to reach its' upper position within time limit. Right hook has failed to reach its' upper position within time limit. Twin boxes left timed out when expanding to their attach position. Failed to reach switch within time limit. Twin-boxes right timed out when expanding to their attach position. Failed to reach switch within time limit. Left hook has failed to reach its' lower position (connect) within time limit. Right hook has failed to reach its' lower position (connect) within time limit.
44(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
45(86)
262 263 264 265 266 267 268 286 287 288 289
TWIN_BOXES_DOWN_TIMEOUT TWIN_TWIN_SENSOR_LOST TWIN_BOXES_UP_SENSOR_LOST TWIN_HOOK_DN_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST TWIN_HOOK_DN_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST TWIN_HOOK_UP_LEFT_SENSOR_LOST TWIN_HOOK_UP_RIGHT_SENSOR_LOST TWIN_UP_COMMAND TWIN_DOWN_COMMAND TWIN_BOXES_ARE_UP TWIN_BOXES_ARE_DOWN
Twin-boxes have failed to get to their lower position within time limit. Twin up sensor lost unexpectedly. (not due to output). Twin up sensor received when twinboxes are down. Left hook down sensor lost unexpectedly. Right hook down sensor lost unexpectedly. Left hook up sensor lost unexpectedly. Right hook up sensor lost unexpectedly. Twin up command has been received. Twin down command has been received. Twin boxes have reached their upper position. Twin boxes have reached their lower position.
8.1.10 PID 8.1.10.1 Overview

The PID components are used to control fast processes, e.g. positioning, syncronisation and control of hydraulic cylinders with special requirements. Each PID component controls a single cylinder, but usually they ared used in pair and then 2 PID components are needed. The PID component have the following features: Position control Velocity control Syncronisation of two cylinders Acceleration limitation These features are described in the following sections 8.1.10.2-8.1.10.5. The implementation and hands-on configuration are described in section 8.1.10.6.
8.1.10.2 Position control

The PID component can use either position mode or velocity mode depending on which way to coontrol it. In position mode you give a reference position in millimeters. Then the cylinder moves to that position as fast as possible with configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5). The position mode can be activated in run time.
8.1.10.3 Velocity control

In velocity mode you give a reference velocity in percent (range 100 to 100) of the maximum speed. The cylinder then moves in correct direction and at reference speed. When giving a new reference speed the cylinder reaches that speed as fast as possible with configured constraints. The constraints are defined by the Acceleration limit (see 8.1.10.5). The velocity mode can be activated in run time. When you control the cylinder movement with a joystick velocity mode is the best way to do it.
8.1.10.4 Syncronisation of two cylinders

Some systems want to syncronise two cylinders so that they move in parallel. A syncronisation regulator is available in the PID to handle this.
45(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
46(86)
There are two different kind of syncronisation modes: Parallel sync Non-parallel sync Parallel sync is used when the cylinders must be parallel all the time. In run time you can set the difference in position between the two cylinders. Usually this is set to zero. Parallel sync is valid for both positions mode and velocity mode. Non-parallel sync is used when the cylinders shall move syncronised, but not in parallel. In position mode this means that when you can move the two cylinders from separate source positions to two other separate destination positions during the same amount of time. This means that they can move in the same direction or in different directions. In velocity mode you can move the cylinders syncronised at a certain speed without loosing their difference in position. You can either move them in the same direction or in different directions.
8.1.10.5 Acceleration limitation

Some systems cannot handle too high acceleration in the cylinder movements. Therefore an Acceleration limiter is installed and can be used. The limiter works for both acceleration and retardation. The limiter is always active, independent of position/velocity mode or syncronisation mode.
8.1.10.6 Implementation
Each node are equipped with two PID components that can be used. Each PID can control a single cylinder. All parameters for each cylinder are located in the corresponding PID. To identify the two PIDs each component has a parameter called Regulator index which has to be set to 0 and 1 respectively. When using sync mode both PID components cooperate and the sync parameters are taken from PID0. For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID component and AutoTuner component.
8.1.10.7 Input Ports

Input Enable Regulator mode Type Digital Digital Description Enables regulator if set true. Sets the operational mode, POSITION (Low level, 0) or VELOCITY (High level, 1).
Sync parallel mode Synchronise Reference value
Digital Digital Analogue Reference value. This signal is scaled within the component and must not be pre-scaled or scaled to desired value. Description Depending on regulator index the sensor signal will be read from either analogue input 0 or analogue input 1. This signal is scaled within the component and must not be prescaled.
(Port not visible in ABE) Input Sensor value
Type Analogue
8.1.10.8 Output Ports
46(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
47(86)
Output Retract output (PWM)
Type Analogue
Description The actual value sent to the PWM when retracting. Remark: This output is not really needed cause the regulator will work anyway. This output is used to connect to other components for reference only. The actual value sent to the PWM when expanding. Remark: This output is not really needed cause the regulator will work anyway. This output is used to connect to other components for reference only. This signal indicates that the regulator is retracting. This signal indicates that the regulator is expanding.
Expand output (PWM)
Analogue
Retracting Expanding
Digital Digital
(Ports not visible in ABE) Output PWM 0 PWM 1 PWM 2 PWM 3
Type Analogue Analogue Analogue Analogue
Description Used for forward output (PID 0 which is the same as Regulator index 0). Used for reverse output (PID 0 which is the same as Regulator index 0). Used for forward output (PID 1 which is the same as Regulator index 1). Used for reverse output (PID 1 which is the same as Regulator index 1).
8.1.10.9 Parameters
Parameter Filter weight Unit Percent [%] Aim window Millimetres [mm] Description The percentage weight of the previously filtered signal. The distance from the reference position where to aim for the nonlinear regulator. It is only used in Position mode. This should be the frequency [Hz], i.e. 1/sample interval. Fraction of the non-linear regulator signal to use. Should be between 6090.
Rate limiter gain Fraction of square root
Number Percent [%]
47(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
48(86)
Switch window
Millimetres [mm]
Distance from reference position where to switch from the non linear regulator to the PI regulator. This parameter must be higher than the Aim window parameter. It is only used in Position mode. Time to reach full effect of reference velocity. It is only used in Velocity mode. Maximum integrator percent in sync mode. It is only used in Sync mode. Integral part in sync regulator. It is only used in Sync mode. Proportional part in sync regulator. It is only used in Sync mode. Sampling interval.
Time to reach input
Milliseconds [ms]
Sync max integrator
Percent [%]
Sync Integral (I)
Number [value * 1000]
Sync Proportional (P)
Sample interval
Milliseconds [ms]
Velocity window
Percent [%]
When regulating velocity and if the Reference value is inside Velocity window it is interpreted as zero. When regulating position the cylinder will stop when it reaches reference position +/- Position window. Length of cylinder that is to be controlled. Maximum insignal from analogue input. Minimum insignal from analogue input. Time for transportation between Device length and 0 at R Half PWM. Time for transportation between Device length and 0 at R Max PWM. Minimum PWM output that causes movement of piston. (Lower threshold limit). PWM output between R Min PWM and R Max PWM. Approx. (R Min PWM + R Max PWM) / 2
Position window
Millimetres [mm]
Device length
Millimetres [mm]
Insignal max Insignal min R Half PWM time R Max PWM time R Min PWM
Number Number Milliseconds [ms] Milliseconds [ms] Number
R Half PWM
Number
R Max PWM
Number
Minimum PWM output at max speed. (Upper threshold limit).
48(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
49(86)
F Half PWM time F Max PWM time F Min PWM
Milliseconds [ms] Milliseconds [ms] Number
Time for transportation between 0 and Device length at F Half PWM. Time for transportation between 0 and Device length at F Max PWM. Minimum PWM output that causes movement of piston. (Lower threshold limit). PWM output between F Min PWM and F Max PWM. Approx. (F Min PWM + F Max PWM) / 2
F Half PWM
Number
F Max PWM Pos. Integral (I)
Number Number [value * 1000]
Minimum PWM output at max speed. (Upper threshold limit). Integral part of PI regulator. Only used in Position mode. Proportional part of PI regulator. Only used in Position mode. Minimum time for valve to open full and to close full. Index 0 corresponds to PWM0, PWM1 and analogue input 0. Index 1 corresponds to PWM2, PWM3 and analogue input 1.
Pos. Proportional (P)
Acceleration limit
Milliseconds [ms]
Regulator index
Number
Node Store mode
Option Option
Location of regulator. Choose between B1 B8 and A1 A4. Select which parameters to use: ALL PARAMS: use all parameters from NVRAM stored by AutoTuner REGULATOR PARAMS: use only the regulator parameters from NVRAM stored by AutoTuner LINEAR PARAMS: use only linear parameters from NVRAM stored by AutoTuner ABE ONLY: use parameters only from Spreader program file
8.1.11 AutoTuner
This component is intended as a help when setting up the PID component. It will automatically move the cylinder(s) and measuring its characteristics when component is enabled. If one intentions are to synchronize two cylinders with PID components, its possible to adapt the two cylinders with the use of this component. This is done by enabling the check box Prepare for sync parameter.
49(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
50(86)
The AutoTuner will store its measured parameters in the onboard NVRAM. These parameters can then be uploaded and monitored/transferred to the matching PID component. It is important that the Record name is identical to the PID that is supposed to use the auto tuned parameters. For more detailed information about the implementation, it is reffered to a special document describing the PID component and AutoTuner component.
8.1.11.1 Input ports

Input Enable Type Digital Description Enables component if set true. When the enable input goes from 0 to 1 the auto tune procedure is restarted. Sensor input signal for the slave cylinder. Only needed if prepare for sync is checked. Sensor input signal for the cylinder to auto tune.
Slave
Analogue
Main
Analogue

Output Finished Slave Retract Type Digital Analogue Description Output for telling when tuning is complete. Output for retracting slave cylinder. Only needed if prepare for sync is checked. This shall be connected to the PWM output for the slave cylinder. Output for expanding slave cylinder. Only needed if prepare for sync is checked. This shall be connected to the PWM output for the slave cylinder. Output for retracting main cylinder. This shall be connected to the PWM output for the cylinder to auto tune. Output for expanding main cylinder. This shall be connected to the PWM output for the cylinder to auto tune.
Slave Expand
Analogue
Main Retract
Analogue
Main Expand
Analogue
8.1.11.3 Parameters
50(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
51(86)
Position window
Millimeter [mm]
When regulating position the cylinder will stop when it reaches reference position +/- Position window. When regulating velocity and if the Reference value is inside Velocity window it is interpreted as zero. Proportional part in sync regulator. It is only used in Sync mode. Integral part in sync regulator. It is only used in Sync mode. Maximum integrator percent in sync mode. It is only used in Sync mode. Time to reach full effect of reference velocity. It is only used in Velocity mode. Fraction of the non-linear regulator signal to use. Should be between 6090. The percentage weight of the previously filtered signal.
Velocity window
Percents [%]
Sync Proportional [P]
Sync Integral [I]
Sync max integrator
Percents [%]
Time to reach input
Milliseconds [ms]
Fraction of square root
Percents [%]
Filter weight
Percents [%]
Natural frequency
Moderation factor
Regulator index
Number
Index 0 corresponds to PWM0, PWM1 and analogue input 0. Index 1 corresponds to PWM2, PWM3 and analogue input 1.
Sample interval
Milliseconds [ms]
Sampling interval.
Acceleration limit
Milliseconds [ms]
Minimum time for valve to open full and to close full. Length of cylinder that is to be controlled. Timeout for a full cylinder stroke. This parameter must be greater than the tiem it takes for the cylinder to perform a full stroke. The instance name of the matching PID component.
Device length
Millimetre [mm]
Timeout
Milliseconds [ms]
Record name
Text
51(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
52(86)
Prepare for sync
Option
This shall be enabled when using syncronisation between two cylinders. Adapts the faster cylinder to the slower one.

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. Code 385 Message AUTOTUNER_STORED_IN_NVRAM Description The component has stored its parameters in NVRAM.
8.2 8.2.1
AnyBus Introduction
Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the Anybus the crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an Anybus card can be used as a Master bus for an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the Anybus is that the interface card translates a number of different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project. The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the Master and the SCS2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.
8.2.1.1 Mapping of I/O

OUT Byte 0-63 Project specific outputs IN Byte 0-63 Project specific inputs
Output Segment In the output segment it is possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The diagnostics are handled by the Anybus System component. The code sent will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display, hence there will be three levels of this code INFO, WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for
52(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
53(86)
indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted. The start position of the diagnostic areas is configurable.
8.2.1.2 Spreader diagnostic area.

The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component. Byte 0 => Type of error (info, warning, error) Byte 1 => Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates) Byte 2-3 (WORD) => Diagnostic code Byte 4-5 (WORD) => Sub Code for diagnostics Byte 6-7 (WORD) => Sequential counter value (message number)
8.2.1.3 System diagnostic area.

This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip ABs R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its equipment further, however the customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following way. The byte numbers below should be added to the offset defined in the Anybus System component. Byte 0 => Node ID Byte 1-2 (WORD) => Row Number (of source code) Byte 3-8 (3 x WORD) => Filename (1:st 6 char.) Byte 9-10 (WORD) => Sequential counter The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader. These assignments are documented in the electrical documentation of the project. Input Segment The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
8.2.2
Anybus System
The Anybus system component has the ability to handle downloading of new spreader program (*.spr). Note: To be able to download a spreader program via Anybus a specific PC software is needed.
8.2.2.1 Input ports

Input Download start Type Digital Description If set true, component expects download data on Anybus.
8.2.2.2 Parameters
Parameter Node Log active Unit Node id Option Description The node identity of the node where the Anybus interface is located. Indicates if the log should be exported to the Anybus interface or not.
53(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
54(86)
Log address
0-63
The Anybus output address in the access area where the log should be exported. Indicates if the assert log should be exported to the Anybus interface or not. The Anybus output address in the access area where the assert log should be exported.
Assert active
Option
Assert address
0-63
8.2.3
Output Word
8.2.3.1 Input ports

Input IN Type Analogue Description Input from analogue input port.
8.2.3.2 Parameters
Parameter Note Word number Unit Text Number Description Free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port. Word in Anybus interface to which the value from IN is to be transferred to. The node identity of the node where the Anybus interface is located.
Node
Node id
8.2.4
Output Byte
8.2.4.1 Input ports

Input IN Type Analogue Description Input from analogue input port.
8.2.4.2 Parameters
Parameter Note Unit Text Description Free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port.
54(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
55(86)
Byte number
Number
Byte in Anybus interface to which the value from IN is to be transferred to. The node identity of the node where the Anybus interface is located.
Node
Node id
8.2.5
Output Bit
8.2.5.1 Input ports

Input IN Type Digital Description Input from digital input port.
8.2.5.2 Parameters
Parameter Note Byte number Bit number Node Unit Text Number Number Node id Description Free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port. Start byte in Anybus interface. Bit number of the chosen byte in Anybus interface. The node identity of the node where the Anybus interface is located.
8.2.6
Input Word

Output OUT Type Analogue Description The word number from the Anybus interface that is to be transferred to the OUT value.
8.2.6.2 Parameters
Parameter Note Word number Unit Text Analogue Description Free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port. The word within the Anybus interface from which
55(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
56(86)
Node
Node id
The node identity of the node where the Anybus interface is located.
8.2.7
Input Byte

Output OUT Type Analogue Description The byte number from the Anybus interface that is to be transferred to the OUT value.
8.2.7.2 Parameters
Parameter Note Byte number Node Unit Text Number Node id Description Free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port. Start byte in Anybus interface. The node identity of the node where the Anybus interface is located.
8.2.8
Input Bit

Output OUT Type Digital Description Digital value from Anybus interface.
8.2.8.2 Parameters
Parameter Note Byte number Bit number Node Unit Text Number Number Node id Description Free text field. Use this field for notes about the Anybus port. Start byte in Anybus interface. Bit number in Anybus interface. The node identity of the node where the Anybus interface is located.
56(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
57(86)
8.3 8.3.1
Guards Spreader stop
The Spreader stop component stops all output functions from Spreader specific components, controllers, and causes them to go back to a boot state upon the release of the Spreader stop. It also generates a message to the log
8.3.1.1 Input ports

Input IN Type Digital Description Command to stop spreader. true = spreader stops false = spreader stop resumed
8.3.1.2 Parameters
Parameter Enable logging Unit Option Description If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur.

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following message stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging Code 97 Message SPREADER_STOP Description Spreader stop has been activated/deactivated. 0 = deactivated, 1 = activated.
8.3.2
TTDS -Twin Twenty Detection System
The TTDS component implements the functionality of the twin twenty detection system, which is used to prevent lifting two twenty foot containers in a forty foot single lift position. The function should only be active to prevent wrongful lifting and not to actively control any other device. The logic is based on the Bromma seven sensor system and the output can be used to interlock the Twistlocks, but should also always when possible be sent to the crane. Since the logic is designed to be fail-safe, any type of fault of sensor or a misreading by the sensor will trigger the output and therefore an override has been implemented. For details regarding the TTDS system functionality see separate manual. The TTDS component generates log messages every time an override has been used.
8.3.2.1 Input ports

Input Override Type Digital Description Overrides TTDS result. true = output (Twin) is always false false = normal output
57(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
58(86)
Sensor 1 ... Sensor 7
Digital
Input from TTDS sensors.

Output OUT Type Digital Description true = two containers detected false = one or none detected

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 290 291 Message TTDS_OVERRIDE_ACTIVATED TTDS_OVERRIDE_DEACTIVATED Description Override request received. Override request ended.
8.3.3
Analogue guard
The Analogue guard is intended for use of monitoring a specific analogue value. A window around the min/max values can be defined. This component generates a log message classified as a warning, which is user defined. There are 10 (0-9) unique message tags to choose from and they generate the messages 146 155 within the log system. Apart from sending a message to the log, an output can trigger any other event if the input value exceeds the ranges specified in the parameters of the component.
8.3.3.1 Input ports

Input IN Type Analogue Description Analogue value from other component or analogue input port.

Output OUT Type Digital Description Signal indicating that Analogue input has gone outside lower or upper limit longer than the specified time Delay.
8.3.3.3 Parameters
58(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
59(86)
Note
Text
Descriptive string indicating the function of the component. (Only registered within ABE as memory note) Time until warning message is prompted if Analogue input has gone out of boundaries. Lower limit of allowable input range. Upper limit of allowable input range. Warning code that will identify the component. (Same code can be used for different components.) If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur.
Delay
Milliseconds [ms] Number Number Option
Lower limit Upper limit Warning code
Enable logging
Option

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 146 155 Message USERDEFINED_0 ... USERDEFINED_9 Description User chooses what message to use. The messages generated in the log are identified as 146-155 when read out of the log.
8.3.4
Digital guard
The Digital guard triggers a user-defined message to be stored in the log.
8.3.4.1 Input ports

Input IN Type Digital Description Digital value from other component or digital input port.
8.3.4.2 Parameters
Parameter Note Unit Text Description Descriptive string indicating the function of the component. (Only registered within ABE as memory note) Normally open or normally closed behaviour on input.
Input NO/NC
Option
59(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
60(86)
Delay
Milliseconds [ms]
Time until warning message is prompted if digital value is true or false (depending on input NO / NC setting). Warning code that will identify the component. (Same code can be used for different components.) If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur.
Warning code
Option
Enable logging
Option

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 146 155 Message USERDEFINED_0 ... USERDEFINED_9 Description User chooses what message to use. The messages generated in the log are identified as 146-155 when read out of the log.
8.4 8.4.1
Gates AND
This section contains the simple Boolean instruction set.
This function block performs the function of the logical AND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. Basic function IN 0 IN n OUT 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
8.4.1.1 Input ports

Input IN0 ... IN n Type Digital Description Digital value from other component or digital input port.

Output OUT Type Digital Description Digital output result from AND operation.
60(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
61(86)
8.4.1.3 Parameters
Parameter Number of inputs Unit Number Description Number of inputs on component.
8.4.2
NAND
This function block performs the function of the logical NAND with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. Basic function IN 0 IN n 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 OUT 1 1 1 0
8.4.2.1 Input ports

Input IN 0 ... IN n Type Digital Description Digital values from other component or digital input port.

Output OUT Type Digital Description Digital output result from NAND operation.
8.4.2.3 Parameters
8.4.3
NOR
This function block performs the function of the logical NOR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. Basic function IN 0 IN n 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 OUT 1 0 0 0
61(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
62(86)
8.4.3.1 Input ports


Output OUT Type Digital Description Digital output result from NOR operation.
8.4.3.3 Parameters
8.4.4
OR
This function block performs the function of the logical OR with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. Basic function IN 0 IN n 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 OUT 0 1 1 1
8.4.4.1 Input ports


Output OUT Type Digital Description Digital output result from OR operation.
62(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
63(86)
8.4.4.3 Parameters
8.4.5
NOT
This function block performs the function of the logical NOT with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. Basic function IN OUT 0 1 1 0
8.4.5.1 Input ports


Output OUT Type Digital Description Digital output result from NOT operation.
8.4.6
XOR
This function block performs the function of the logical XOR (exclusive or) with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. Basic function IN 0 IN n 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 OUT 0 1 1 0
8.4.6.1 Input ports

Input IN 0 IN 1 Type Digital Digital Description Digital value from other component or digital input port. Digital value from other component or digital input port.
63(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
64(86)

Output OUT Type Digital Description Digital output result from XOR operation.
8.4.7
SR Latch
This function block performs the function of the logical SR latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input. If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will reset (output goes low).
8.4.7.1 Input ports

Input Set Reset Type Digital Digital Description Digital value from other component or digital input port. Digital value from other component or digital input port.

Output OUT Type Digital Description Digital output result from SR latch.
8.4.8
RS Latch
This function block performs the function of the logical RS latch with the number of inputs specified in the parameter settings. The output will go high at a high signal on the Set input and will go low again at a high signal on the Reset input. If both inputs are on simultaneously this latch will set (output goes high).
8.4.8.1 Input ports

Input Set Reset Type Digital Digital Description Digital value from other component or digital input port. Digital value from other component or digital input port.

Output Result Type Digital Description Digital output result from RS latch.
64(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
65(86)
8.4.9
Logical gate
The Logical gate component is used if one wishes to perform logical operations (bit wise) on two analogue values. Each analogue input is represented as a 32 bit value.
8.4.9.1 Input ports

Input Enable Type Digital Description Enables component. If set to false component will set Result to zero. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. enabled all time). Input value 1. Input value 2.
IN 1 IN 2
Analogue Analogue

Output Result Type Analogue Description Result of logical operation.
8.4.9.3 Parameters
Parameter Operation mode Unit Option Description Determents type of logical operation preformed on IN 1 and IN 2. The operations available are AND, OR and XOR.
8.5 8.5.1
Digital OD Timer On Delay Timer
The On Delay Timer is used to delay a signal from input to output.
8.5.1.1 Input ports

Input IN Type Digital Description Digital value from other component or digital input port. Starts the timer on positive flank.

65(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
66(86)
OUT
Digital
Digital output that goes high if the input is high and the specified time has elapsed.
8.5.1.3 Parameters
Parameter Delay Unit Milliseconds [ms] Description Time that the in put signal is to be delayed before the output goes high
8.5.2
UpDn Counter Up Down Counter
The Up Down Counter increments each time the UP input transits from low to high and decrements each time the DOWN input transits from low to high. The RESET input takes the counter value to zero. The range of the counter is from 0 to 231-1 (=2147483647).
8.5.2.1 Input ports

Input Up Down Reset Type Digital Digital Digital Description Increments the counter value Decrements the counter value Sets the counter value to zero

Output OUT Type Digital Description OUT = 1 (high) when the counter value is equal to or above the specified value in the parameter listing The current value of the counter
Counter value
Analogue
8.5.2.3 Parameters
Parameter Trigger count Unit Digital Description The counter value when the digital output goes high. The output is on when the counter value is equal to or above this value.
8.5.3
OSC - Oscillator
The oscillator purely switches the output on and off with specified duty cycle adjusted in the parameters.
8.5.3.1 Input ports
66(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
67(86)
Input Enable
Type Digital
Description Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect).

Output OUT Type Digital Description Clock pulse output.
8.5.3.3 Parameters
Parameter Cycle time Unit Milliseconds [ms] Description Cycle time for Clock output.
8.5.4
Split
The split component is used to generate two or more signals available for connection from one signal line. I.e. it can in many cases replace the use of intermediate variables, since the signal value of the input and the outputs are always the same.
8.5.4.1 Input ports


Output OUT 0 OUT n Type Digital Description Outputs have same status as the IN input port
8.5.4.3 Parameters
Parameter Number of outputs Unit Number Description Number of outputs on component.
8.5.5
Pulse
The Pulse component is used to generate a pulse. The duration of the pulse is set by a parameter. The pulse can be trigged on either positive or negative flank. The pulse is restarted if an new active flank is detected during the pulse. An output indicating time left until pulse is unlit is also available.
67(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
68(86)
8.5.5.1 Input ports

Input Enable Type Digital Description Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). Trigger for starting pulse.
Input
Digital

Output Time remaining Output Type Analogue Digital Description Time remaining (ms) until pulse is unlit. Pulse output.
8.5.5.3 Parameters
Parameter Active flank Length of pulse Unit Option Milliseconds [ms] Description Determines active flank of trigger, POS or NEG. Duration of pulse.
8.6 8.6.1
Miscellaneous Constant
The Constant component is used to store a Boolean or Analogue value as a constant variable to use within the logic. Note that any other value than zero is considered as a logical one when using this component for digital purposes.

Output Digital Type Digital Description Constant value > 0 : Digital output = true Constant value = 0 : Digital output = false Analogue Analogue Analogue output = Constant value
8.6.1.2 Parameters
68(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
69(86)
Value
Number
Value to put on output ports.
8.6.2
Dead end
The Dead End component is used when one has to make a system where one or more of the mandatory outputs cannot be used for some reason. By connecting the Mandatory output from another component to the Dead end component that signal is terminated. This can be useful when controller components are to be used purely for log purposes and one doesnt want the logic to control the outputs.

Output Digital IN Analogue IN Type Digital Analogue Description Terminates a digital connection. Terminates an analogue connection.
8.6.3
Spreader properties
8.6.3.1 Input ports

Input Twin boxes are down Landed Locked Unlocked Pump 1 on Type Digital Digital Digital Digital Digital Description Input port telling that twin boxes are down. Input port telling that spreader has landed. Input port telling that all Twist locks are locked. Input port telling that all Twist locks is unlocked. Used for activating the clock for drive time 1. When this input is active the clock for drive time 1 counts. Used for activating the clock for drive time 2. When this input is active the clock for drive time 2 counts. Used for activating the clock for drive time 3. When this input is active the clock for drive time 3 counts.
Pump 2 on
Digital
Pump 3 on
Digital

69(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
70(86)
Number of lock operations on twin
Analogue
Number of lock operations performed on twin Twist locks. Saved in external EEPROM. Number of lock operations performed on single Twist locks. Saved in external EEPROM. Number of containers handled. When twin is down this number is incremented by two. Saved in external EEPROM. Spreader unique number. User defined. Read from external EEPROM. Spreader unique number. User defined. Read from parameter Drawing number. Clock pulse that toggles from false to true when container is handled. When a new sequence is ended output goes back to false. Accumulated drive time since delivery. The time is only measured when pump 1 is active. The time is divided into two words (2x16bits) where this output is the high word. Saved in external EEPROM. Accumulated drive time since delivery. The time is only measured when pump 1 is active. The time is divided into two words (2x16bits) where this output is the low word. Saved in external EEPROM. Accumulated drive time since delivery. The time is only measured when pump 2 is active. The time is divided into two words (2x16bits) where this output is the high word. Saved in external EEPROM. Accumulated drive time since delivery. The time is only measured when pump 2 is active. The time is divided into two words (2x16bits) where this output is the low word. Saved in external EEPROM.
Number of lock operations on single
Analogue
Number of containers
Analogue
Spreader serial number
Analogue
Drawing number
Analogue
Counter clock pulse
Digital
Drive time 1 HI Word
Analogue
Drive time 1 LO Word
Analogue
Analogue
Analogue
70(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
71(86)
Analogue
Accumulated drive time since delivery. The time is only measured when pump 3 is active. The time is divided into two words (2x16bits) where this output is the high word. Saved in external EEPROM. Accumulated drive time since delivery. The time is only measured when pump 3 is active. The time is divided into two words (2x16bits) where this output is the low word. Saved in external EEPROM.
Analogue
8.6.3.3 Parameters
Parameter Enable logging Unit Option Description If set to true (checked) the logging of messages will be turned on otherwise no logging will occur. User defined number. Number is used to present the drawing number of the spreader.
Drawing number
Number

The following messages are generated by this component. This component generates the following messages stored in the fault and event log onboard the SCS2. The message log can be turned on/off in the parameter settings view via the check box Enable logging. Code 318 319 320 321 322 323 Message SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_E EPROM SPREADER_PROPERTIES_READ_D S SPREADER_PROPERTIES_DIFF SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP ROM_OK SPREADER_PROPERTIES_SET_EEP ROM_FAIL SPREADER_PROPERTIES_NEW_N ODE_TO_EEPROM Description Last saved properties are read from EEPROM. System has read properties from NVRAM. Spreader properties read from EEPROM and NVRAM differ. System succeeded to write properties to EEPROM. System failed to write properties to EEPROM. System detected that a new node is connected since last shut down.
8.6.4
Memory
The Memory component is used when one wishes to write or read an analogue value from or to the NVRAM.
8.6.4.1 Input ports

Input Type Description
71(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
72(86)
Enable
Digital
Enables component. If set to false component will set the Analogue OUT to zero. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). If set true, component reads Analogue IN and writes to NVRAM. If set true, component reads from NVRAM and writes to Analogue OUT. Analoge value that is to be stored.
Write Read
Digital Digital
Analogue IN
Analogue

Output Analogue OUT Type Analogue Description Value stored in NVRAM.
8.6.5
Digital buffer
The Digital buffer component buffers digital values for a selected amount of execution cycles.
8.6.5.1 Input ports

Input Enable Type Digital Description Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). Digital value that is to be buffered.
Digital IN
Digital

Output OUT 0 .. OUT n Type Digital Description Buffered values. The input value is shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The same value is shown on OUT 1 the next cycle and so on.
8.6.5.3 Parameters
Parameter Number of samples to hold Unit Number Description Number of cycles to remember.
8.6.6
Analogue buffer
The Analogue buffer component buffers analogue values for a selected amount of execution cycles.
72(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
73(86)
8.6.6.1 Input ports

Input Enable Type Digital Description Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to zero. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). Analogue value that is to be buffered.
Analogue IN
Analogue

Output OUT 0 .. OUT n Type Analogue Description Buffered values. The input value is shown on OUT 0 the next cycle. The same value is shown on OUT 1 the next cycle and so on.
8.6.6.3 Parameters
Parameter Number of samples to hold Unit Number Description Number of cycles to remember.
73(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
74(86)
8.7 8.7.1
Analogue RS485 port
The Analogue components are used to work with analogue values.
This component is used to access the RS485 interface. Depending on what protocol is chosen from the parameter view the component can be used for a variety of purposes.

Output OUT Type Analogue Description Analogue value of output from sensor
8.7.1.2 Parameters
Parameter Protocol Unit Option Description Type of protocol used (i.e. vendor specific protocol). Only SLIN is implemented SSI is implemeted. Node the RS485 sensor is connected to. Applys only if SSI protocol is selected Applys only if SSI protocol is selected. Specifies the resolution of the component.
Node Code Type Input resolution
Option Option Number
8.7.2
IN0 > IN1
8.7.2.1 Input ports

Input IN 0 IN 1 Type Analogue Analogue Description Input Input

Output OUT Type Digital Description IN 0 > IN 1 gives OUT = 1 IN 0 <= IN 1 gives OUT = 0
74(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
75(86)
8.7.3
IN0 * IN1
8.7.3.1 Input ports


Output OUT Type Analogue Description OUT = IN 0 * IN 1
8.7.4
IN0 / IN1
Note. Always avoid division by zero.
8.7.4.1 Input ports

Input IN 0 IN 1 Type Analogue Analogue Description Nominator input Denominator input

Output OUT Type Analogue Description OUT = IN 0 / IN 1
8.7.5
IN0 IN1
8.7.5.1 Input ports


Output OUT Type Analogue Description OUT = IN 0 IN 1
75(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
76(86)
8.7.6
IN0 + IN1
8.7.6.1 Input ports

Input IN 0 ... IN n Type Analogue Description Inputs to be added together

Output OUT Type Analogue Description OUT = IN 0 + IN 1+, ,+ IN n
8.7.6.3 Parameters
Parameter Input counter Unit Number Description Number of input ports on component.
8.7.7
Scale
The Scale components scales a analogue value according to the formula, OUT = ((scaledMax scaledMin)/(INMax-INMin))*(IN - INMin) + scaledMin, which performs a linear scaling with an offset according to OUT = k*IN + m.
8.7.7.1 Input ports

Input IN Type Analogue Description Analogue value from other component or analogue input port.

Output OUT Type Analogue Description Scaled analogue value with constraints from parameter listing.
8.7.7.3 Parameters
Parameter Max value after scale Min value after scale Unit Number Number Description Largest scaled value. Smallest scaled value.
76(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
77(86)
Max value of input Min value of input
Number Number
The maximum value of input. The minimum value of input.
8.7.8
AnalogueLatch
The Analogue latch is a component that stores a value internally when triggered by a digital input. The value stored in an internal variable can be read at the output of the component. As long as the digital trigger input is active the input value is directly transferred to the output value and as soon as the digital input goes low the output value remains constant at the current value until a new digital command is given.
8.7.8.1 Input ports

Input Enable Type Digital Description Enables component. If set to false component will set all outputs to false. Default value if not connected is true (i.e. no effect). Input that trigger the component to read the value IN Value. Input value that is read and stored in the component
IN IN Value
Digital Analogue

Output OUT Type Analogue Description The stored value of the component
8.7.9
Filter
The Filter component is used to filter analogue signals from noise.
8.7.9.1 Input ports

Input Analogue IN Type Analogue Description Unfiltered signal.

Output Analogue OUT Type Analogue Description Filtered signal.
77(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
78(86)
8.7.9.3 Parameters
Parameter Filter type Filter weight Unit Option Number [%] Description Determines type of filter. Only MOVING AVR is implemented. Determents how many percents of previous filtered signal that is to be used.
8.7.10 AuxAnalogue
This component implements two more analogue inputs.

Output Port 5 Port 4 Type Analogue Analogue Description Analogue value Analogue value
8.7.10.2 Parameters
Parameter Node Unit Option Description Specifies the node.
78(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
79(86)
8.7.11 Tutorial
This tutorial will guide you through the process of designing a Spreader program using ABE. Steps covered in this tutorial. Creating a new project System view Pin configuration Component view Load view Step 1: Creating a new project Start ABE from your Start menu if it isnt already started. If you just started ABE you already have a project created for you, If not create a new one by clicking the button showed in the picture below.
Figure 0:1 Create project Step 2: System view Activate the node B2 by checking corresponding Active checkbox. Node B1 is always present in the system.
Figure 0:2 Activating nodes Fill in the Value fields in the parameter listing. Note that some of the fields are not editable.
Figure 0:3 Setting system parameters
79(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
80(86)
Step 3: Pin configuration All present nodes are visible as tabs in this view. Make sure tab B1 is activated in the view. Give Port id# 1 and 2 the following names. Comment field is optional.
Figure 0:4 Setting item identifiers on node B1 Make sure tab B2 is activated in the view and do the same for Port id# 1 to 4. Note: The red colour of the fields indicates that the ports are not yet connected.
Figure 0:5 Setting item identifiers on node B2 Step 4: Component view Select the FAC component from the available component pallet.
Figure 0:6 Choosing component If available components pallet is not visible. Activate it by clicking at the Components button shown in picture below.
80(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
81(86)
Figure 0:7 Bringing up Available components Place the component on Page 1 in the view.
Figure 0:8 Default look of FAC component Note: Connections with red colour indicate that they are not yet connected. Connections with white colour indicate that they are optional to connect. Double click on the component to open Properties for the FAC component. Change the property Number of Flippers to 2.
Figure 0:9 Changing properties for FAC component
81(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
82(86)
The new appearance for the component should look like this:
Figure 0:10 Look of FAC component after changing number of flippers
By placing the pointer over the component or one of its connections a hint (tool tip) will appear. The hint tells you about the properties for the component or its connection.
Figure 0:11 Look of component hint Click with your right mouse button over a connection on the component. A pop up menu will appear. Move the cursor as shown in the picture below and click on your left mouse button over Flipper_Down.
Figure 0:12 Making component connections
82(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
83(86)
Your component should now look like this:
Figure 0:13 Appearance of a connection Continue with the remaining connections until you have all connections connected. If you want to disconnect a connection you click over the connection with your right mouse button and choose disconnect when it appears. When your system is complete there should not be any red coloured connections in the Component view or Item identifiers in the Pin configuration view. Your Component view should look like Figure 12 when all your connections are made.
Figure 0:14 Appearance of a connection Now you are ready to generate downloadable Spreader program file. Select Compile from the File menu. If the following message box appears your system is not configured properly. Look for red coloured connections or item identifiers. If port is configured to be used but isnt you must delete it. Save the output file (when compiling the spreader program) with the name tutorial.spr.
Figure 0:15 The Spreader program contains errors When you have generated your downloadable program file it can be found at the location where it was saved. You must not edit this file.
83(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
84(86)
Step 5: Load view Downloading spreader programs 1. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2. In the picture below COM1 is selected.
Figure 0:16 Select Connection 2. 3. 4. Press the Download button. Point out the spreader program that you want to download. (Spreader programs have extension *.spr). Observe the status bars. If connected node is the master node no distribution between nodes will appear. If not the master node is the point of connection the spreader program will first be downloaded to the local node (connected node) and than distributed to the master node.
Uploading spreader programs 1. Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.
In the picture below COM1 is selected.
Figure 0:17 Select Connection 2. Press the Upload button. The two following dialogues will appear in sequence. Answer Yes to the first dialog if you are working on anything that you want to save else No.
Figure 0:18 Save current spreader program Answer Yes to the second dialog to open the uploaded spreader program in the editor. (If you press No, you have to manually open the uploaded spreader program.)
Figure 0:19 Open spreader program in ABE 3. Observe the status bar ABE --> Connected node. When 100% is reached the uploaded spreader program will appear in the editor.
84(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
85(86)
Step 6: Online monitoring Online monitoring is performed under Component view. 1. 2. Make sure you have the same spreader program in ABE and SCS2. If you are not sure about this, you can always download your current spreader program or upload the spreader program from the SCS2 (see Step 5). Select COM1 or COM2 under selection depending on what serial port is connected to the SCS2.
In the picture below COM1 is selected.
Figure 0:20 Select Connection 3. Make sure Auto is not checked.
Figure 0:21 Deselect Auto option If Auto is checked, automatic update will be performed at an interval specified by Update interval. 4. Start online monitoring
Figure 0:22 Start online monitoring The online monitoring starts by telling the SCS2 to add all visible components and their connections. This takes more or less time depending on the number of present components and connections in visible Page(s). A progress bar appears above the buttons, when adding the components, to show you current status. Once the online monitoring is started, the design window is locked for editing. If you want to monitor another part of your design (not visible at the moment); you have to stop the online monitoring and then scroll to that part and start the monitoring again. 5. Update online values by pressing the Update button.
Figure 0:23 Updated online values
85(86)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
ABE_UserManual_1_03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:51
86(86)
6.
Stop online monitoring by pressing button as shown below.
Figure 0:24 Stop online monitoring
86(86)
2000
User Manual
BMS - Light
Version 1.03
Revision
PA1 PA2 PA3 PA4 PA5 A B
Issued by
Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB Gunnar Ohlsson, CC Systems AB Hans Svanfeldt, CC Systems AB Ken Lindfors, CC Systems AB Hans Svamfeldt, CC Systems AB
Date
2000-08-22 2000-10-13 2000-10-23 2001-01-10 2001-10-29 2002-06-12 2003-06-11
Measures
First draft. Added modem functions. Changes in GUI. Cancel buttons added. Height changed on cells in string grids. Changes in GUI. Cancel button moved. Some Anybus functions added. New pages added. CAN tester, Boot loader. Minor changes after release of System 1.04. Minor changes after release of System 1.05.
Printed: 03-10-16 10.56
Document:
Project No Page:
BMS_Light_UserManual_1.03
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
2(22)
Table of contents
1 2 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 INSTALLING BMS LIGHT ................................................................................................................................... 3 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 3.1 3.2 4 5 6 7 HW REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................................. 3 INSTALLATION ...................................................................................................................................................... 3 DISCLAIMER .......................................................................................................................................................... 3 MENU (TOP TOOLBAR) OPTIONS: ......................................................................................................................... 4 STATUS BARS IN MAIN WINDOW............................................................................................................................ 5
USER INTERFACE.................................................................................................................................................... 4
DOWNLOAD VIEW................................................................................................................................................... 6 GET LOG VIEW......................................................................................................................................................... 7 5.1 FILTERING CONSTRAINTS ..................................................................................................................................... 8 I/O STATUS VIEW..................................................................................................................................................... 9 MISC. VIEW ............................................................................................................................................................. 10
ANYBUS VIEW ................................................................................................................................................................ 11 8 9 10 10.1 10.2 10.3 10.4 SPREADER INFO VIEW......................................................................................................................................... 14 UPLOAD VIEW ........................................................................................................................................................ 17 ADVANCED .......................................................................................................................................................... 18 CAN TESTER ...................................................................................................................................................... 18 BOOT LOADER .................................................................................................................................................... 20 ASSERTS .............................................................................................................................................................. 21 POM LOADER..................................................................................................................................................... 22
2(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
3(22)
1 Introduction
The BMS is a software tool used for monitoring and handling the Bromma system SCS2. This manual assumes the user has good knowledge of the SCS2 system as well as Windows environments.
2 Installing BMS Light

2.1

HW requirements
An Intel compatible PC running Windows 95 / 98 / NT 4.0 / 2000. At least one serial communication port available (COM1 or COM2). At least 1Mb of free disk space.
2.2

Installation
Close any other applications running under Windows. Insert the first disc into your disc station (if installing from disc) Run the file BMSSetup.exe from the BMS folder on your provided disk. Follow the instructions on the screen.
2.3
Disclaimer
Copyright Bromma Conquip AB. All rights reserved. Products and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or trade names of their respective owners. Bromma Conquip AB operates on a policy of continuous improvement. Therefore we reserve the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this manual without prior notice. Bromma Conquip AB is not responsible for any loss of data, income or any consequential damage howsoever caused.
3(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
4(22)
3 User interface
3.1 Menu (top toolbar) options:
File: Exit --- Terminates the application. View: Activates selected tab [Download, Get log, I/O status, Misc., Anybus, Spreader info, Upload] Tools: Connect serial cable: activates selected communication port [COM1, COM2]. Connect modem: activates modem connected to selected communication port [COM1, COM2]. The dialog below is used for making the connection. Once a connection has been made the dialog window disappears. The BMS commands are working via the modem if the modem has connected successfully.
Modem connection Connect to node: connects BMS to selected node [B1, B2,..., B8, A1, A2, A3, A4]. This connection is made over RS232 link through the CAN bus. Normally select Local node. Advanced options: Intended for Bromma R&D personnel. Help: About: shows the version of the BMS.
4(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
5(22)
3.2
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Status bars in main window

Status of last performed operation. Intended for Bromma personnel. Status of current operation. Serial cable connection (COM1 or COM2). Destination node (normally Local node) of all operations. Status of serial cable connection.
2 3 1 4 5
Main window
5(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
6(22)
4 Download view
This tab is used to download the entire system program to the system. Note. It takes a considerable amount of time to update the system program and therefore make sure that the system can be down for this amount of time. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Transfer status from BMS to the connected node [4]. PC downloading to the connected node. Transfer status from connected node [4] to node [5]. Distribution of the program via the bus lines to the other nodes on the bus. Total transfer status. Status of complete system to be downloaded. Connected node (to PC). Receiving node when distributing between nodes. Select file to download. Press here to select the file to be downloaded. When file is selected download process starts. Cancels current transfer to connected node. The operation just cancels the feedback of transfer status if distribution between nodes has started (i.e. the operation will not effect the transfer in this case).
3 6 4
Download view
6(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
7(22)
5 Get log view

This used to retrieve the onboard error and event log. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Gets next set of logged messages (max 128 messages each time its pressed) Get all messages in log. If checked, auto mode is on. Auto mode triggers the Next button [1] at an interval of X seconds defined by [4]. Interval for reading via auto mode in seconds. Enable filtering. The filtered table is shown if checked. Filtering can be used to only view certain parts of the log. Opens the Filtering constraint dialog. Select the type of filtering here. Clears the log table on the PC. The log in the SCS2 remains unaffected. Saves the entire log table in a comma separated text file. Can be opened in for instance in Wordpad, Excel etc. Cancels current operation. Load button. Loads and displays a saved log file.
6 2 5
9 7
10
Get log view
7(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
8(22)
5.1
Filtering constraints
Select the type of filtering for the log view in this view. Checked Categories, Nodes, Sub codes and Codes will appear in the filtered table. Ex: APS_TEACH_COMMAND (of category Info) is checked but not Info under Category. The message will therefor not appear in the filtered table. 1. 2. 3. Message categories Nodes that have reported messages. Message codes for entire table
Filtering constraints
8(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
9(22)
6 I/O status view

This view is used to read (and force) the I/O status of the SCS2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Select node to view. Enables override for I/O-port if checked. To force a value first check this box, then change the value and finally press Write [4] Current value/current overridden value of I/O. Write current override values to system. Only the viewed node is written to. A write for each node is required if values are to be forced on more than one node. Read values from SCS2. All nodes are read at once (Selected node [1] is shown). Enable automatic update of values. Triggers read operation [5] with interval determined by the value of: [6]. Update interval for Auto read [6]. Cancels current operation.
Note. To restore a port to its default value if overridden: Uncheck the corresponding I/O [2] and press Write [4]. (If a read operation is followed instead the unchecked port will be checked by the SCS2.) All forced values are reset if the system is re-started.
1 2
I/O status view
9(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
10(22)
7 Misc. view
This view is used to get and set general information of the SCS2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Updates the Date and Time fields from the PC when pressed. Set the time and date on SCS2 according to Date and Time fields. Get current date and time from the SCS2. Displayed in Date and Time fields. Get address key information from the node [5]. Destination of question. Serial cable connection. Cancels current operation. Get version information. Software version and protocol version for Boot and System program. The Boot program version is Boot SW version and the System program version is System SW version. Dont care about the COM versions. Reboots the system.
Ex. Serial cable [6] is connected via COM1 to B1 and Destination [5] is set to Local node (or B1, which would be the same). B1 is configured to have E-stop and Redundancy block activated. This will give us the answer: Key: 5 E-Stop: YES Redundancy: YES Module name: B1
8 2 3
7 6 5
10(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
11(22)
Anybus view
The Anybus view shows the status of the I/O transferred over the fieldbus interface of the Anybus card. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Input data to SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field the value of that byte in binary format. Output data from SCS2 via Anybus interface. The index field shows which byte is being viewed and the value field the value of that byte in binary format. Reads all Input data [1] and Output data [2] from Anybus interface. Cancels current operation. Set DeviceNet master in Run mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master. Set DeviceNet master in Idle mode. This operation can only be done when using a DeviceNet master. Select node where to Read [3] data from.
11(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
12(22)
5 1 6
7 4 3
12(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
13(22)
Anybus view
13(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
14(22)
8 Spreader info view

This view is used to administrate the external EEPROM that is mounted on some spreaders. Key = generic name of memory area of EEPROM. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Shows the selected key in the Spreader info field [6]. This field can not be edited. Shows the current value of corresponding Key [1]. Sets the Value [2] for selected Key [1]. Deletes the value for selected Key [1]. The Key [1] can not be deleted, just the value. Updates the entire Spreader info [6] view on the PC. Table of all Keys stored in external EEPROM. Cancels current operation.
14(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
15(22)
1 2 7 4 3 5
15(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
16(22)
Spreader info view
16(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
17(22)
9 Upload view
This view is for Bromma R&D personnel only. It is used to upload memory blocks from the SCS2.
Upload view
17(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
18(22)
10 Advanced
These three sub views are mainly intended for Brommas R&D personnel only.
10.1 CAN Tester

This view holds the functionally of the CAN Tester. To be able to use the CAN Tester the master node has to be keyed as Test. See the SCS2 manual for information. The main functionality is as follows: Every node connected to the CAN network is tested. Each connected node is tested for a pre-selected time at each selected bit rate. When a node is tested the next node is tested at the same bit-rate and during the pre-selected time. The test results are sent back to the CAN Tester and are displayed in the list. 1. Selects the bit-rates that are to be tested. 2. Sets the duration time of each test. 3. Shows the additional information that are used when saving the results. 4. Saves the results as a *.csv or a *.txt file. 5. Starts the test. 6. Sows status of the CAN test. 7. Closes dialog. 8. Result field showing which node that is tested. 9. Result field showing what bit-rate the test used. 10. Result field showing the minimum of retransmissions during test. 11. Result field showing the average of retransmissions during test. 12. Result field showing the maximum of retransmissions during test. 13. Result field showing the total number of messages sent during test. 14. Result field showing the total numbers of retransmissions during test. 15. Result field showing the total numbers of bus offs occurred during test. 16. Result field showing the total numbers of messages not answered during test.
18(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
19(22)
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3 4 5 7
CAN Tester view
19(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
20(22)
10.2 Boot Loader

The Boot Loader view is used to download new boot program to connected node. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Selects the file that is to be downloaded (*.s19). Downloads the selected file. Progress bar showing percentage completed. Cancels the download. Closes dialog.
3 1 2 4 5
Boot Loader view
20(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
21(22)
10.3 Asserts
The asserts view holds the functionality of reading asserts from the SCS2 . It is used for detecting unexpected system events.
Asserts view
21(22)
2000
Document:
Project No Page:
Gunnar Ohlsson
2003-10-16 10:56
22(22)
10.4 POM Loader

The POM Loader view is used for downloading new power monitoring programs to the SCS2 .
POM Loader view
22(22)
2000
Rev 1.01
15/08/03
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
2(49)
1 General.......................................................................................................................................................................3 1.1 Overview....................................................................................................................................................................3 1.2 References..................................................................................................................................................................3 1.3 Dictionary and abbreviations .....................................................................................................................................3 1.4 Document layout........................................................................................................................................................3 2 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................4 2.1 General.......................................................................................................................................................................4 2.2 The Nodes ..................................................................................................................................................................5 3 Software .....................................................................................................................................................................6 3.1 Boot Program .............................................................................................................................................................6 3.2 System program .........................................................................................................................................................6 3.3 Spreader Program.......................................................................................................................................................6 4 Hardware Overview ...................................................................................................................................................7 4.1 I/O LEDs ..................................................................................................................................................................7 4.2 Display .......................................................................................................................................................................7 4.2.1 Event categories .................................................................................................................................................8 4.2.2 Message format ..................................................................................................................................................8 4.2.3 Priority of displayed messages...........................................................................................................................9 4.3 Ground connection.....................................................................................................................................................9 4.4 The X1 and X3 connectors.........................................................................................................................................9 4.4.1 X1 I/O connector..............................................................................................................................................10 4.4.2 X3 I/O connector..............................................................................................................................................11 4.5 The X2 connector.....................................................................................................................................................13 4.5.1 Main Supply.....................................................................................................................................................13 4.5.2 CAN .................................................................................................................................................................13 4.5.3 Address Key.....................................................................................................................................................14 4.5.4 Analogue Inputs ...............................................................................................................................................15 4.5.5 PWM Outputs ..................................................................................................................................................15 4.5.6 External Spreader Memory ..............................................................................................................................15 4.5.7 RS 485 and SSI ................................................................................................................................................16 4.5.8 Additional Jumper Group.................................................................................................................................16 4.6 The X4 Connector....................................................................................................................................................17 4.6.1 AnyBus ............................................................................................................................................................18 4.6.2 Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs........................................................................................................................18 4.7 The X5 Connector....................................................................................................................................................19 4.7.1 RS-232 .............................................................................................................................................................19 4.8 The Redundancy Function .......................................................................................................................................19 4.9 Field bus Connections..............................................................................................................................................20 4.9.1 Mapping of I/O ................................................................................................................................................20 4.10 Spreader Stop ...........................................................................................................................................................21 4.11 Fault Finding table ...................................................................................................................................................22 5 Software tools ..........................................................................................................................................................23 5.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................................................23 5.2 ABE .........................................................................................................................................................................23 5.3 BMS .........................................................................................................................................................................23 6 Miscellaneous ..........................................................................................................................................................24 6.1 Data sheet.................................................................................................................................................................24 6.2 Dimensions ..............................................................................................................................................................25 7 Appendix A (Error messages)..................................................................................................................................26
File: SCS_2_manual_HW.doc
2 Printed:2003-08-15
2003 Bromma Conquip AB
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
3(49)
1 General
1.1 Overview
This document serves as a user manual and shall be used by the surveillance and maintenance operators of the Bromma SCS2. Software as well as hardware routines and descriptions are covered in this document.
1.2 1.3
ABE
References Dictionary and abbreviations

Application Builder Environment. A tool for building control logic. See separate manual for details. Bromma Monitoring System. A tool for monitoring the SCS2. See separate manual for details. The part of the software in the SCS2 that is executed at power up. This part is responsible for the loading of the program verifying that the system is set up correctly. Controller Area Network. A two wire serial bus used for high speed, high reliability communication. Pulse Width Modulator. The control logic that controls the functionality of the SCS2. Spreader Control System generation 2. The control system described in this user manual. The system will be referred to as SCS2 in this document. The program that serves as a base for the execution and control of the spreader program. Synchronous Serial Interface sensor interface
Location where to find the latest revision of this document: http://www.bromma.com/backyard/
BMS Boot program CAN PWM Spreader Program SCS2 System Program SSI
1.4
Document layout
Chapter 3, System overview, gives a brief description of the SCS2. Chapter 4, Software, describes how the different software parts correlates. Chapter 5, Hardware overview, describes the hardware in the SCS2. Chapter 6, External interfaces, describes all the external interfaces in the SCS2. Chapter 7, Software tools, describes the supporting tools to the SCS2. Appendix A, Error messages, shows all error messages and their meaning.
3 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
4(49)
2 Introduction
The core of the Bromma Smart Spreader is the Spreader Communications System (SCS2). In 1991 when Bromma decided to develop a new and highly advanced communications system a close look at the available bus systems revealed a number of shortcomings, such as temperature range, EMC (Electro Magnetic Compatibility) protection and mechanical roughness. Bromma therefore decided to design a bus system that met the demands made on an electronic system for a tough Spreader application. We decided to develop a modular programmable controller, with a heavy-duty field bus interface that complies with European and international standards for control equipment in this area. The SCS2 solution is a single control product that can be used as I/O, as a PLC, and as distributed control for up to 528 I/O points. SCS2 nodes are simple to install. You can connect up to 11 devices using just a single pair of wires. With its modular and scaleable architecture, intuitive features and unparalleled ease of use, it will help save crane builders and end users time and money. SCS2 includes the following features: A bus system able to handle 528 I/O ports (programmable input or output). Up to four analogue inputs with 12 bit resolution. Four PWM outputs for proportional solenoids. One general purpose RS485 channel OR SSI channel. Communication with the help of a standard spreader cable no screening, no twisted pair. A system that withstands the repeated shocks and vibrations suffered by spreaders. A system able to operate in tropical heat and arctic cold. Choice of different field bus interfaces (ProfiBus, Interbus-S, Device Net.) Optional duty cycle input
2.1
General
As a universal I/O, SCS2 gives you the freedom to connect to a wide variety of host controllers, including PLC's, DCS and PC-based control systems by way of DeviceNet, Profibus-DP. SCS2 can be networked as a slave to Profibus-DP or you can choose a DeviceNet master module for easy third-party integration. Designed by Bromma engineers for reliable performance in the particularly challenging environment of container handling the system corporate four basic elements: Crane Node1 A device directly interfacing with the cranes control systems, computer and monitoring screens, providing an optional serial bus interface for programming or diagnostic communications, as well as an interface to the spreader node. A two-wire conventional cable CAN communications between the crane control system and the spreader. A device that interfaces directly with the spreaders sensors, supports discrete signals, and acts as the Master node. Conventional sensors, switches, and actuators on the spreader.
Crane-Spreader Communications Link Spreader Node Sensors and Switches
For details regarding separate dedicated crane fieldbus gateway, see separate manual 4 Printed:2003-08-15 2003 Bromma Conquip AB
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
5(49)
The system is divided into several hardware units called nodes. The nodes are located on the spreader and in the crane. The nodes are connected to each other via a CAN network, see figure 1. The number of nodes required is based on the number of I/O needed. The nodes are all equals, both in software as well as in hardware. This reduces spare parts and enables easy-to-change procedures. The only difference is their identity, id. Depending on their location the nodes have different ids. They are numbered from 0 to 11 where: 0 is the master called B1 1-7 are slave nodes located on the spreader called B2-B8 8-11 are slave nodes located in the crane called A1-A4.
Crane I/O Slave A1 Slave A4

2
CAN network (BCAN)
SCS
I/O
B1 Master
B2 Slave
B8 Slave
Spreader
Figure 1. The figure shows SCS2 connected to the spreader and the crane via I/O. The nodes are also connected internally via a CAN network.
2.2
The Nodes
The SCS2 is built up of several nodes co-operating in the system. Each node has a specific role, either slave or master. There must be only one master node in the system and the rest are slaves. The master node makes all the calculations and decisions. The slave nodes act as remote I/O to the master, but can also have distributed functions such as regulators.
5 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
6(49)
3 Software
The SCS2 software consists of three types of programs; Boot Program, System Program and Spreader Program.
3.1
Boot Program
When the power is applied to the Boot Program starts to run. It will take approximately 5 seconds to boot up the system. During system Program updates it will take longer. The Boot program is responsible for Initialising hardware Checking that all the system Programs match. Checking that the emergency stop and redundancy settings are correct Performing a program downloads.
3.2
System program
After the Boot program is finished, the System program will run, until the system is switched off. The System program is responsible for Executing the Spreader program (only on Master node) Supporting any connected PC via the com-port Monitoring the supply voltage and some internal voltages Handling in the event log Reading and writing I/O
3.3
Spreader Program
The Spreader Program is the program logic that controls the spreader. This program is created in ABE, see chapter 5.2 for a brief description.
6 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
7(49)
4 Hardware Overview
Below is a picture of a SCS2 node. The different parts are explained in the following chapter.
X1- I/O Connector
X2- I/O, bus & supply Connector
X3- I/O Connector
I/O LED 1-48
Bus/AI (X4)
RS232 (X5)
Display & Power LEDS
4.1
I/O LEDs
The I/O LEDs indicate the current status of the corresponding I/O module. The LED is powered from the secondary (5V) of the module.
4.2
Display
The display shows three pages of information where each page has a maximum of 8 characters. Each page is shown for 1 second. The pages show the following: Node ID and System program version. Format: <Node ID><Version>. Elapsed time running since power on. Format: DDD HHMM where DDD is the number of days, HH the number of hours and MM the number of minutes. Message page. The message page shows numeric information only, which has to be translated into comprehensive plain text manually. The meaning of this page is explained in the rest of this section. There are also four red LEDs in the bottom of the display window indicating the supply voltage level. Four different levels are indicated and the ideal voltage is when all LEDs are lit. LED1 11V, FAIL LED2 14V, WARNING 2 LED3 17V, WARNING LED4 21V, OK
7 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
8(49)
It is not recommended to run the system below the OK level though it still seems to work fine. Attached devices may malfunction at lower voltages thus making the system unreliable. The green LED is the power on indicator.
4.2.1 Event categories

There are three categories of information displayed on the event page: information, warning and error. Type ERROR Prefix E Example E102 Note Any error message would shut down the system. All outputs are turned off and the program is halted. Error messages will begin with an E. Warning shows information about the system status that is of high importance. The system keeps on running. Warning messages will begin with a W. Information shows progress in the system. Examples of information that could qualify to be displayed as information: Program load status (how many percent are completed), version verification info, BMS connected, etc. Informational messages will begin with an I.
WARNING
W60
INFORMATION
I59
Information
4.2.2 Message format

The display can show 8 characters. These are used in the following format: LTTTSSSS L = Level type TTT = Message type SSSS = Sub type Example: E102 => Error in initialising the hardware W61 1 => Warning indicating that a twistlock is indicating locked and unlocked. The sub code indicates that it is corner 1. I59 => Information that the system has started. Level type The level type can be one of the following: I = Information, W = Warning, E = Error Message type The message type represents the cause of the message. Examples of message types are System started, Wrong system version and I/O error. All these types are described in appendix A. Sub type 8 Printed:2003-08-15 2003 Bromma Conquip AB
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
9(49)
The sub type is used to specify more detailed information about the message type. The sub types have different meanings for all message types. For example does sub type 14 together with message type 47 mean I/O error on digital port 14 instead of just I/O error. These sub types are described in appendix A.
4.2.3 Priority of displayed messages

Only the latest event is displayed at a time. When the display shows a warning and an event occurs which would show information, the warning has higher priority and is thereby left on the display. The same relationship goes for errorinformation and error-warning. Priority in descending order: Error Warning Information Note that warnings are cleared from the display after at least 10 messages of informational type have passed and the warning message is older than 15 minutes. Error messages are cleared by resetting the system.
4.3
Ground connection
The node chassis must be properly connected to protective earth. A grounding bolt is placed on the right hand side of the node for this purpose.
4.4
The X1 and X3 connectors
There are 48 digital ports on a node. Each port can be configured as either input or output via software. The ports 1 to 44 are joined in groups of 4 resulting in 11 groups. Each group has a Common junction. See the connector part for more detailed information. Ports 45 to 48 are single I/O.
9 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
10(49)
4.4.1 X1 I/O connector
Front view of X1 connector NAME I/O-1 I/O-2 I/O-3 I/O-4 Common/Supply 1 I/O-5 I/O-6 I/O-7 I/O-8 Common/Supply 2 I/O-9 I/O-10 I/O-11 I/O-12 Common/Supply 3 I/O-13 I/O-14 I/O-15 I/O-16 Common/Supply 4 I/O-17 I/O-18 I/O-19 I/O-20 Common/Supply 5 I/O-212 I/O-22 I/O-23 I/O-24
2
Description General purpose input or output / Unlocked_0 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_1 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_2 General purpose input or output / Unlocked_3 Common junction for I/O-1 to I/O-4 General purpose input or output / Locked_0 General purpose input or output / Locked_1 General purpose input or output / Locked_2 General purpose input or output / Locked_3 Common junction for I/O-5 to I/O-8 General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output Common junction for I/O-9 to I/O-12 General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output Common junction for I/O-13 to I/O-16 General purpose input or output / Landed_left_0 General purpose input or output / Landed_left_1 General purpose input or output / Landed_right_0 General purpose input or output / Landed_right_1 Common junction for I/O-17 to I/O-20 General purpose input or output / Lock_left General purpose input or output / Lock_right General purpose input or output / Unlock_left General purpose input or output / Unlock_right
X1 PIN NUMBER 31 41 43 42 44 3 2 11 1 21 26 16 6 7 8 4 5 25 15 35 10 20 30 40 9 46 47 49 48
Redundancy remark.
I/O signals 21 24 are affected by the redundancy safety functionality. See chapter 4.8
10 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
11(49)
NAME Common/Supply 6
Description Common junction for I/O-21 to I/O-24
X1 PIN NUMBER 50
To make linking of common supplies easier the X1 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding switches/valves with common potential. X1 - Pin number 12 13 14 22 23 24 32 33 34 45 Link configuration X1 - Pin number 17 18 19 27 28 29 37 39 38 36 Link configuration
4.4.2 X3 I/O connector
Front view of X3 connector Name I/O-25 I/O-26 I/O-27 I/O-28 Common/Supply 7 I/O-29 I/O-30 I/O-31 I/O-32 Common/Supply 8 I/O-33 I/O-34 I/O-35 I/O-36 Common/Supply 9 Description General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output Common junction for I/O-25 to I/O-28 General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output Common junction for I/O-29 to I/O-32 General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output Common junction for I/O-33 to I/O-36 11 Printed:2003-08-15 X3 pin number 21 31 41 42 11 24 35 44 45 43 5 4 3 2 1 2003 Bromma Conquip AB
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
12(49)
Name I/O-37 I/O-38 I/O-39 I/O-40 Common/Supply 10 I/O-41 I/O-42 I/O-43 I/O-44 Common/Supply 11
Description General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output Common junction for I/O-37 to I/O-40 General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output General purpose input or output Common junction for I/O-41 to I/O-44
X3 pin number 6 16 25 26 15 49 48 47 46 36 7 8 9 10 50 40 30 20
I/O-45 General purpose input or output Common/Supply 12 Common junction for I/O-45 I/O-46 General purpose input or output Common/Supply 13 Common junction for I/O-46 I/O-47 General purpose input or output Common/Supply 14 Common junction for I/O-47 I/O-48 General purpose input or output Common/Supply 15 Common junction for I/O-48
To make linking of common supplies easier the X3 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding switches/valves with common potential. X3 - Pin number 12 13 14 22 23 32 33 34 Link configuration X3 - Pin number 17 18 19 27 28 29 37 38 39 Link configuration
12 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
13(49)
4.5
The X2 connector
The X2 connector has a jumper group to be used for supply voltage to the different analogue sensors.
4.5.1 Main Supply

24Volt AC or DC power supply for the node. The signals are doubled in the connector due to the current limit of single pins. DC voltage can be applied either way. Name 24INA 24INA 24INB 24INB Pin number in connector X2/42 X2/43 X2/45 X2/44
4.5.2 CAN
The two CAN nets are placed in the X2 connector. The first net use Bromma CAN (BCAN) voltage levels and the second net use standard CAN voltage levels. The standard CAN net has to be terminated with external resistors. Name CAN High 1 CAN Low 1 CAN High 2 / Reserved3 CAN Low 2 / Reserved3 CAN GND 2/ Reserved3 Pin number in connector X2/30 X2/40 X2/50 X2/20 X2/2
CAN channel is std CAN for future CAN-Open installations 13 Printed:2003-08-15 2003 Bromma Conquip AB
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
14(49)
4.5.3 Address Key

All nodes must have a unique identity. This is read from the Id pins ID0 ID4 where pins being connected to the ground pin corresponds to zeroes and pins left unconnected are considered ones. Name ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0 Ground Pin number in connector X2/49 X2/39 X2/29 X2/19 X2/9 X2/10
Configuration Since all nodes are the same in reference to the software as well as hardware you have to configure them to carry different roles. Setting the address key configures the role of the node. The address key has two other functions as well, enabling Spreader stop and enabling redundancy block. These functions are described in chapters 4.10 and 4.8. The address key setting is described in the following table: Key input Node name 00000 00001 00010 00011 00100 00101 00110 00111 01000 01001 01010 01011 01100 01101 01110 01111 10000 10001 10010 1001111110 11111 Test A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B1 B1 B1 B2 B2 B2 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 Not Used Test Spreader Redundancy block and Pins to be linked together in stop override of landing X2 connector pins 10,9,19,29,39,49 No No 10,19,29,39,49 No No 10,9,29,39,49 No No 10,29,39,49 No No 10,9,19,39,49 Yes Yes 10,19,39,49 Yes No 10,9,39,49 No Yes 10,39,49 No No 10,9,19,29,49 Yes Yes 10,19,29,49 Yes No 10,9,29,49 No Yes 10,29,49 No No 10,9,19,49 No No 10,19,49 No No 10,9,49 No No 10,49 No No 10,9,19,29,39 No No 10,19,29,39 No No 10,9,29,39 None Node number identifier when viewing Display and Log 8 9 10 11 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Example
Here are three examples of how to set the address key: A node with id B1 without redundancy block or emergency stop has the address key 01000. A node with id B2 with both redundancy block and emergency stop has the address key 01001. File: SCS_2_manual_HW.doc 14 Printed:2003-08-15 2003 Bromma Conquip AB
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
15(49)
A node with id A2 (cannot have redundancy block or emergency stop enabled) has the address key 00010.
4.5.4 Analogue Inputs

There are two analogue inputs on each node via the X2 connector (the other two are via the X4 connector). Each signal has its own 10V-reference voltage output, ground reference and sensor signal that should be connected to the sensor device. Name Analogue in 1 10Vref 1 Signal ground 1 Analogue in 2 10Vref 2 Signal ground 2 Pin number in connector X2/18 X2/28 X2/8 X2/17 X2/27 X2/7
4.5.5 PWM Outputs

There are four PWM outputs for driving external loads, for example proportional hydraulic valves. Each output has two connections, one in and one out. The load should be connected between these, since it is a current loop. Name PWM out 1 PWM in 1 PWM out 2 PWM in 2 PWM out 3 PWM in 3 PWM out 4 PWM in 4 Pin number in connector X2/3 X2/4 X2/2 X2/1 X2/21 X2/11 X2/31 X2/41
4.5.6 External Spreader Memory

An external EEPROM memory can be mounted on the spreader for spreader id and/or user defined purpose. The memory is connected as below. Name 10V supply Serial data Serial clock Signal ground Pin number in connector X2/36 X2/16 X2/26 X2/6 Cable Red Blue Green Black
15 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
16(49)
4.5.7 RS 485 and SSI

The RS 485 connection can be used for external sensors or user defined purpose. The SSI connection can be used with external sensors with up to 25 bits data length. The hardware and the pins in connector X2 are shared between RS 485 and SSI. Therefore it is only possible to use one of these connections at a time. When used as a RS 485 the following pins are used: Name Pin number in connector Channel A X2/38 Channel B X2/37 When used as SSI the following pins are used: Name Pin number in connector Clock+ X2/38 ClockX2/37 Data+ X2/15 DataX2/25
4.5.8 Additional Jumper Group

To make linking of common supplies easier the X2 connector also has groups if pins linked together to be used basically as jumper bars with the same potential. The following pins are linked together internally for the purpose of feeding switches/valves with common potential. X2 - Pin number 22 23 32 33 34 Link configuration
16 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
17(49)
4.6
The X4 Connector
The X4 connector can be configured for field bus operation or one of three alternative functions. The alternatives are a RS 232 serial port, two additional analogue inputs or a duty cycle input. The function is selected by connecting different pin headers to connector CN103. To find these pin headers the SCS2 node must be opened. The figure below shows the relative placement of the pin headers. In each pin header the pins are number 1 to 5 or 1 to 10. In the figure a pin with a circle to the left is number one in that header. Field bus operation is selected by connecting the field bus connector on the Anybus card with pin header CN103. The RS 232 serial port is selected by connecting CN100 and CN103. The two additional analogue inputs are selected by connecting CN105 and CN103. Finally the duty cycle input is selected by connecting CN104 with CN103.
Front view of connectors inside node.
17 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
18(49)
4.6.1 AnyBus
The AnyBus connector is used to interface any of the fieldbus types used apart from BCAN. Name A-Line B-Line GND-BUS Pin number in connector X4/2 X4/1 X4/3
4.6.2 Two auxiliary Analogue Inputs

These two analogue inputs use the same ground and 10 V reference voltages as the two analogue inputs in connector X2. The input range is either 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA. The 0 to 20 mA range is selected for channel 1 by jumpering pin number 1 and 2 in CN106 and for channel 2 by jumering pin number 4 and 5 in CN106. If no jumpers are added on CN106 the voltage range, 0 to 10 V range is selected as default. In the 0 to 20 mA range a 500 Ohm resistor is used internally and therefore the current being measured must be capable of driving 20 mA at 10 V to utilise the full 0 to 20 mA range. Name GND GND Analogue Input 1 Analogue Reference 10 V Analogue Input 2 Pin number in connector X5/1 X5/2 X5/5 X5/3 X5/4
18 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
19(49)
4.7
The X5 Connector
4.7.1 RS-232
The RS-232 connector, called BMS port, is located to the right of the node and is used only for this purpose. Name TxD RxD RTS CTS GND Pin number in connector X5/1 X5/2 X5/5 X5/3 X5/4
4.8
The Redundancy Function
For safety reasons the hardware is designed to override the operator commands in some occasions. This is to prevent the operator from making wrong commands by accident when the spreader is not landed, prohibiting dangerous results. C D
A E The commands either from a remote node on the network or the local node itself. The CPU and the system software as well as the application specific software (Spreader program). The redundancy block of hardware static logic. The block has two functions, to make sure the twistlocks are energised correctly at boot and to prevent the software from changing between lock and unlock when not landed during operation. At boot the redundancy block checks the sensor status and determines if the twistlock valves are to be energised and in what direction. After a correct landing and a transition between lock/unlock the redundancy block goes passive only preventing the software to change between lock and unlock unless the Spreader is properly landed. In this state the redundancy can be viewed as two relay contacts, where only one contact is closed at a time permitting the twistlock outputs. The only way of overriding the logic of the redundancy block is to energise a specific I/O (landed override) on that particular node. The outputs to the lock/unlock valves The sensor signals from landed, locked and unlocked. To enable the redundancy the address key on B1 or B2 is used, this then automatically means you have to use input 48 as Landed override to be able to override the hardware logic. The landed override signal sets the spreader in landed mode and thereby temporarily disables the redundancy block.
19 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
20(49)
4.9
Field bus Connections.
Apart from the parallel I/O of the nodes, each node can be equipped with an AnyBus card used for external buses. This card is fitted into the node on the connector at the right side of the board when the cover is off. By using the AnyBus the crane can utilise the SCS2 as an integrated slave on the PLC network or an AnyBus card can be used as a Master bus for an internal I/O bus on the Spreader. The principal behind the AnyBus is that the interface card translates a number of different bus protocols to a standardised format on the address and data bus of the node. To change between different buses one can then simply change the type of interface card. For details regarding configuration of a specific bus, please view the user manual for that specific card and the electrical documentation for your specific project. The size of the data exchange area between the SCS2 and the Anybus card is configurable up to 64 bytes in and 64 bytes out. The configuration is done via HMS standard files. This interface must be configured in the same way for both the Master and the SCS 2 slave for the bus to work correctly. For each project a document has to be sent to the customer describing the used parts of the interface. When referring to in/out we view it from the SCS2 side, hence input for the SCS2 is an output from the master in the crane.
4.9.1 Mapping of I/O

OUT Byte 0-63 Project specific outputs IN Byte 0-63 Project specific inputs
Output Segment In the output segment it possible to use a number of bytes for diagnostic information in the form codes. The code sent will be equivalent with the code displayed in the onboard display; hence there will be three levels of this code INFO, WARNING, ERROR. Apart from the code and the byte for indicating the type of code a counter will be incremented each time a code is sent. The counter is a 16bit value and therefore will begin from 0 if the counter overflows. The value of this counter will be sent each time that a new diagnostic message is transmitted.
Spreader diagnostic area.

Byte 0 => Type of error (info, warning, error) Byte 1 => Node ID (the number of the node from which the message originates) Byte 2-3 (WORD) => Diagnostic code Byte 4-5 (WORD) => Sub Code for diagnostics Byte 6-7 (WORD) => Sequential counter value (message number)
20 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
21(49)
System diagnostic area.

This part is named the assert diagnostics and is basically only used to find discrepancies in the SCS2 system. The objective of it is mainly for Bromma Conquip ABs R&D to identify unforeseen weaknesses in the system. If the customer wishes to implement/decode this it can help Bromma Conquip AB improve its equipment further, however the customer might find little or no use in this information on their own behalf. The assert part is configured in the following way. Byte 8 => Node ID Byte 9-10 => Row Number (of source code) Byte 11-16 => Filename (1:st 6 char.) Byte 17-18 => sequential counter The remaining bytes for output will be assigned the interface with the crane and will vary on each project. The assignments here are discrete outputs from the Spreader and current values (pressure etc.) from devices on the Spreader. These assignments shall be are documented in the electrical documentation of the project. Input Segment The entire range of the input area is configurable per project. The assignments here are discrete inputs to the Spreader and set point values for the Spreader. These assignments shall be documented in the electrical documentation of the project.
4.10 Spreader Stop

A Spreader stop function can be used in the system. This is performed by enabling Spreader stop using the address key on B1 or B2 and connecting the signal from the spreader stop button to digital port 47 on the corresponding node (B1 or B2). The spreader stop configuration must correspond to the spreader stop setting in the spreader program. This means that if and only if the spreader stop on a node is enabled, digital port 47 must be connected to the Spreader Stop component in the spreader program.
21 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
22(49)
4.11 Fault Finding table Symptom
What to do
Comment
Power Supply Node wont start. No text appears in the display after power-on. Measure the main supply. The voltage should exceed 17V AC or DC. The green and all red LEDs in the display should be lit.
RS-232 BMS system can not communicate with the node. Probe TxD and RxD lines with oscilloscope while trying to communicate. Data lines should show square waves between 10V to +10V relative to GND pin.
CAN The node can not communicate with the other nodes. Probe bus lines with oscilloscope. CAN high should show square waves pointing downwards and CAN low should be showing square waves pointing upwards.
Digital Ports Input signal fault Check if LED indicator on I/O module responds to sensor signal. Check the Common connection for correct supply. Check if LED indicator on I/O module responds to command. Check the load for proper connection and grounding. Check for broken fuse on the I/O module. Check the Common connection for correct supply. The LED should be lit when current flows through the module. The LED should be lit when the circuit is closed. The load should be connected between the modules out pin and ground. The supply voltage depends on the type of load. 220V,110V,24V or other.
Output signal fault
Node ID The node stops at start-up with Node Id displayed. Measure the voltage of all ID pins. 5V represent ones and 0V represents zeroes. The measures should indicate the expected id. 22 Printed:2003-08-15 This can indicate that the node has wrong id strapped telling the node to participate in the system with wrong role.
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
23(49)
Analogue Inports Analogue input signal appears to be faulty. Check the reference voltage relative to the GND. Check if the node chassis is properly grounded to the spreader. There should be exactly 10V difference between them. This is very important in an AC driven system.
PWM Outports PWM output appears to be faulty. Check the load for errors. Try another load.
5 Software tools
5.1 Overview
There are some related tools to the SCS2, which support it in different ways. A brief description of these tools is given below.
5.2
ABE
ABE (Application Builder Environment) is a tool for developing and configuring the spreader program, which controls the logic of the spreader. ABE generates a load file. For more detailed see the separate manual.
5.3
BMS
BMS ultra light (Bromma Monitoring System ultra light) is a tool for monitoring events and reading status of I/O in the SCS2. BMS can also be used to download new programs to the SCS2. For more detailed see the separate manual.
23 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
24(49)
6 Miscellaneous
6.1 Data sheet
Note Pin X2 42-44 Depending on number and type of I/O modules Level and quality measurement of voltage. Indicated via LEDs. (faults stored in log) Operating temperature Internal temperature monitoring IP67 In accordance with 89/336/EEC:
EN 50081-2: 1993 EN 50082-2: 1995 EN 61000- 4- 6: 1996 EN 61000-4-8:1993 ENV 50204: 1995 EN 61000- 4- 4: 1995 EN 61000- 4- 2: 1995
Parameter Operating voltage Current consumption Power monitoring Temperature EMC conformity
Min 17 300 -40
Max 40 800 +85
Unit V AC/DC mA
0
Controller Memory Time PWM current output Analogue inputs SSI I/O 48 programmable Scan time Serial interfaces
Diagnostics
FB programming
32bit controller running at 16MHz quartz Program 1.4Mb Log/NVRAM 128kb External EEPROM 256byte 1*realtime clock 4*Current controlled. Short circuit protected. 12 bit resolution voltage/current 10V reference voltage output serial Voltage depending on type of module used. Galvanic isolation. LED indication. SC/OL protected 3A. System scan time Node scan time BCAN Bromma CAN based bus RS485 Asynchronous for sensors etc. RS232 For PC communication Field bus slave to those field buses supplied by HMS. System diagnostics Spreader functionality diagnostics 8 character display for messages & information Power level via LEDs Event and error log Basic binary functions (AND, OR etc.) Basic Analogue functions (compare, add etc.) Basic controller functions(PWM, regulators etc.) Spreader controller functions
0 0 12 50 5
2,5 10 300 230
A V kHz V AC/DC ms ms
24 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
25(49)
6.2
Dimensions
Figure 1 All dimensions in mm
25 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
26(49)
7 Appendix A (Error messages)

The error messages, which are generated by the system, can be viewed in the display as well as in the log (using the BMS). It is the same information in both interfaces and is explained in this appendix in the table below. Nu level m.l cod e 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ERROR 13 ERROR ERROR Description of code Description of sub code Consequence Hints
WARNING Failed reading temperature spare 0 spare 1 spare 2 spare 3 Two different PCs' trying to download to the system spare 4 spare 5 spare 6 spare 7 spare 8 Program memory failure, HW fault No response from slave when initialising system
. . . . . Id of one of the node connected to the PC . . . . . . . System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. Ensure that all slave are powered up & correctly addressed Restart system System is brought into failsafe mode. Ensure that only one PC is downloading
14 ERROR 15 16 17 18 19 20 ERROR 21 22 ERROR
Boot sequence failed spare 9 spare 10 spare 11 spare 12 spare 13
. . . . . .
System is brought into failsafe mode.
Downloading error, connection . broken spare 14 Memory collides when downloading program . .
System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode.
reload program
recompile and download program again
26 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
27(49)
23 24 25 26 27
spare 15 spare 16 spare 17 spare 18 spare 19
. . . . . . . . . . . System is brought into failsafe mode. Contact Bromma if problem persists System cannot start Contact Bromma
28 WARNING No data in program/system memory 29 spare 20 30 WARNING Checksum of memory corrupt 31 ERROR 32 33 34 ERROR HW fault on memory spare 21 spare 22
System init. Display. This error The error codes during the system boot phase that have caused the code accumalates and displays system to go into failsafe mode the errors ocurred during the system boot, since no reporting is done until the system has started. System failed in reading . spreader program from memory No spreader program residing in . memory System failed to run spreader program Spreader program object instances failed Spreader program object instances failed Spreader program object instances failed Spreader program object instances failed Spreader program object instances failed . . System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. reload and restart download program reload proram Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma Check spreader. If problems persist contact Bromma Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma
35 ERROR 36 ERROR 37 ERROR 38 ERROR
39 ERROR
40 ERROR
41 ERROR
42 ERROR
27 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
28(49)
43 ERROR
Spreader program object instances failed
Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma Restart system. If problems persist contact Bromma
44 WARNING I/O message lost 45 ERROR Memory failure
. .
46 47 48 49 50 ERROR 51 ERROR
spare 23 spare 24 spare 25 spare 26
. . . . System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. restart restart
Failed to configure I/O on node The node ID which has generated the error Duplicate answers on I/O The node ID which has configuration from the same generated the error node when initialising system System initialising error when configuring nodes I/O Duplicate answers on I/O configuration from the same node when initialising system spare 27 Duplicate answers on I/O configuration from the same node when initialising system
52 ERROR 53 ERROR
The node ID which has System is brought into generated the error failsafe mode. The node ID which has System is brought into generated the error failsafe mode.
restart restart
54 55 ERROR
The node ID which has System is brought into generated the error failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode.
restart
56 ERROR
No answer when master . requesting configuration information during intitialisation No answer when master . requesting configuration information during intitialisation No answer when master . requesting configuration information during intitialisation System started .
57 ERROR
58 ERROR
check connections between nodes. Restart check connections between nodes. Restart check connections between nodes. Restart
59 INFO
60 WARNING TWL - No twistlock sensor . inputs active during system start
Message stored in log and check wiring, displayed on Spreader sensors and connectors or mechanical reasons 2003 Bromma Conquip AB
28 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
29(49)
61 WARNING TWL - One twistlock indicating ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for both locked and unlocked which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors warning and sensor adjustment or mechanical reasons 62 WARNING TWL - timeout locking. Locked ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor, signal has not been received which generated the displayed on Spreader valves and/or after output to valve warning wiring or mechanical reasons 63 WARNING TWL - Locked sensor lost ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for during operation. Sensor lost which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors without command/output when warning and sensor twistlocks are all locked adjustment or mechanical reasons 64 WARNING TWL - timeout unlocking. ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check sensor, Unlocked signal has not been which generated the displayed on Spreader valves and/or received after output to valve warning wiring or mechanical reasons 65 WARNING TWL - Unocked sensor lost ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for during operation. Sensor lost which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors without command/output when warning and sensor twistlocks are all unlocked adjustment or mechanical reasons 66 WARNING TWL - all landed sensors not ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for received after first landed and which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors timeout. warning and sensor adjustment or mechanical reasons 67 WARNING TWL - landed sensor not ID no. of the twistlock Message stored in log and check for released when the other sensors which generated the displayed on Spreader damaged sensors not active and a timer has timed warning and sensor out adjustment or mechanical reasons 68 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. No . Stops the telescope and check for valid sensor found within displays/stores message damaged sensors timeout limit after output has and sensor been activated adjustment or mechanical reasons 69 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. ID no. of the sensor Stops the telescope and check for Wrong sensor in telescoping missing which displays/stores message damaged sensors sequence reached generated the warning and sensor adjustment or mechanical 29 Printed:2003-08-15 2003 Bromma Conquip AB
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
30(49)
reasons
70 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. The ID no. of the lost position sensor is lost without an sensor output.
Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
71 WARNING TELESCOPE - prox. type. Two ID no.s. of the sensors Message stored in log and check for different position sensors displayed on Spreader damaged sensors indicating simultaneously and sensor adjustment or mechanical reasons 72 ERROR Duplicate answers from one The node ID which has System is brought into restart (check node during boot verification generated the error failsafe mode. address keying) 73 ERROR 74 ERROR 75 76 77 78 79 80 ERROR 81 ERROR 82 ERROR 83 ERROR Wrong boot version in a node No answer when master requesting boot version. spare 28 spare 29 spare 30 spare 31 spare 32 Wrong node answered request from master to check if pc was connected No answer after master request to check PC port (RS232) Unable to download program Unable to download program (checksum failure) The node ID which has System is brought into generated the error failsafe mode. The node ID which has System is brought into generated the error failsafe mode. contact Bromma restart
. . The node ID which has System is brought into generated the error failsafe mode. The node ID which has System is brought into generated the error failsafe mode. . . System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. restart restart, check connections retry Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma
84 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time couldn't be read 85 WARNING Onboard realtime clock time couldn't be set 86 INFO
. . Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
minimum system CPU cycle time in ms time. Periodically reported every half hour. The counter is reset after reporting.
30 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
31(49)
87 INFO
88 INFO
89 90 INFO
maximum system CPU cycle time in ms time. Periodically reported every half hour. The counter is reset after reporting. average system CPU cycle time. time in ms Periodically reported every half hour. The counter is reset after reporting. spare 33 . The number of control loops exceeding 100ms for th last half hour. The counter is reset after reporting spare 34 spare 35 spare 36 No operative system in Node The number of the counter . . . .
Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
91 92 93 94 ERROR 95 ERROR 96 ERROR 97 INFO
Systems fails to start
contact Bromma check adress key check adress key
Duplicate answer on The node ID which has System is brought into determining Spreader stop set up generated the error failsafe mode. No answer on Master request for . "Spreader stop" configuration Spreader stop has been activated/deactivated spare 37 spare 38 Spreader program fault 0= activated 1=deactivated . . System is brought into failsafe mode.
98 99 100 ERROR
101 WARNING CAN message buffer is full
recompile and reload spreader program The first message type Message stored in log and displayed on in the buffer Spreader . . . . System is brought into failsafe mode. check battery/restart/co ntact Bromma System shutdown contact Bromma
102 ERROR 103 104 105 ERROR
System failed to initialise HW spare 39 spare 40 Onboard NV RAM failed memory test spare 41
106
. Actual voltage *10 Message stored in log and check supplies displayed on Spreader
107 WARNING 10V reference voltage too low
31 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
32(49)
108 WARNING 12V internal supply too low
Actual voltage *10
Message stored in log and check supplies displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and check battery displayed on Spreader System is brought into failsafe mode. restart
109 ERROR
Battery voltage too low
Actual voltage *10
110 ERROR 111 112 113 114 INFO 115 INFO 116 117 118 INFO 119 INFO 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 ERROR
The System failed to lock th I/O . on a node during system init. spare 42 spare 43 spare 44 System is shutting down System shutdown has been completed spare 45 spare 46 Landed override has been activated Landed override has been deactivated spare 47 spare 48 spare 49 spare 50 spare 51 spare 52 spare 53 spare 54 spare 55 Spreader program fault or load file has been korrupted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130 ERROR
Spreader program fault or load file has been korrupted
check and recompile spreader program. Reload. /contact Bromma check and recompile spreader program. Reload. /contact Bromma
32 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
33(49)
131 ERROR
Spreader program fault or load file has been korrupted
check and recompile spreader program. Reload. /contact Bromma
132 133 134 135 136 ERROR
spare 56 spare 57 spare 58 spare 59 Spreader program fault or load file has been korrupted
. . . . . System is brought into failsafe mode. check and recompile spreader program. Reload. /contact Bromma
137 138 139
spare 60 spare 61 spare 62
. . . The ID type of the message The count of the missed messages The ID which is duplicate Voltage * 10 Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader check and correct the adress key Message stored in log and check supplies displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and check supplies displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and check supplies displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and Check specific displayed on Spreader project. System is brought into failsafe mode.
140 WARNING Unknown CAN message received 141 INFO CAN messages missed. Cyclically reported. Two nodes within the system have the same ID/adress
142 ERROR
143 WARNING 10V reference voltage is too high
144 WARNING 12V internal voltage is too high Voltage * 10
145 WARNING Battery voltage is too high
Voltage * 10
146 WARNING User defined Warning. The . user/programmer defines what this fault should indicate within the application program.
33 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
34(49)
147 WARNING User defined Warning. The . user/programmer defines what this fault should indicate within the application program. 148 WARNING User defined Warning. The . user/programmer defines what this fault should indicate within the application program. 149 WARNING User defined Warning. The . user/programmer defines what this fault should indicate within the application program. 150 WARNING User defined Warning. The . user/programmer defines what this fault should indicate within the application program. 151 WARNING User defined Warning. The . user/programmer defines what this fault should indicate within the application program. 152 WARNING User defined Warning. The . user/programmer defines what this fault should indicate within the application program. 153 WARNING User defined Warning. The . user/programmer defines what this fault should indicate within the application program. 154 WARNING User defined Warning. The . user/programmer defines what this fault should indicate within the spreader program. 155 WARNING User defined Warning. The . user/programmer defines what this fault should indicate within the spreader program. 156 157 158 159 spare 63 spare 64 spare 65 spare 66 . . . . 34 Printed:2003-08-15
Message stored in log and Check specific displayed on Spreader project.
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
35(49)
160
spare 67
. . Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and check supplies displayed on Spreader System is taken down check supplies into idle mode. Ie if the system voltage comes up again it wakes otherwise is prepared to shut down
161 WARNING CAN error
162 WARNING RS232 error
163 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor supply voltage. Warning 1 = Voltage < 21V 164 ERROR Power monitor P1 = sensor supply voltage. ERROR = Voltage below permissive voltage of system.
165 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal supply voltage. Warning 1 = Voltage < 21V 166 ERROR
Message stored in log and check supplies displayed on Spreader System is taken down check supplies into idle mode. Ie if the system voltage comes up again it wakes otherwise is prepared to shut down
Power monitor P2 = internal . logic supply voltage. ERROR = Voltage below permissive voltage of system.
167 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM supply voltage. Warning 1 = Voltage < 21V 168 ERROR Power monitor P3 = PWM supply voltage. ERROR = Voltage below permissive voltage of system.
Message stored in log and check supplies displayed on Spreader System is taken down check supplies into idle mode. Ie if the system voltage comes up again it wakes otherwise is prepared to shut down
169 WARNING System failed to read/write to a ID of port: Message stored in log and check supplies I/O port Digital=0+port_no, displayed on Spreader Analogue=100+port_n o, PWM=200+port_no, encoder=300+port_no. 170 spare 68 . 35 Printed:2003-08-15 2003 Bromma Conquip AB
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
36(49)
171 172 173 174 ERROR
spare 69 spare 70 spare 71 No answer when on general information request between nodes.
. . . . Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader The telescopic motion is stopped until a new command is given. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader check sensor, pressure,mechan ics. If necessary calibrate system.
175 INFO
TWL - twistlock lock command . received TWL - twistlock unlock command received TWL - twistlock has been locked TWL - twistlock has been unlocked TELESCOPE - prox. type. Expand command received TELESCOPE - prox. type. Retract command received TELESCOPE - prox. type. Command to go to a speceific position has been received TELESCOPE - prox. type. The desired position has been reached .
176 INFO
177 INFO
178 INFO
179 INFO
180 INFO
181 INFO
The ID of the position requested The ID of the position requested
182 INFO
183 WARNING TELESCOPE - automatic type. 0 = Desired position The telescope hasn't reached its' not reached within time position within time limit limit. 1 = telescope has not moved more than 1 cm during 3 seconds. 184 INFO TELESCOPE - automatic type. . expand command received
36 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
37(49)
185 INFO
TELESCOPE - automatic type. . Retract command received TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position Command to go to a specific requested position received TELESCOPE - automatic type. The ID of the position The desired position reached requested The year has been set current value (year)
Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader connections restart (check address keying) Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
186 INFO
187 INFO
188 INFO
189 INFO
The month has been set
current value (month)
190 INFO
The day/date has been set
current value (date)
191 INFO
The time of day (hour) has been current value (hour) set The ID of the node which doesn't have contact . .
192 WARNING Nocontact with the master for 10s 193 ERROR 194 INFO Message reported during boot. Unknown role Information request (system boot functionality) Download request active (system boot functionality) Information request received (system boot functionality) set time request received (system boot functionality)
195 INFO
196 INFO
197 INFO
37 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
38(49)
198 INFO
Boot version request received. (system boot functionality) spare 72
199 200 INFO
. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
Download flag request received. . (system boot functionality) spare 73 spare 74 spare 75 spare 76 Check flash memory request received. (system boot functionality) Restart node request received. (system boot functionality) System start init. (system boot functionality) System look for downloadflag. (system boot functionality) . . . . .
201 202 203 204 205 INFO
Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader progress shown on Spreader display Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
206 INFO
207 INFO
208 INFO
209 INFO
Send datablock request. (system . boot functionality) Received datablock. (system boot functionality) Download in progress .
210 INFO
211 INFO 212 INFO
percentage of downloaded data
copy serial information to flash . memory spare 77 spare 78 No answer when waiting for present nodes response . . .
213 214 215 ERROR
38 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
39(49)
216 INFO
Inforamtion on present nodes has been received Download timeout spare 79 No answers or inconsistent answers from system members during boot The size of received data is to large. Boot message No answers or inconsistent answers from system members during boot No answers or inconsistent answers from system members during boot No answers or inconsistent answers from system members during boot No answers or inconsistent answers from system members during boot No answers or inconsistent answers from system members during boot No answers or inconsistent answers from system members during boot spare 80
Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader System is brought into failsafe mode. reload
217 ERROR 218 219 ERROR 220 ERROR 221 ERROR 222 ERROR 223 ERROR 224 ERROR 225 ERROR 226 ERROR 227 228 ERROR 229 INFO
. . . . . . . . . . .
System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode.
No answers or inconsistent . answers from system members during boot Spreader error and event log has . been cleared Failed to set up spreader program correctly Spreader program download error destination of error
System is brought into failsafe mode. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma
230 ERROR
231 ERROR
39 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
40(49)
232 ERROR
Spreader program download error Power monitor P1 = sensor supply voltage. OK Power monitor P2 = internal supply voltage. OK Power monitor P3 = PWM supply voltage. OK
233 INFO
Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
234 INFO
235 INFO
236 INFO
237 INFO
Reboot (restart) request sent . from master to slaves. Happens when slaves are powered on before master at system start System has been taken down to . idle mode. Ie waiting to wake up. Spare 81 System failed to cancel shutdown process No answer when attempting to cancel shutdown process System received timeout when attempting to cancel shutdown process System shutdown aborted . .
238 239 INFO
Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
240 INFO
241 INFO
242 INFO
243 244 INFO
spare 82 TWL - The spreader has been landed TWL - The Spreader has been totally lifted (not landed)
. . Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
245 INFO
40 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
41(49)
246 INFO
FLIPPER - flipper up command . received FLIPPER - flipper down command received .
Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader AI can start to flicker. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
247 INFO
248 WARNING Power monitor P1 = sensor supply voltage. Warning 2 = Voltage < 17V 249 WARNING Power monitor P2 = internal supply voltage. Warning 2 = Voltage <17V 250 WARNING Power monitor P3 = PWM supply voltage. Warning 2 = Voltage < 17V 251 ERROR 252 ERROR 253 ERROR
AI can start to flicker. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
AI can start to flicker. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
System failed to initialise fielbus . interface Duplicate answers when setting . up fieldbus interface No answer when configuring fieldbus interface . . ID of the twin box failing
System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode.
254 WARNING System failed in locking fieldbus interface 255 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have failed to get to their upper position within time limit
Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha nics/sensors Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha nics/sensors Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha nics/sensors
256 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed . to reach its' upper position within time limit 257 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed . to reach its' upper position within time limit
41 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
42(49)
258 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes left timed out when expanding to their attach position. Failed to reach switch within time limit
Twin down sequence check stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha Spreaer to twin up nics/sensors position. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Twin down sequence check stopped. Have to return solenoids/mecha Spreaer to twin up nics/sensors position. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha nics/sensors Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha nics/sensors Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha nics/sensors Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha nics/sensors Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha nics/sensors Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha nics/sensors Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha nics/sensors Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha nics/sensors Message stored in log and check displayed on Spreader solenoids/mecha nics/sensors
259 WARNING TWIN195 - twin boxes right timed out when expanding to their attach position. Failed to reach switch within time limit
260 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook has failed . to reach its' lower position (connect) within time limit 261 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook has failed . to reach its' lower position (connect) within time limit 262 WARNING TWIN195 - twinboxes have failed to get to their lower position within time limit 263 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor lost unexpectedly. (not due to output) 264 WARNING TWIN195 - twin up sensor received when twinboxes are down 265 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook down sensor lost unexpectedly. 266 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook down sensor lost unexpectedly. ID of the twin box failing ID of the twin box failing ID of the twin box failing .
267 WARNING TWIN195 - left hook up sensor . lost unexpectedly. 268 WARNING TWIN195 - right hook up sensor . lost unexpectedly.
42 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
43(49)
269 ERROR 270 ERROR 271 ERROR 272 INFO
System failed to init. RS485 Duplicate answers in system when setting up RS485
Node ID Node ID
System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode. System is brought into failsafe mode.
restart / contact Bromma restart / contact Bromma restart / contact Bromma
System timed out when trying to . configure RS485 TELESCOPE - automatic type. . Teach in command received TWINTELESCOPE - expand command received TWINTELESCOPE - retract command received TWINTELESCOPE - left console reached zero gap position TWINTELESCOPE - right console reached zero gap position TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs expand in motion TWINTELESCOPE - twinlegs retract in motion .
Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader motion is stopped. check Message stored in log and pressure/mechan displayed on Spreader ics(lubrication)/s ensor/valves
273 INFO
274 INFO
275 INFO
276 INFO
277 INFO
278 INFO
279 WARNING TWINTELESCOPE - hasn't reached an endstop when in motion within time limit 280 281 INFO spare 83 TWINMPS - teaching a predefined position
. The ID of the position teached Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
282 INFO
TWINMPS - command to go to The ID of the position a pre-defined position has been requested received
43 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
44(49)
283 INFO
TWINMPS - A command to store a new value for a log position has been received
Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Motion is stopped. check Message stored in log and pressure/mechan displayed on Spreader ics(lubrication)/s ensor/valves Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader System is brought into failsafe mode.
284 INFO
TWINMPS - A command to The ID of the position return to a log position has been requested received .
285 WARNING TWINMPS - the twinlegs haven't reached their requested position within time limit. 286 INFO TWIN195 - twin up command has been received TWIN195 - twin down command has been received TWIN195 - twin boxes have reached their upper position TWIN195 - twin boxes have reached their lower position TTDS - override request received TTDS - override request ended
287 INFO
288 INFO
289 INFO
290 INFO
291 INFO
292 WARNING Buffer full transferring serial port info over CAN bus 293 WARNING No answer when transferring serial port info over Can bus 294 ERROR Failed to communicate with RS485 spare 84 spare 85
295 296
. .
44 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
45(49)
297 298 ERROR
spare 86 Failed reading spreader program. spare 87 spare 88
. System is brought into failsafe mode. Check spreader program. If problems persist contact Bromma
299 300
301 WARNING RS485 not functioning as intended 302 WARNING AnyBus not functioning as intended 303 WARNING Error in locking AnyBus setup
Depending on type of sensor/device Depending on type of sensor/device Node ID
Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
304 WARNING Timeout when trying to lock AnyBus setup 305 WARNING Wrong node answered when locking AnyBus setup 306 INFO Spreader properties Number of containers loaded/unloaded Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
307 WARNING AnyBus external bus failure 308 WARNING AnyBus Status ok 309 WARNING AnyBus external bus ok 310 WARNING Wrong node answered when EEPROM setup 311 ERROR Timeout when expecting answer from node on EEPROM
312 WARNING Spreader properties 313 WARNING Spreader properties 314 WARNING Spreader properties 315 WARNING Spreader properties 316 WARNING Spreader properties 317 WARNING Spreader properties 318 WARNING Read EEPROM failure 319 WARNING Read NVRAM failure 320 WARNING EEPROM checksum failure 321 INFO Spreader properties EEPROM set ok 322 WARNING EEPROM set failure
45 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
46(49)
323 INFO 324 INFO 325 INFO 326 INFO 327 INFO 328 INFO 329 INFO 330 INFO
Spreader properties EEPROM attached to new node RS485 status ok Gravity point to centre command Gravity point to left side command Gravity point to right side command Gravity point has reached the centre position Gravity point has reached the left end stop Gravity point has reached the right endstop
. . .
331 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor wrap . around warning. Sensor too near the value where it wraps around and begins from zero again. 332 WARNING RS485 absolute sensor has . wrapped around. The value has gone from maximum to minimum in one CPU cycle. 333 INFO Added value to NVRAM . successfully 334 WARNING Spreader stop configuration node that reported the problem mismatch 335 WARNING Missed message on bus regarding digital I/O 336 WARNING Missed message on bus regarding analogue I/O 337 WARNING Missed message on bus regarding encoder data 338 WARNING Missed message on bus regarding AnyBus message 339 WARNING Missed message on bus regarding RS485 data node from which an answer is expected node from which an answer is expected node from which an answer is expected node from which an answer is expected node from which an answer is expected
340 WARNING No contact with the node for 3s. node from which an answer is expected specified by the Sub code 341 ERROR 342 ERROR Error when trying to dowload program Node is missing on the bus during system start. . node that is missing
46 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
47(49)
343 ERROR 344 ERROR
Inclination sensor initialisation error
node that failed to initialise the sensor
Timeout when trying to node that failed to initialise the sensor intitialise the inclination sensor node from which an answer is expected . . node from which an answer is expected
345 WARNING Missed message on bus regarding inclination sensor 346 INFO 347 INFO 349 ERROR 350 ERROR 351 ERROR 352 ERROR 353 INFO 354 INFO Node bus communication ok. BCAN ok BCAN bus status warning. AnyBus Spreader/systems diagnostic area failed to set up. Timeout when trying to set up AnyBus Spreader/system diagnostic area AnyBus Assert diagnostic area failed to set up Timeout when trying to set up AnyBus Assert diagnostic area.
348 WARNING BCAN bus communication off. .
node from which an answer is expected
Present nodes shown in sub code bitwise OR for all included nodes. 12bit Value AnyBus slave card plugged in
node ID holding the card 355 INFO AnyBus Master card plugged in node ID holding the card 356 WARNING AnyBus card missing node ID of the node missing the card 357 INFO 358 INFO 359 ERROR AnyBus Input data area size AnyBus output data area size Hardware initialisation failed (system prog.) size of data area (bytes) size of data area (bytes) psu_mon.=1, temp_sens.=2, realtime_clock=3
360 ERROR 361 ERROR 362 ERROR 363 ERROR 364 ERROR 365 ERROR
NVRAM full. No space left for . Storage NVRAM checksum Error . OS code. Operating system fatal error OS subcode.Operating system fatal error OS extra.Operating system fatal error Local regulator (PID) failed. code from OS code from OS code from OS node ID that failed to initialise the regulator call Bromma call Bromma call Bromma restart
47 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
48(49)
366 ERROR 367 ERROR
Local regulator (PID) timeout
retstart Check versions of system and ABE. Check versions of system and ABE.
Error in interpreting the spreader . program. Parameter mismatch between system and ABE file.
368 ERROR
Error in recognising a . component downloaded with the spreader program 369 WARNING Gravity point haven't reached . the requested position within time limit. 370 WARNING Missed message on bus node from which an answer is expected regarding regulator data. 371 ERROR 372 INFO Error in locking regulator setup . The Spreader info has been set. The index of the field which is set.
373 INFO
374 INFO
The Spreader info has been set. The value of the field which is set. The logged value is in the range 0-9999. This range limit has nothing to with the actual value set in the Spreader info. The time of day (minute) has Current value (minute) Message stored in log and displayed on been set Spreader Received a change bitrate request. Boot message. Requested bitrate
375 INFO
376 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor values from left hook 377 WARNING TWIN195-Multiple sensor values from right hook 378 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. (start sequence) 379 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. (download sequence) node ID that failed to handle start sequence. node ID that failed to download.
Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
48 Printed:2003-08-15
Document:
Project:
Manual
Prepared by: Date:
SCS2
Version:
Project No
Page:
Andy Lewis
2003-08-15
11
49(49)
380 WARNING Codeloading via anybus failed. (finish sequence) 381 WARNING Disabeling outputs failed.
node ID that failed to Message stored in log and displayed on handle finish sequence. Spreader node ID that failed to disable outputs. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader node ID that failed to enabeling outputs. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader Regulator index. Message stored in log and displayed on Spreader
382 WARNING No answer when attempting to disable outputs. 383 WARNING Enabeling outputs faild.
384 WARNING No answer when attempting to enabeling outputs. 385 INFO AutoTuner stored in NVRAM
49 Printed:2003-08-15
BROMMA CONQUIP
KROSSGATAN 31-33 S-162 50 VLLINGBY
E-mail : SALES@BROMMA.COM +46 (0)8 620 09 00 Tel :

B B
Customer Plant designation Drawing Number Revision

Manufacturer (Company) Project name Serial Number Types Responsible for project Sub. drawings
: : : :
Gottwald A1 1002493 a
GOTTWALD
C
: BROMMA CONQUIP : EH170U_SCS CANopen : : EH170 : :
BROMMA SPREADER EH170

E
Created on the The latest revition Manufacturing site

-
: :
2005-02-10
By
: LAT
Number of pages :
52
:
MACHINE TYPE:
ITEM
SUBJECT OF CHANGE SIGN.
DATE
This drawing is copyright, and is the property of BROMMA CONQUIP AB. The design and/or constructions contained therein, may not be copied or reproduced, whitout the written consent of the owner.
EH170
SERIAL NO. CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY:
SCS CANopen CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
CONT. TOTAL SH.
1 2 F 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-05
6
: :
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:11
DRAWING NO.
1002493
9
Table of content
Plant des.
Location
Page 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
X0 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0
Page description CIRCUIT DIAGRAM Table of contents Table of contents Connector designation Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram Circuit diagram
Rev
Revision note
Date 2005-01-05 2005-02-10 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-02-09 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-01-04 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-01-18 2005-01-18 2005-01-18 2005-02-09 2005-01-24 2005-02-09 2005-01-24 2005-02-09 2005-01-18 2005-02-09 2005-01-24 2005-02-09 2005-01-18 2005-02-09 2005-01-24 2005-01-04 2005-01-24 2005-01-04
Editor
bln LAT bln bln bln bln LAT bln bln bln bln bln bln bln bln LAT bln LAT bln LAT bln LAT bln LAT bln LAT bln bln bln bln
29 Circuit diagram 30 Circuit diagram
MACHINE TYPE:
EH170
LAT 2005-02-10
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SCS CANopen
Table of contents
: :
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
SHEET
CONT. TOTAL SH. DRAWING NO.
2 3 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
2005-02-10
10:11
DRAWING DATE:
1002493
Table of content
Plant des.
Location
Page 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52
A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1 A1
X0 X0 X0 X0 X1 X0 X1 X0 X0 X0 X0
Page description PLC diagram I/O card overview I/O card overview I/O card overview I/O card overview I/O card overview Cabinet layout Cable/ Sensor Layout Cabinet layout Cable/ Sensor Layout Cable/ Sensor Layout Spreader layout Spreader layout Parts list: ( - ) Parts list: ( - ) CABLE LIST CABLE LIST CABLE LIST CABLE LIST CABLE LIST CABLE LIST CABLE LIST
Rev
Revision note
Date 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-02-09 2005-01-04 2005-01-04 2005-01-24 2005-01-04 2005-01-24 2005-01-24 2005-02-10 2005-02-10 2005-02-10 2005-02-10 2005-02-10 2005-02-10 2005-02-10 2005-02-10 2005-02-10
Editor
bln bln bln bln bln bln LAT bln bln bln bln bln bln LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT LAT
MACHINE TYPE:
EH170
LAT 2005-02-10
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SCS CANopen
Table of contents
: :
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
SHEET
3 4 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
2005-02-10
10:11
DRAWING DATE:
1002493
SPREADER CONNECTOR
XP1 SPREADER MALE CONTACT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY
L1 L2
TWIN DOWN SIGNAL L3 POWER SUPPLY CONTROL VOLTAGE N L CONTROL VOLTAGE CONTROL VOLTAGE PILOT TELESCOPE RETRACT COMMAND TELESCOPE EXPAND COMMAND ALL FLIPPERS UP COMMAND GREEN FLIPPERS DOWN COMMAND YELLOW FLIPPER DOWN COMMAND BLUE FLIPPER DOWN COMMAND RED FLIPPERS DOWN COMMAND TWL LOCK COMMAND TWL UNLOCK COMMAND LOCKED SIGNAL UNLOCKED SIGNAL MOVE G.P. TO BLUE COMMAND MOVE G.P. TO YELLOW COMMAND G.P. IN CENTRE SIGNAL LANDED SIGNAL TWIN LEGS UP COMMAND TWIN LEGS DOWN COMMAND SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE H.I.S OR TTDC SIGNAL POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY PROTECTION EARTH POWER SUPPLY (OPTION) L1 L2 PE L3
XP1 PIN DESCRIPTION

1 5 6 2 7 3 8 4 9
10 16 23 29 17
11 18 24 30 34
12 19 25 31 35
13 20 26 32 36
14 21 27 33 37
15 22 28
RED POINT
MALE INSERT
PLUG= ODU 309 012 000 554 000 BROMMA Nr.71480 INSERT = ODU 309 803 150 037 151 BROMMA Nr.74410
CONTROL VOLTAGE PILOT SPARE PROTECTION EARTH
PE
MACHINE TYPE:
ITEM
DATE
EH170
SCS CANopen Connector designation

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
CONT. TOTAL SH.
4 5 F 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:11
DRAWING NO.
1002493
9
0
A1 +X0
-XP1
-WXP1
1
31
32
34
33
37
31
32
34
33
PE
-X2
:L1
:L1
:L2
:L2
:L3
:L3
:PE
:PE
-F1
1 2
2A
-P1
1
h
-QM8
I>
2
I>
4
I>
6
-QM1
I>
2
I>
4
I>
6
-Q1
1 2
3 4
5 6
/7.01
-K1
1 2
3 4
5 6
/10.04
-K8
1 2
3 4
5 6
/10.05
-K9
1 2
3 4
5 6
/10.01
-K2
1 2
3 4
5 6
/10.02
-K3
1 2
3 4
5 6
C
/6.01 / -Phase L1 /6.01 / -Phase L2 /6.01 / -Phase L3
-XP23 A1 +X0
21
-X2
:1
:2
:3
:PE
-WXP23
21
-WM1
PE
A1 +X100
-X2
:7
:8
:9
:PE
-WM4
PE
U
3.0KW
U
3 2 -BRAKE2 5.5KW
-M4
M 3 ~
-M1
M 3 ~
3 2 -BRAKE1
PE
PE
-M4 Telescopic motor
-M1 Gravity point motor

MACHINE TYPE:
ITEM
DATE
EH170
SCS CANopen Circuit diagram

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
5 6 F 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
6
A1 : X1
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:11
1002493
9
/5.01 / -Phase L3 /5.01 / -Phase L2 /5.01 / -Phase L1
-X2
1 3 5
:101
:103
:102
:104
/10.03
-K6
1 2
3 4
5 6
-QM10
I>
2
I>
4
I>
6
-KA1
14 11
12
/7.07
-KA1
24 21
22
/7.07
-QM6
I>
2
I>
4
I>
6
-QM7
I>
2
I>
4
I>
6
-K10
1 2
3 4
5 6
/10.06
C
L
-XP23 A1 +X0
22
PE
10
11
12
20
-EH1
N
-WXP23
22
PE
10
11
12
20
A1 +X100 -X2
:1 :2 :3
:PE
D
:4 :5 :6
:PE
:10
:11
:12
:PE
-WM2
PE
-WM3
PE
-WM5
PE
U
3.0KW
-M2
E
2.2KW
M 3 ~
-M3
2.2KW PE
M 3 ~
PE
-HINK_X0
-M5
M 3 ~
PE
-M2 Hydralic pump left

ITEM
-M3 Hydralic pump right

-M5 Hydraulic pump twin

MACHINE TYPE: SERIAL NO. CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY:
Cabinet heater
EH170

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
6 7 F 52
REV.
DATE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
6
A1 : X1
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:11
1002493
9
0
A1 +X0
A
-XP1
-WXP1
6
35 35
7
7 5
NOTE: All 24vdc supply should be ring Connected
-X2
:107
:201
:108 13 14
1 2
:202
-Q1
/5.01
-F2
10A
3 4
-X2
:N :N -N.VAC / /14.00 -L.VAC / /12.00
.01
-SS1
21 22
:L
-X2 GND
:L
L
C
BN
N
BU
YL/GL
-K1
A2 A1
90-255VAC ---24VDC
RD RD BK BK
-G1
-KA1
A1 A2
-24VDC SCS / /15.00 -24VDC / /14.00 -0VDC / /15.00
+ +
- -
-SS1
D
11 12
.01
-X1
:1
:2
-X1
.01 :3
-K1 -XP21
:+
:+
:+
:+
:+
:+
:+
:-
:-
:-
:-
:-
:-
:-
NOTE: Wire for 24VDC shall bee 2,5mm with blue colour.
/14.00 / -Spreader stop
10
14 12 24
1 3 5 7
2/5.01 6/5.01 8 /8.08 / -XP21:10 /8.08 / -XP21:1 /8.08 / -XP21:2 /8.09 / -XP21:3 /8.09 / -XP21:4 /8.09 / -XP21:5 /8.07 / -XP21:6 /8.07 / -XP21:7 /8.08 / -XP21:8 /8.08 / -XP21:9 4/5.01
11/6.08 21/6.09
22
.04
.
-
Spreader stop
24VDC
+ 24VDC
MACHINE TYPE:
0 VDC
EH170
-KA1 Cabinet heater
.
SHEET
ITEM
DATE
LAT 2005-02-09
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:
7 8 F 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
A1 : X1
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:11
1002493
9
F
-
ITEM
A1 +X100
A1 +X0
A1 +X0
SUBJECT OF CHANGE
0
-X1
red
-+VBB X2 / /17.09 -GND X2 / /17.09 -Can high X2 / /16.09 -Can low X2 / /16.09
-WX2
:1 blue :8
white
-WXP22
White :15
Brown
/15.06 / -CAN high X1 /15.06 / -CAN low X1
brown :22
-WX3
1
red :2 blue :9
DATE
SIGN.
-+VBB X3 / /19.09 -GND X3 / /19.09 -Can high X3 / /18.09
white
:16 brown :23

-Can low X3 / /18.09
-WX4
2
:3 :10 :17 :24
red blue
white
brown
-Can low X4 / /22.09
-WX5
:4 :11 :18 :25 :5 :12 :19
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
3 4 5
SERIAL NO. DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: MACHINE TYPE: DRAWING DATE:
red blue
white
brown
-Can low X5 / /24.09
-WX8
red blue
white -+VBB X8 / /21.09 -GND X8 / /21.09 -Can high X8 / /20.09
brown
-Can low X8 / /20.09
-WX10
:26 :6 :13 :20
red blue
white
-+VBB X10 / /27.09 -GND X10 / /27.09
-Can high X10 / /26.09 brown

-Can low X10 / /26.09
:27
EH170
-WX13
bln 2005-01-24
UNIT (+) PLANT (=)
6
:
red :7 blue :14

white
-VBB X13 / /29.09 -GND X13 / /29.09
-Can high X13 / /28.09 :21
-WXP21
A1 : X1
brown :28
-Can low X13 / /28.09
7
/7.06 / -XP21:6
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
/7.06 / -XP21:7 /7.06 / -XP21:8 /7.06 / -XP21:9 /7.06 / -XP21:10
8 9
10
2005-02-10 10:11

8 9
DRAWING NO.
/7.04 / -XP21:1 /7.04 / -XP21:2 /7.05 / -XP21:3 /7.05 / -XP21:4 /7.05 / -XP21:5
SHEET
CONT. TOTAL SH.
1 2 3 4 5 -0VDC / +X1/9.00
1002493
REV.
8 9 F 52
0
-B1
PIN NO: 44
1
COMMON GROUP 1
5
COMMON GROUP 2 PIN NO: 21
+B1-XPX1
:44
:31
:41
:43
:42
:21
:3
:2
:11
B
.09 / -24VDC -24VDC / .00
-XP23
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
A1 +X0 A1 +X100
-WXP23
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
+X1/8.08 / -0VDC
-X1
:14
-X2
:13
:14
:15
:16
:17
:18
:19
-WHL 1-4
-WHL 5-8
1 2 3 4 5
-HL1 E
1 2
-HL2 Red
1 2
-HL3
1 2
-HL4
1 2
-HL5
1 2
-HL6 Red
1 2
-HL7
1 2
-HL8
Green
White
Yellow
Green
White
Yellow
-HL1 Unlocked left

-
-HL2 Locked left
-HL3 Landed left
-HL4 Tower in center left
-HL5 Unlocked right
-HL6 Locked right

MACHINE TYPE:
-HL7 Landed right
-HL8 Tower in centre right
ITEM
DATE
EH170

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
6
A1 : X1
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:11
I
5
:1
:16
1 2
SHEET
9
10 52
REV.
1002493
9
0
-B1
PIN NO: 44
1
COMMON GROUP 3
5
+B1-XPX1
:8
:26
:16
:6
:7
:35
:4
:5
:25
.09 / -24VDC
-K2
A1 A2
A1 A2
-K3
-K6
A1 A2
-K8
A1 A2
A1 A2
-K9
-K10
A1 A2
.09 / -0VDC
1 3 5
2 /5.07 4 /5.07 6 /5.07
1 3 5
2/5.08 4/5.08 6/5.08
1 3 5
2 /6.02 4 /6.02 6 /6.02
1 3 5
2 /5.04 4 /5.04 6 /5.04
1 3 5
2/5.05 4/5.05 6/5.05
1 3 5
2 /6.06 4 /6.06 6 /6.06
K2 Gravity point to left

ITEM
K3 Gravity point to right
K6 Hydralic pump left/right gable

K8 Retract telescope
K9 Extend telescope
K10 Hydraulic pump twin

Not connected
Not connected
EH170

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
DATE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-04
6
A1 : X1
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:11
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
:15
-24VDC / .00
-0VDC / .00
SHEET
10 11 52
REV.
1002493
9
0
-B1
PIN NO: 9
1
COMMON GROUP 5
5
+B1-XPX1
:9
:10
:20
:30
:40
:50
:46
:47
:49
.09 / -L.VAC
-X2
:109
A1 +X0
-WXP1
3 3
-XP1
MACHINE TYPE:
ITEM
DATE
EH170

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
6
A1 : X1
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:11
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
:48
-L.VAC / .00
SHEET
11 12 52
REV.
1002493
9
0
-B1
PIN NO: 11
1
COMMON GROUP 7
5
+B1-XPX3
:11
:21
:31
:41
:42
:43
:24
:35
:44
/7.08 / -L.VAC
-X2
:110
:111
:112
:113
:114
:115
:116
A1 +X0
-WXP1
17 17
18 18
22 22
21 21
30 30
-XP1
Locked signal
-
Unlocked signal
Spreader landed signal
G.p. in centre signal
G.P. at left signal
G.P. at right signal

MACHINE TYPE:
H.I.S signal (option)
TTDS ok signal (option)

SHEET
ITEM
DATE
EH170

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
6
A1 : X1
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:11
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
:45
C
:117
12 13 52
REV.
1002493
9
A1 +X0
-XP1
-WXP1
8
8 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 13
14 14
-X2
:118
:119
:120
:121
:122
:123
:124
.08 / -N.VAC
-N.VAC / .00
+B1-XPX3 -B1
:1
:5
:4
:3
:2
:15
:6
:16
:25
:26
PIN NO: 15
PIN NO: 1
33
COMMON GROUP 9
34
35
36
37
COMMON GROUP 10
38
39
40
Telescope retract CMD

-
Telescope expand CMD
Flippers all up CMD

Flipper waterside down CMD
Flipper right down CMD

SERIAL NO.
Flipper left down CMD

MACHINE TYPE:
Flipper landside down CMD
Not connected
EH170
ITEM
CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY:

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
13 14 52
REV.
DATE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-18
6
A1 : X1
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:11
1002493
9
A1 +X0
-XP1
-WXP1
15 15
16 16
19 19
20 20
23 23
24 24
-X2
:125
:126
:127
:128
:129
:130
/7.08 / -24VDC
/7.00 / -Spreader stop
-SB1
13 14
GRAV.POINT AUT. RETURN OFF ON
.09 / -0VDC
-0VDC / .00
/7.08 / -N.VAC
+B1-XPX3 -B1
PIN NO: 36
:36
:49
:48
:47
:46
:8
:7
:10
:9
:40
:50
:30
:20
PIN NO: 10
PIN NO: 40
PIN NO: 20
PIN NO: 8
41
COMMON GROUP 11
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
Twl lock CMD

ITEM
Twl unlock CMD
G.p. move to left CMD

G.p. move to right CMD
Twin legs up CMD

Twin legs down CMD

EH170
Spreader stop
G.p. auto return

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
14 15 52
REV.
DATE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-18
6
A1 : X1
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:11
1002493
9
B
-CAN high X1 / /8.01 -CAN low X1 / /8.01
-X2
:131
:132
-XP22
C
-WXP22
white
brown
EEPROM
/7.08 / -0VDC
WH;BN
BLACK
BLUE
-KEY1
16
GREEN
26
+B1-XPX2 -B1
:42
:43
:44
:45
:10
:9
:19
:29
:39
:49
:30
:40
:50
:20
:48
:6
:16
:26
RED
WH
GN
/7.08 / -24VDC SCS
BN;GN
36
:36
Can-open H
+24V
+24V
Can-open L
GND
GND
GND
GND
Can-GND
B-Can H
B-Can L
VCC
ID0
ID1
ID3
ID4
ID5
SD
SC
.
-
Main supply node B1
Node Address
B-Can
Can-open
MACHINE TYPE:
EEPROM
ITEM
DATE
EH170

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
15 16 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-18
6
A1 : X1
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:11
1002493
9
-WS1-S5
-WS2-S6
-WS9
-WS10
-Can low X2 / +X1/8.01
-S1
-S5
-S2
-S6
-S9
-S10
-Can high X2 / +X1/8.01
1
+
3
+
1
-
3
+
1
-
3
+
1
-
3
+
1
-
3
+
1
-
-R2
2
/17.00
-X2
Node ID: 2 Left gable end
+X2-XP1
+X2-XP3
+X2-XP5
+X2-XP7
+X2-X0
:1
:2
CAN_high
In 1
In 5
In 2
In 6
In 3
In 7
In 4
In 8
-S1 Unlocked left landside

ITEM
-S5 Locked left landside
-S2 Unlocked left waterside

-S6 Locked left waterside
-S9 Landed left landside

Spare EH170
-S10 Landed left waterside
Spare
CAN-open Interface / Supply

SHEET
LAT 2005-02-09
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:
CAN_low
16 17 52
REV.
DATE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
0
/16.00
1
Out 1
I
O
2
Out 5
I
O
1
3
Out 2
I
O
4
Out 6
I
O
1
5
Out 3
I
O
6
Out 7
I
O
1
7
Out 4
I
O
8
Out 8
I
O
1
-X2
+VBB
GND
Node ID: 2 Left gable end

+X2-XP2
+X2-XP4
+X2-XP6
+X2-XP8
+X2-X0
:3
:5
-WY7-Y8
-WY1-Y2
-WY3-Y4
-WY5-Y6
-Y7
A
1 2
+X1/8.01 / -GND X2
+X1/8.00 / -+VBB X2
B 2
-Y8
-Y1
A
1 2
B 2
-Y2
-Y3
A
1 2
B 2
-Y4
-Y5
A
1 2
B 2
-Y6
-Y7 Twistlock unlock left

-
-Y8 Twistlock lock left
-Y1 Flipper 1 up left landside

-Y2 Flipper 1 down left landside
-Y3 Flipper 2 up left waterside
-Y4 Flipper 2 down left waterside

-Y5 Flipper 5 up left centre
-Y6 Flipper 5 down left centre

SHEET
EH170
ITEM

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
17 18 52
REV.
DATE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
-Can high X3 / +X1/8.02
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
-S3
-S7
-S4
-S8
-S11
-S12
-WS3-S7
-WS4-S8
-WS11
-WS12
-Can low X3 / +X1/8.02
-R3
2
/19.00
-X3
Node ID: 3
+X3-XP1
+X3-XP3
+X3-XP5
+X3-XP7
+X3-X0
:1
:2
In 1
In 5
In 2
In 6
In 3
In 7
In 4
In 8
-S3 Unlocked right waterside

ITEM
-S7 Locked right waterside
-S4 Unlocked right landside

-S8 Locked right landside
-S11 Landed right waterside

Spare EH170
-S12 Landed right landside
Spare

SHEET
LAT 2005-02-09
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:
CAN_low
Right gable end
CAN_high
18 19 52
REV.
DATE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
0
/18.00
1
Out 1
I
O
2
Out 5
I
O
1
3
Out 2
I
O
4
Out 6
I
O
1
5
Out 3
I
O
6
Out 7
I
O
1
7
Out 4
I
O
8
Out 8
I
O
1
-X3
+VBB
GND
Node ID: 3 Right gable end

+X3-XP2
+X3-XP4
+X3-XP6
+X3-XP8
+X3-X0
:3
:5
-WY15-Y16
-WY9-Y10
-WY11-Y12
-WY13-Y14
-Y15
A
1 2
+X1/8.02 / -GND X3
+X1/8.01 / -+VBB X3
B 2
-Y16
-Y9
A
1 2
B 2
-Y10
-Y11
A
1 2
B 2
-Y12
-Y13
A
1 2
B 2
-Y14
-Y15 Twistlock unlock right

-
-Y16 Twistlock lock right
-Y9 Flipper 3 up right waterside

-Y10 Flipper 3 down right waterside
-Y11 Flipper 4 up right landside
-Y12 Flipper 4 down right landside

-Y13 Flipper 6 up right centre
-Y14 Flipper 6 down right centre

SHEET
EH170
ITEM

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
19 20 52
REV.
DATE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
-WS54-S55
-WS52-S53
-WS13-S16
-WS14-S114
-Can low X8 / +X1/8.05
-S54
-S55
-S52
-S53
-S13
-S16
-S14
-S114
-Can high X8 / +X1/8.05
1
+
3
+
1
-
3
+
1
-
3
+
1
-
3
+
1
-
3
+
1
-
3
+
1
-
3
+
1
-
/21.00
-X8
Node ID: 8
+X8-XP1
+X8-XP3
+X8-XP5
+X8-XP7
+X8-X0
:1
:2
In 1
In 5
In 2
In 6
In 3
In 7
In 4
In 8
-S54 G.P tower left stop

ITEM
-S55 GP tower right stop
-S52 G.P tower left centre

-S53 G.P tower right centre
-S13 20' telescope position

SERIAL NO.
-S16 40' telescope positon

MACHINE TYPE:

SHEET
EH170
LAT 2005-02-09
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
CHECKED BY: DRAWN BY:

:
CAN_low
Centre landside
CAN_high
20 21 52
REV.
DATE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
0
/20.00
1
Out 1
I
O
2
Out 5
I
O
DATE
3
Out 2
I
O
4
Out 6
I
O
5
Out 3
I
O
6
Out 7
I
O
7
Out 4
I
O
8
Out 8
I
O
-X8
Centre landside
+X8-XP2
+X8-XP4
+X8-XP6
+X8-XP8
+X8-X0
GND
+VBB
Node ID: 8
:3
:5
+X1/8.05 / -GND X8
+X1/8.04 / -+VBB X8
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare EH170
Spare
Spare

SHEET
ITEM

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
21 22 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-18
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
-S24
-S28
-S32
-S36
-S27
-S31
-S35
-S39
-WS24-S28 C
-WS32-S36
-WS27-S31
-WS35-S39
-Can low X4 / +X1/8.03
-Can high X4 / +X1/8.03
/23.00
-X4
Node ID: 4
+X4-XP1
+X4-XP3
+X4-XP5
+X4-XP7
+X4-X0
:1
:2
In 1
In 5
In 2
In 6
In 3
In 7
In 4
In 8
-S24 Twin 1 unlocked left landside

ITEM
-S28 Twin 1 locked left landside
-S32 Twin 1 landed left landside

-S36 Twin 1 up left landside
-S27 Twin 4 unlocked right landside
-S31 Twin 4 locked right landside

-S35 Twin 4 landed right landside
-S39 Twin 4 up right landside

SHEET
EH170
LAT 2005-02-09
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:
CAN_low
Centre landside
CAN_high
22 23 52
REV.
DATE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
0
/22.00
1
Out 1
I
O
2
Out 5
I
O
1
3
Out 2
I
O
4
Out 6
I
O
1
5
Out 3
I
O
6
Out 7
I
O
7
Out 4
I
O
8
Out 8
I
O
-X4
Centre landside
+X4-XP2
+X4-XP4
+X4-XP6
+X4-XP8
+X4-X0
GND
+VBB
Node ID: 4
:3
:5
-WY25-Y26
-WY27-Y28
+X1/8.03 / -GND X4
B 2
B 2
+X1/8.02 / -+VBB X4
-Y25
-Y26
-Y27
-Y28
-Y25 Twin legs up

-
-Y26 Twin legs down
-Y27 Twin twistlock unlock

-Y28 Twin twistlock lock
Spare
Spare EH170
Spare
Spare

SHEET
ITEM

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
23 24 52
REV.
DATE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
-Can high X5 / +X1/8.04
3
-
3
-
3
-
-S25
-S29
-S33
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
-S37
4
-S26
-S30
-S34
3
-
-S38
4
-WS25-S29 C
-WS33-S37
-WS26-S30
-WS34-S38
-Can low X5 / +X1/8.04
/25.00
-X5
Node ID: 5
+X5-XP1
+X5-XP3
+X5-XP5
+X5-XP7
+X5-X0
:1
:2
CAN_high
In 1
In 5
In 2
In 6
In 3
In 7
In 4
In 8
-S25 Twin 2 unlocked left waterside

ITEM
-S29 Twin 2 locked left waterside
-S33 Twin 2 landed left waterside

-S37 Twin 2 up left waterside
-S26 Twin 3 unlocked right waterside
-S30 Twin 3 locked right waterside

-S34 Twin 3 landed right waterside
-S38 Twin 3 up right waterside

SHEET
EH170
LAT 2005-02-09
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:
CAN_low
Centre waterside
24 25 52
REV.
DATE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
0
/24.00
1
Out 1
I
O
2
Out 5
I
O
DATE
3
Out 2
I
O
4
Out 6
I
O
5
Out 3
I
O
6
Out 7
I
O
7
Out 4
I
O
8
Out 8
I
O
-X5
Centre waterside
+X5-XP2
+X5-XP4
+X5-XP6
+X5-XP8
+X5-X0
GND
+VBB
Node ID: 5
:3
:5
+X1/8.04 / -GND X5
+X1/8.03 / -+VBB X5
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare EH170
Spare
Spare

SHEET
ITEM

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
25 26 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-18
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
-S40 B
-S43
-S41
-S42
-S83
-S84
-Can high X10 / +X1/8.06
-WS40-S43
-WS41-S42
-WS83
-WS84
-Can low X10 / +X1/8.06
-X10
/27.00
Node ID: A
+X10-XP1
+X10-XP3
+X10-XP5
+X10-XP7
+X10-X0
:1
:2
In 1
In 5
In 2
In 6
In 3
In 7
In 4
In 8
-S40 Twin 1 down left landside

ITEM
-S43 Twin 4 down right landside
-S41 Twin 2 down left waterside

-S42 Twin 3 down right waterside
-S83 High indication left (option)

Spare EH170
-S84 High indication right (option)
Spare

SHEET
LAT 2005-02-09
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)

:
CAN_low
Centre waterside
CAN_high
26 27 52
REV.
DATE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
0
-X10
/26.00
1
Out 1
I
O
2
Out 5
I
O
DATE
3
Out 2
I
O
4
Out 6
I
O
5
Out 3
I
O
6
Out 7
I
O
7
Out 4
I
O
8
Out 8
I
O
Centre waterside
+X10-XP2
+X10-XP4
+X10-XP6
+X10-XP8
+X10-X0
GND
+VBB
Node ID: A
:3
:5
-WHL9
-WHL10
+X1/8.06 / -GND X10
Blue
Blue
+X1/8.05 / -+VBB X10
-HL9
-HL10
-HL9 Twin legs down landside

-
Spare
-HL10 Twin legs down waterside

Spare
Spare
Spare EH170
Spare
Spare

SHEET
ITEM

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
27 28 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
X13 Option
-Can high X13 / +X1/8.07
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
3
-
-S90
-S91
-S92
-S93
-S94
-S95
-S96
4 2
4 2
4 2
-WS90-S91
-WS92-S93
-WS94
-WS95-S96
-Can low X13 / +X1/8.07
-X13 E
/29.00
Node ID: 13
+X13-XP1
+X13-XP3
+X13-XP5
+X13-XP7
+X13-X0
:1
:2
Centre landside option
CAN_high
In 1
In 5
In 2
In 6
In 3
In 7
In 4
In 8
-S90 TTDS sensor

-
-S91 TTDS sensor
-S92 TTDS sensor

-S93 TTDS sensor
-S94 TTDS sensor

Spare
-S95 TTDS sensor
-S96 TTDS sensor

SHEET
EH170
ITEM

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
CAN_low
28 29 52
REV.
DATE
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-04
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
0
-X13
/28.00
1
Out 1
I
O
2
Out 5
I
O
DATE
3
Out 2
I
O
4
Out 6
I
O
5
Out 3
I
O
6
Out 7
I
O
7
Out 4
I
O
8
Out 8
I
O
Centre landside +X13-XP2 option
+X13-XP4
+X13-XP6
+X13-XP8
+X13-X0
GND
+VBB
Node ID: 13
:3
:5
+X1/8.07 / -GND X13
+X1/8.06 / -VBB X13
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare EH170
Spare
Spare

SHEET
ITEM

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
29 30 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
MOTOR WITH BRAKE AND CURRENT RELAY
SR
ws ws
rt
bl
BGE
ws
W2 U2 V2
rt
1 2 3 4 5
BS
U1 V1 W1
TS
bl
L1
L2 L3
MACHINE TYPE:
ITEM
DATE
EH170

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
30 31 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-04
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
NODE
-B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1
I/O
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
TYPE
Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Undefined Undefined Undefined Undefined
PIN NR.
-XPX1:31 -XPX1:41 -XPX1:43 -XPX1:42 -XPX1 :3 -XPX1 :2 -XPX1:11 -XPX1 :1 -XPX1:26 -XPX1:16 -XPX1 :6 -XPX1 :7 -XPX1 :4 -XPX1 :5 -XPX1:25 -XPX1:15 -XPX1:10 -XPX1:20 -XPX1:30 -XPX1:40 -XPX1:46 -XPX1:47 -XPX1:49 -XPX1:48
DESCRIPTION
-HL1 Unlocked left
-HL2 Locked left -HL3 Landed left
NODE
-B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1 -B1
I/O
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
TYPE
Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital output Digital input Digital input Digital input Digital input Digital input Digital input Digital input Digital input Digital input Digital input Digital input Digital input Digital input Digital input Digital input Digital input
PIN NR.
-XPX3:21 -XPX3:31 -XPX3:41 -XPX3:42 -XPX3:24 -XPX3:35 -XPX3:44 -XPX3:45 -XPX3 :5 -XPX3 :4 -XPX3 :3 -XPX3 :2 -XPX3 :6 -XPX3:16 -XPX3:25 -XPX3:26 -XPX3:49 -XPX3:48 -XPX3:47 -XPX3:46 -XPX3 :7 -XPX3 :9 -XPX3:50 -XPX3:20
DESCRIPTION
Locked signal
Unlocked signal Spreader landed signal G.p. in centre signal G.P. at left signal G.P. at right signal H.I.S signal (option) TTDS ok signal (option)
Telescope retract CMD
-HL4 Tower in center left -HL5 Unlocked right

-HL6 Locked right
-HL7 Landed right Not connected K2 Gravity point to left K3 Gravity point to right K6 Hydralic pump left/right gable
K8 Retract telescope K9 Extend telescope
Telescope expand CMD Flippers all up CMD Flipper waterside down CMD Flipper right down CMD Flipper left down CMD Flipper landside down CMD Not connected Twl lock CMD Twl unlock CMD
G.p. move to left CMD
K10 Hydraulic pump twin Not connected Not connected Twin legs down signal Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected
G.p. move to right CMD Twin legs up CMD Twin legs down CMD
Spreader stop
G.p. auto return
I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 2005-01-24 10:34
MACHINE TYPE:
EH170
SCS CANopen
PLC diagram
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
31 32 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
: :
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
-HL1 Unlocked left -HL2 Locked left -HL3 Landed left -HL4 Tower in center left -HL5 Unlocked right -HL6 Locked right -HL7 Landed right Not connected
K2 Gravity point to left K3 Gravity point to right K6 Hydralic pump left/right gable K8 Retract telescope K9 Extend telescope K10 Hydraulic pump twin Not connected Not connected
Twin legs down signal Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected Not connected
Locked signal Unlocked signal Spreader landed signal G.p. in centre signal
G.P. at left signal G.P. at right signal H.I.S signal (option)
Telescope retract CMD Telescope expand CMD Flippers all up CMD Flipper waterside down CMD Flipper right down CMD Flipper left down CMD Flipper landside down CMD Not connected
Twl lock CMD Twl unlock CMD G.p. move to left CMD G.p. move to right CMD Twin legs up CMD Twin legs down CMD
Spreader stop
G.p. auto return
TTDS ok signal (option)
24VDC / Output red 24VDC / Output red 24VDC / Output red 24VDC / Output red 24VDC / Output red 24VDC / Output red 24VDC / Output red
24VDC / Output red 24VDC / Output red 24VDC / Output red 24VDC / Output red 24VDC / Output red 24VDC / Output red
230VAC / Output black
230VAC / Output black 230VAC / Output black 230VAC / Output black 230VAC / Output black 230VAC / Output black 230VAC / Output black 230VAC / Output black 230VAC / Output black
230VAC / Input yellow 230VAC / Input yellow 230VAC / Input yellow 230VAC / Input yellow 230VAC / Input yellow 230VAC / Input yellow 230VAC / Input yellow
230VAC / Input yellow 230VAC / Input yellow 230VAC / Input yellow 230VAC / Input yellow 230VAC / Input yellow 230VAC / Input yellow 24VDC / Input white 24VDC / Input white
XP1
XP2
XP3
-B1
I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 2005-01-24 10:35
MACHINE TYPE:
EH170
SCS CANopen
I/O card overview
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
32 33 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
: :
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
-X2
Left gable end INPUTS
Pin
CAN-Open I/O
-X3
Right gable end OUTPUTS
Pin
OUTPUTS
Pin
INPUTS
Pin
Connector 7
Spare -S10 Landed left waterside
Connector 8
-Y6 Flipper 5 down left centre -Y5 Flipper 5 up left centre
Connector 7
Spare -S12 Landed right landside
Connector 8
-Y14 Flipper 6 down right centre -Y13 Flipper 6 up right centre
2 4
2 4
2 4
2 4
Connector 5
2 4
Spare -S9 Landed left landside
Connector 6
2 4
-Y4 Flipper 2 down left waterside -Y3 Flipper 2 up left waterside
Connector 5
2 4
Spare -S11 Landed right waterside
Connector 6
2 4
-Y12 Flipper 4 down right landside -Y11 Flipper 4 up right landside
Connector 3
2 4
-S6 Locked left waterside -S2 Unlocked left waterside
Connector 4
2 4
-Y2 Flipper 1 down left landside -Y1 Flipper 1 up left landside
Connector 3
2 4
-S8 Locked right landside -S4 Unlocked right landside
Connector 4
2 4
-Y10 Flipper 3 down right waterside -Y9 Flipper 3 up right waterside
Connector 1
2 4
-S5 Locked left landside -S1 Unlocked left landside
Connector 2
2 4
-Y8 Twistlock lock left -Y7 Twistlock unlock left
Connector 1
2 4
-S7 Locked right waterside -S3 Unlocked right waterside
Connector 2
2 4
-Y16 Twistlock lock right -Y15 Twistlock unlock right
Module ID: 2
Module ID: 3
I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 2005-01-24 10:40
MACHINE TYPE:
EH170
SCS CANopen
I/O card overview
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
33 34 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
-X4
Centre landside INPUTS
Pin
CAN-Open I/O
-X5
Centre waterside OUTPUTS
Pin
OUTPUTS
Pin
INPUTS
Pin
Connector 7
-S39 Twin 4 up right landside -S35 Twin 4 landed right landside
Connector 8
Spare Spare
Connector 7
-S38 Twin 3 up right waterside -S34 Twin 3 landed right waterside
Connector 8
Spare Spare
2 4
2 4
2 4
2 4
Connector 5
2 4
-S31 Twin 4 locked right landside -S27 Twin 4 unlocked right landside
Connector 6
2 4
Spare Spare
Connector 5
2 4
-S30 Twin 3 locked right waterside -S26 Twin 3 unlocked right waterside
Connector 6
2 4
Spare Spare
Connector 3
2 4
-S36 Twin 1 up left landside -S32 Twin 1 landed left landside
Connector 4
2 4
-Y28 Twin twistlock lock -Y27 Twin twistlock unlock
Connector 3
2 4
-S37 Twin 2 up left waterside -S33 Twin 2 landed left waterside
Connector 4
2 4
Spare Spare
Connector 1
2 4
-S28 Twin 1 locked left landside -S24 Twin 1 unlocked left landside
Connector 2
2 4
-Y26 Twin legs down -Y25 Twin legs up
Connector 1
2 4
-S29 Twin 2 locked left waterside -S25 Twin 2 unlocked left waterside
Connector 2
2 4
Spare Spare
Module ID: 4
Module ID: 5
I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 2005-01-24 10:40
MACHINE TYPE:
EH170
SCS CANopen
I/O card overview
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
34 35 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
-X8
Centre landside INPUTS
Pin
CAN-Open I/O
-X10
Centre waterside OUTPUTS
Pin
OUTPUTS
Pin
INPUTS
Pin
Connector 7
-S114 30' telescope positon -S14 30' telescope positon
Connector 8
Spare Spare
Connector 7
Spare -S84 High indication right (option)
Connector 8
Spare Spare
2 4
2 4
2 4
2 4
Connector 5
2 4
-S16 40' telescope positon -S13 20' telescope position
Connector 6
2 4
Spare Spare
Connector 5
2 4
Spare -S83 High indication left (option)
Connector 6
2 4
Spare Spare
Connector 3
2 4
-S53 G.P tower right centre
-S52 G.P tower left centre
Connector 4
2 4
Spare Spare
Connector 3
2 4
-S42 Twin 3 down right waterside -S41 Twin 2 down left waterside
Connector 4
2 4
Spare -HL10 Twin legs down waterside
Connector 1
2 4
-S55 GP tower right stop
-S54 G.P tower left stop
Connector 2
2 4
Spare Spare
Connector 1
2 4
-S43 Twin 4 down right landside -S40 Twin 1 down left landside
Connector 2
2 4
Spare -HL9 Twin legs down landside
Module ID: 8
Module ID: 10
I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 2005-01-24 10:40
MACHINE TYPE:
EH170
SCS CANopen
I/O card overview
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
35 36 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
-X13
Centre landside option INPUTS
Pin
CAN-Open I/O
OUTPUTS
Pin
INPUTS
Pin
OUTPUTS
Pin
Connector 7
-S96 TTDS sensor -S95 TTDS sensor
Connector 8
Spare Spare
Connector 7
Connector 8
2 4
2 4
2 4
2 4
Connector 5
2 4
Spare
-S94 TTDS sensor
Connector 6
2 4
Spare Spare
Connector 5
2 4 2 4
Connector 6
Connector 3
2 4
Connector 4
2 4
Spare Spare
Connector 3
2 4 2 4
Connector 4
Connector 1
2 4
Connector 2
2 4
Spare Spare
Connector 1
2 4 2 4
Connector 2
Module ID: 13
Module ID:
I/0 OVERVIEW
CREATED: 2005-01-24 10:40
MACHINE TYPE:
EH170
SCS CANopen
I/O card overview
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
36 37 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
Internal layout X1 cabinet EH170U

Cable trunk is 30mm, if nothing else is written
290mm
B1
XP2 XP3
Rubber boot
XP1
Distance between cable trunk and edge 45mm
Length 640mm
Length 115mm
X1
/10.03 /6.02 /6.04 /10.04 /5.04 /10.01
Length 145mm
/5.07
740mm
-K6
-QM6
-QM7
-K8
-QM8
-K2
G1
Length 380mm
PCU to mounted with heat transfer conpound
-QM1
Length 490mm
-F1
2A /7.02 10A -F2
/5.09
-EH1
/7.07
/7.01
/6.06
/10.06
Power supply
/5.09
-KA1
-P1
E 15mm
-K1
-QM10
-K10
X2
E
Width 60 mm/ Length 520mm 40mm
733mm
MACHINE TYPE:
ITEM
DATE
EH170
LAT 2005-02-09
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SCS CANopen Cabinet layout

:
SHEET
37 38 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
A1 : X1
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:12
1002493
9
External cable connection X1 cabinet / EH170U
GLANDS 1 2 3 4 5
PG11 M25 M25 M40
CABLE
EEPROM
WM1
Plug
WXP1
XP21 XP22 XP23

C
6 7
6
D
5 1
2 4 3
7
D
MACHINE TYPE:
ITEM
DATE
EH170
SCS CANopen Cable/ Sensor Layout

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
CONT. TOTAL SH.
38 39 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-04
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:13
DRAWING NO.
1002493
9
GORETEX VENT PLUG 700984, 700985 Assembly from the outside
GORETEX VENT PLUG 700984, 700985 Assembly from the outside
Q1
D
SB1 SS1
MACHINE TYPE:
ITEM
DATE
EH170
SCS CANopen Cabinet layout

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
39 40 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-04
6
A1 : X1
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:13
1002493
9
Junction box X100

GLAND
1 2 3 4 5
M16 M16 M16 M16 M16 M16 M16 M16
CABLE
WX2 WX3 WX4 WX5 WX8 WX10 WX13 (OPTION) WM2
GLAND
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
M16 M16 M16 M16 M16 M16 M25 M32
CABLE
WM3 WM4 WM5 WHL 1-4 WHL 5-8 WXP22 WXP21 WXP23 C
6 7 8
10
11
14
16
12
13 15
MACHINE TYPE:
ITEM
DATE
EH170

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
CONT. TOTAL SH.
40 41 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:13
DRAWING NO.
1002493
9
External cable connection between X1, X100 cabinet / EH170U
CABINET X1
C
WXP23 Part no. 1001865
XP21
XP22
XP23
CABINET X100
WXP21 Part no. 1001864 WXP22 Part no. 1001863
MACHINE TYPE:
ITEM
DATE
EH170

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
CONT. TOTAL SH.
41 42 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-04
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:13
DRAWING NO.
1002493
9
XP1
X1 CABINET
B1
M1
H1 = GREEN H2 = RED H3 = WHITE H4 = YELLOW
C
WATERSIDE
S14, S114 30' POS.
H8 = YELLOW H7 = WHITE H6 = RED H5 = GREEN C
H10 = BLUE
Y1-Y2 FLIPPER1 Y3-Y4 FLIPPER2 Y5-Y6 FLIPPER5 Y7-Y8 TWISTLOCK
2 GREEN
S2 UNLOCK S6 LOCK S10 LANDED
X5
S13 20' POS.
X13 OPTION
X10
3 GREEN
X2
D
M3 M4
6 YELLOW
D
5 BLUE
M2
X3
Y9-Y10 FLIPPER3 Y11-Y12 FLIPPER4 Y13-Y14 FLIPPER6 Y15-Y16 TWISTLOCK
1 RED
S83 H.I.S OPTION
X100 CABINET
S52 TOWER LEFT CENTRE
S16 40' POS.
S54 TOWER STOP LEFT
X4
H9 = BLUE
X8
S53 TOWER RIGHT CENTRE
S55 TOWER STOP RIGHT
S84 H.I.S OPTION
4 RED
LEFT
-
LANDSIDE
MACHINE TYPE:
RIGHT
EH170
ITEM
DATE
SCS CANopen Spreader layout

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
42 43 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:13
1002493
9
LANDSIDE
B
WATERSIDE
B
X1 CABINET
X1 CABINET
M1
M1
LEFT
S24 UNLOCK S28 LOCK S32 LANDED S36 TWIN UP S40 TWIN DOWN
RIGHT
RIGHT
LEFT
MACHINE TYPE:
ITEM
DATE
EH170
SCS CANopen Spreader layout

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SHEET
43 44 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
DRAWING DATE:
bln 2005-01-24
6
A1 : X0
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
2005-02-10
10:13
1002493
9
UNIT
X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0
ITEM
-BRAKE1 -BRAKE1 -BRAKE2 -BRAKE2 -HINK_X0 -HINK_X0 -HINK_X0 -HINK_X0 -HINK_X0 -HINK_X0 -HL9 -HL10 -R2 -R3 -S1 -S2 -S3 -S4 -S5 -S6 -S7 -S8 -S9 -S10 -S11 -S12 -S13 -S14 -S16 -S24 -S25 -S26 -S27 -S28 -S29 -S30 -S31
QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No.

1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
=A1+X1/5.08 =A1+X1/5.08 =A1+X1/5.04 =A1+X1/5.04 =A1+X1/6.05 =A1+X1/6.05 =A1+X1/6.05 =A1+X1/6.05 =A1+X1/6.05 =A1+X1/6.05 =A1+X0/27.01 =A1+X0/27.03 =A1+X0/16.09 =A1+X0/18.09 =A1+X0/16.01 =A1+X0/16.03 =A1+X0/18.01 =A1+X0/18.03 =A1+X0/16.02 =A1+X0/16.04 =A1+X0/18.02 =A1+X0/18.04 =A1+X0/16.05 =A1+X0/16.07 =A1+X0/18.05 =A1+X0/18.07 =A1+X0/20.05 =A1+X0/20.07 =A1+X0/20.06 =A1+X0/22.01 =A1+X0/24.01 =A1+X0/24.05 =A1+X0/22.05 =A1+X0/22.02 =A1+X0/24.02 =A1+X0/24.06 =A1+X0/22.06 79125 700026 700026 79125 1002018 1002520 1002602 1002177 1002607 1002595 1001403 1001403 1002390 1002390 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367
DENOMINATION
CURRENT RELAY SR15 GLAND ADAPTER GLAND ADAPTER CURRENT RELAY SR15 PROTECTION COVER HTS PROTECTION COVER HTS CABLE AND ITEM MARKING X1 cabinet EH170 ASSY CABLE AND ITEM MARKING CABLE AND ITEM MARKING LED LAMPS LED LAMPS RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W RESISTOR 120ohm 0,25W PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F
MANUFACTURE
SEW
SUPPLIER
SEW
TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

SR15 12 67 42 12 67 42 SR15 5DLN296350-A 5DLN296350-C 8267626 12 67 42 12 67 42 8267626 5DLN296350-A 5DLN296350-C BSR 150-500VAC M25 SKINDICHT M32/M25 SKINDICHT M32/M25 BSR 150-500VAC M25 SIZE4 SIZE1
TWIN JIB
LAPP LAPP
SEW
MILTRONIC AB MILTRONIC AB
SEW
ABB ABB FLEXIMARK
ABB ABB MILTRONIC BROMMA
1002177
Complete with SCS for CAN open

TOWER JIB
FLEXIMARK FLEXIMARK EKTA EKTA

Elfa Elfa
MILTRONIC MILTRONIC EKTA EKTA

Elfa Elfa
END BEAM 3-FLIPPER E5813.B E5813.B 60-103-83 60-103-83 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910
MACHINE TYPE:
E5813.B E5813.B 60-103-83 60-103-83 IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US
24VDC M12 BLUE 24VDC M12 BLUE
IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM
IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM
M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE
SHEET
Part List
CREATED: 2005-02-10 10:09
EH170 LAT 2005-02-10

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SCS CANopen
Parts list: ( - )
: :
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
44 45 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
2005-02-10
10:13
DRAWING DATE:
1002493
UNIT
X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0
ITEM
-S32 -S33 -S34 -S35 -S36 -S37 -S38 -S39 -S40 -S41 -S42 -S43 -S52 -S53 -S54 -S55 -S114 -X2 -X3 -X4 -X4 -X5 -X5 -X8 -X8 -X10 -X10 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1
QTY DIAGRAM REF BROMMA No.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2
=A1+X0/22.03 =A1+X0/24.03 =A1+X0/24.07 =A1+X0/22.07 =A1+X0/22.04 =A1+X0/24.04 =A1+X0/24.08 =A1+X0/22.08 =A1+X0/26.01 =A1+X0/26.03 =A1+X0/26.04 =A1+X0/26.02 =A1+X0/20.03 =A1+X0/20.04 =A1+X0/20.01 =A1+X0/20.02 =A1+X0/20.08 =A1+X0/16.00 =A1+X0/18.00 =A1+X0/22.00 =A1+X0/22.00 =A1+X0/25.00 =A1+X0/25.00 =A1+X0/20.00 =A1+X0/20.00 =A1+X0/26.00 =A1+X0/26.00 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1002367 1001762 1001762 1001762 79282 1001762 79282 79282 1001762 1001762 79282 75618 74410 73272 70592 71480 73983
DENOMINATION
PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F PROXIMITY SWITCH M30 F IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN GLAND PLUG IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN GLAND PLUG GLAND PLUG IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN IFM MODULE CAN-OPEN GLAND PLUG SHRINK HOUSE 85/25 INSERT 37P (M) ODU GLAND SR PG42 32-35mm PLUG ODU 309 LOCK RING PLUG ODU 309 CRIMPING HOSE
MANUFACTURE
IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM
IFM-Electronic IFM-Electronic IFM-Electronic MURR IFM-Electronic MURR MURR IFM-Electronic IFM-Electronic MURR NELCO CONTACT ODU LAPP ODU ODU NELCO
SUPPLIER
IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM IFM
IFM-Electronic IFM-Electronic IFM-Electronic MILTRONIC AB IFM-Electronic MILTRONIC AB MILTRONIC AB IFM-Electronic IFM-Electronic MILTRONIC AB NELCO CONTACT GUNNAR PETTERSON AB MILTRONIC AB GUNNAR PETTERSON AB GUNNAR PETTERSON AB II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 II5910 CR9011 CR9011 CR9011 ZVKM12 CR9011 ZVKM12 ZVKM12 CR9011 CR9011 ZVKM12
TYPE / ARTICLE NUMBER / TECHNICAL DATA

IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US IIA3015BBPKG/US CR9011 CR9011 CR9011 40 57 05 CR9011 40 57 05 40 57 05 CR9011 CR9011 40 57 05 M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE M30 SN:15 10-36VDC M12 3WIRE 8 in / 8 out 8 in / 8 out 8 in / 8 out ASB BOX PLUGS M12 8 in / 8 out ASB BOX PLUGS M12 ASB BOX PLUGS M12 8 in / 8 out 8 in / 8 out ASB BOX PLUGS M12
MWTM-85/25-1000/172 309 803 150 037 151 SKINDICHT-SR 42/35 309 021 018 200 000 309.021.000.554 309 803 150 037 151 12 02 35 309 021 018 200 000 309.021.000.554 309 021 018 200 000 EXCL.Lock ring IP56 PG42 ODU 309 37 POL MALE
Part List
CREATED: 2005-02-10 10:09
MACHINE TYPE:
EH170 LAT 2005-02-10

PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SCS CANopen
Parts list: ( - )
: :
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
SHEET
45 46 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
2005-02-10
10:13
DRAWING DATE:
1002493
FROM
X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0
X100 -HL9 -HL10 -HL1 -HL1 -HL2 -HL3 -HL4
PIN No.
1 1 2 1 1 1 1
:14
CABLE
-WHL9 -WHL10 -WHL 1-4 -WHL 1-4 -WHL 1-4 -WHL 1-4 -WHL 1-4 -WHL 5-8 -WHL 5-8 -WHL 5-8 -WHL 5-8 -WHL 5-8 -WM1 -WM1 -WM1 -WM1 -WM2 -WM2 -WM2 -WM2 -WM3 -WM3 -WM3 -WM3 -WM4 -WM4 -WM4 -WM4 -WM5 -WM5 -WM5 -WM5 -WS9
CORE
4 4 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3
PE
TO
X10 X10
X100 X100 X100 X100 X100
TERMINAL No.
-XP2 4 -XP4 4 -X1 :14 -X2 :13 -X2 :14 -X2 :15 -X2 :16
-HL5 2
TYPE
CABLE CONNECTOR 5,0M CABLE CONNECTOR 3,5M LED LAMPS LED LAMPS LED LAMPS LED LAMPS LED LAMPS LED LAMPS LED LAMPS LED LAMPS LED LAMPS LED LAMPS CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0M
EH170
ART. NR.
M12 2xANGLE M12 2xANGLE 24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE 24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE 24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE 24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE 24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE 24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE 24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE 24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE 24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE 24VDC, GN, RD, WH,YE
4x2,5mm PUR 4x2,5mm PUR 4x2,5mm PUR 4x2,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 4x1,5mm PUR 701008 79295 1001883 1001883 1001883 1001883 1001883 1001883 1001883 1001883 1001883 1001883 70996 70996 70996 70996 78173 78173 78173 78173 78173 78173 78173 78173 78173 78173 78173 78173 78173 78173 78173 78173 79293
QTY SHEET
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 5 5 5
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 =A1+X0/27.01 =A1+X0/27.03 =A1+X1/9.01 =A1+X1/9.01 =A1+X1/9.02 =A1+X1/9.03 =A1+X1/9.04 =A1+X1/9.05 =A1+X1/9.05 =A1+X1/9.06 =A1+X1/9.07 =A1+X1/9.08 =A1+X1/5.07 =A1+X1/5.07 =A1+X1/5.07 =A1+X1/5.07 =A1+X1/6.02 =A1+X1/6.02 =A1+X1/6.02 =A1+X1/6.02 =A1+X1/6.04 =A1+X1/6.04 =A1+X1/6.04 =A1+X1/6.04 =A1+X1/5.04 =A1+X1/5.04 =A1+X1/5.04 =A1+X1/5.04 =A1+X1/6.06 =A1+X1/6.06 =A1+X1/6.06 =A1+X1/6.06 =A1+X0/16.05
-X1
-HL5 -HL6 -HL7 -HL8
X0
X100 X100 X100 X100
X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X2
1 1 1 1
U V
W
-X2 :17 -X2 :18 -X2 :19 -X2 :16 -X2 :1 -X2 :2 -X2 :3 -X2 :PE -X2 :1 -X2 :2 -X2 :3 -X2 :PE -X2 :4 -X2 :5 -X2 :6 -X2 :PE -X2 :7 -X2 :8 -X2 :9 -X2 :PE -X2 :10 -X2 :11 -X2 :12 -X2 :PE -S9 4
-M1 -M1 -M1 -M1 -M2 -M2 -M2 -M2 -M3 -M3 -M3 -M3 -M4 -M4 -M4 -M4 -M5 -M5 -M5 -M5 -XP5
X1 X1 X1 X1
X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100
PE
U V
W
1 2 3
PE
PE
U V
W
1 2 3
PE
PE
U V
W
1 2 3
PE
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 1
PE
U V
W
1 2 3
PE
PE
X0
M12 2xANGLE
Cable List
CREATED: 2005-02-10 10:09
MACHINE TYPE:
LAT 2005-02-10
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SCS CANopen
CABLE LIST
: :
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
SHEET
46 47 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
2005-02-10
10:13
DRAWING DATE:
1002493
FROM
X2 X3 X3 -XP7 -XP5 -XP7 -XP5 -XP7 -XP5 -S1 -S5 -S2 -S6 -S3 -S7 -S4 -S8
-S13 -S16 -S14 -S114 -S24 -S28 -S25 -S29 -S26 -S30 -S27 -S31 -S32 -S36 -S33 -S37 -S34 -S38 -S35
PIN No.
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
CABLE
-WS10 -WS11 -WS12 -WS83 -WS84 -WS94 -WS1-S5 -WS1-S5 -WS2-S6 -WS2-S6 -WS3-S7 -WS3-S7 -WS4-S8 -WS4-S8 -WS13-S16 -WS13-S16 -WS14-S114 -WS14-S114 -WS24-S28 -WS24-S28 -WS25-S29 -WS25-S29 -WS26-S30 -WS26-S30 -WS27-S31 -WS27-S31 -WS32-S36 -WS32-S36 -WS33-S37 -WS33-S37 -WS34-S38 -WS34-S38 -WS35-S39
CORE
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
TO
TERMINAL No.
-S10 4 -S11 4 -S12 4 -S83 4 -S84 4 -S94 4
TYPE
CABLE CONNECTOR 1,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0M CABLE CONNECTOR 1,5M M12 2xANGLE M12 2xANGLE M12 2xANGLE
ART. NR.
79292 79293 79292
QTY SHEET
1 1 1
=A1+X0/16.07 =A1+X0/18.05 =A1+X0/18.07 =A1+X0/26.05 =A1+X0/26.07 =A1+X0/28.05
X10 X10 X13

X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0
-XP1 4 -XP1 2 -XP3 4 -XP3 2 -XP1 4 -XP1 2 -XP3 4 -XP3 2 -XP5 4 -XP5 2 -XP7 4 -XP7 2 -XP1 4 -XP1 2 -XP1 4 -XP1 2 -XP5 4 -XP5 2 -XP5 4 -XP5 2 -XP3 4 -XP3 2 -XP3 4 -XP3 2 -XP7 4 -XP7 2 -XP7 4
CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0M CABLE CONNECTOR 1,0M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m
EH170
M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox.
79903 79903 79903 79903 79903 79903 79903 79903 700960 700960 700959 700959 700960 700960 79903 79903 700960 700960 79903 79903 700960 700960 79903 79903 700960 700960 79903
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
=A1+X0/16.01 =A1+X0/16.02 =A1+X0/16.03 =A1+X0/16.04 =A1+X0/18.01 =A1+X0/18.02 =A1+X0/18.03 =A1+X0/18.04 =A1+X0/20.05 =A1+X0/20.06 =A1+X0/20.07 =A1+X0/20.08 =A1+X0/22.01 =A1+X0/22.02 =A1+X0/24.01 =A1+X0/24.02 =A1+X0/24.05 =A1+X0/24.06 =A1+X0/22.05 =A1+X0/22.06 =A1+X0/22.03 =A1+X0/22.04 =A1+X0/24.03 =A1+X0/24.04 =A1+X0/24.07 =A1+X0/24.08 =A1+X0/22.07
Cable List
CREATED: 2005-02-10 10:09
MACHINE TYPE:
LAT 2005-02-10
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SCS CANopen
CABLE LIST
: :
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
SHEET
47 48 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
2005-02-10
10:13
DRAWING DATE:
1002493
FROM
-S39 -S40 -S43 -S41 -S42 -S52 -S53 -S54 -S55 -S91 -S90 -S93 -S92 -S96 -S95
PIN No.
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
:1 :2 :5 :3 :1 :2 :5 :3 :1 :2 :5 :3 :1 :2 :5 :3 :1 :2
CABLE
-WS35-S39 -WS40-S43 -WS40-S43 -WS41-S42 -WS41-S42 -WS52-S53 -WS52-S53 -WS54-S55 -WS54-S55 -WS90-S91 -WS90-S91 -WS92-S93 -WS92-S93 -WS95-S96 -WS95-S96 -WX2 -WX2 -WX2 -WX2 -WX3 -WX3 -WX3 -WX3 -WX4 -WX4 -WX4 -WX4 -WX5 -WX5 -WX5 -WX5 -WX8 -WX8
CORE
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 2 4 2 4 2 4
white brown
red
TO
X4
TERMINAL No.
-XP7 2 -XP1 4 -XP1 2 -XP3 4 -XP3 2 -XP3 4 -XP3 2 -XP1 4 -XP1 2 -XP1 2 -XP1 4 -XP3 2 -XP3 4 -XP7 2 -XP7 4 -X1 :15 -X1 :22 -X1 :1 -X1 :8 -X1 :16 -X1 :23 -X1 :2 -X1 :9 -X1 :17 -X1 :24 -X1 :3 -X1 :10 -X1 :18 -X1 :25 -X1 :4 -X1 :11 -X1 :19 -X1 :26 CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CONNECTOR 2,0m CABLE CONNECTOR 4,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 4,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 2,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 3,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 3,5M
TYPE
M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable prox. M12 Twin cable prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable Prox. M12 Twin cable prox. M12 Twin cable prox.
ART. NR.
79903 1002387 1002387 700960 700960 700960 700960 1002386 1002386
QTY SHEET
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
=A1+X0/22.08 =A1+X0/26.01 =A1+X0/26.02 =A1+X0/26.03 =A1+X0/26.04 =A1+X0/20.03 =A1+X0/20.04 =A1+X0/20.01 =A1+X0/20.02 =A1+X0/28.02 =A1+X0/28.01 =A1+X0/28.04 =A1+X0/28.03 =A1+X0/28.08 =A1+X0/28.07
X10 X10 X10 X10

X8 X8 X8 X8
X13 X13 X13 X13 X13 X13

X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100
-X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0
Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0
EH170
1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
=A1+X1/8.01 =A1+X1/8.01 =A1+X1/8.00 =A1+X1/8.01 =A1+X1/8.02 =A1+X1/8.02 =A1+X1/8.01 =A1+X1/8.02 =A1+X1/8.03 =A1+X1/8.03 =A1+X1/8.02 =A1+X1/8.03 =A1+X1/8.04 =A1+X1/8.04 =A1+X1/8.03 =A1+X1/8.04 =A1+X1/8.05 =A1+X1/8.05
blue white brown

red
blue white brown

red
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
blue white brown

red
blue white brown
Cable List
CREATED: 2005-02-10 10:09
MACHINE TYPE:
LAT 2005-02-10
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SCS CANopen
CABLE LIST
: :
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
SHEET
48 49 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
2005-02-10
10:13
DRAWING DATE:
1002493
FROM
X8 X8 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -X0 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1
PIN No.
:5 :3 :1 :2 :5 :3 :1 :2 :5 :3
CABLE
-WX8 -WX8 -WX10 -WX10 -WX10 -WX10 -WX13 -WX13 -WX13 -WX13 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1
CORE
red
TO
X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100
TERMINAL No.
-X1 :5 -X1 :12 -X1 :20 -X1 :27 -X1 :6 -X1 :13 -X1 :21 -X1 :28 -X1 :7 -X1 :14 -X2 :L1 -X2 :L2 -X2 :109 -X2 :L3 -X2 :106 -X2 :107 -X2 :108 -X2 :118 -X2 :119 -X2 :120 -X2 :121 -X2 :122 -X2 :123 -X2 :124 -X2 :125 -X2 :126 -X2 :110 -X2 :111 -X2 :127 -X2 :128 -X2 :113 -X2 :112 -X2 :129 CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE
TYPE
Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
EH170
ART. NR.
1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 1001860 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222
QTY SHEET
5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 0 0 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
=A1+X1/8.04 =A1+X1/8.05 =A1+X1/8.06 =A1+X1/8.06 =A1+X1/8.05 =A1+X1/8.06 =A1+X1/8.07 =A1+X1/8.07 =A1+X1/8.06 =A1+X1/8.07 =A1+X1/5.00 =A1+X1/5.01 =A1+X1/11.01 =A1+X1/5.01 =A1+X1/7.02 =A1+X1/7.01 =A1+X1/7.02 =A1+X1/13.01 =A1+X1/13.02 =A1+X1/13.03 =A1+X1/13.04 =A1+X1/13.05 =A1+X1/13.06 =A1+X1/13.07 =A1+X1/14.01 =A1+X1/14.02 =A1+X1/12.01 =A1+X1/12.02 =A1+X1/14.03 =A1+X1/14.04 =A1+X1/12.04 =A1+X1/12.03 =A1+X1/14.05
blue white brown

red
X10 X10 X10 X10 X13 X13 X13 X13

X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0
blue white brown

red
blue
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
Cable List
CREATED: 2005-02-10 10:09
MACHINE TYPE:
LAT 2005-02-10
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SCS CANopen
CABLE LIST
: :
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
SHEET
49 50 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
2005-02-10
10:13
DRAWING DATE:
1002493
FROM
X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP1 -XP21 -XP21 -XP21 -XP21 -XP21 -XP21 -XP21 -XP21 -XP21 -XP21 -XP22 -XP22 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23
PIN No.
24 30 31 32 33 34 35 37
CABLE
-WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP1 -WXP21 -WXP21 -WXP21 -WXP21 -WXP21 -WXP21 -WXP21 -WXP21 -WXP21 -WXP21 -WXP22 -WXP22 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23
CORE
24 30 31 32 33 34 35
TO
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1
X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100
TERMINAL No.
-X2 :130 -X2 :116 -X2 :L1 -X2 :L2 -X2 :PE -X2 :L3 -X2 :105 -X2 :PE -X1 :7 -X1 :7 -X1 :7 -X1 :7 -X1 :7 -X1 :14 -X1 :14 -X1 :14 -X1 :14 -X1 :14 -X1 :15 -X1 :22 -X2 :1 -X2 :2 -X2 :3 -X2 :4 -X2 :5 -X2 :6 -X2 :7 -X2 :8 -X2 :9 -X2 :10 -X2 :11 -X2 :12 -X2 :13 CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 10POL CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 7POL CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 7POL CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END
TYPE
37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX 37x2,5mm NEOFLEX
12x2,5mm PUR 12x2,5mm PUR 12x2,5mm PUR 12x2,5mm PUR 12x2,5mm PUR 12x2,5mm PUR 12x2,5mm PUR 12x2,5mm PUR 12x2,5mm PUR 12x2,5mm PUR
ART. NR.
701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 701222 1001864 1001864 1001864 1001864 1001864 1001864 1001864 1001864 1001864 1001864 1001863 1001863 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865
QTY SHEET
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
PE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13
White Brown
3X2X0,25+3X1,0 + gn/yn 3X2X0,25+3X1,0 + gn/yn

25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13
Cable List
CREATED: 2005-02-10 10:09
MACHINE TYPE:
EH170
LAT 2005-02-10
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SCS CANopen
CABLE LIST
: :
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
SHEET
50 51 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
2005-02-10
10:13
DRAWING DATE:
1002493
FROM
X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X1 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 X0 B1 B1 B1 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -XP23 -Y2 -Y1 -Y4 -Y3 -Y6 -Y5 -Y8 -Y7
-Y10
PIN No.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
CABLE
-WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WXP23 -WY1-Y2 -WY1-Y2 -WY3-Y4 -WY3-Y4 -WY5-Y6 -WY5-Y6 -WY7-Y8 -WY7-Y8 -WY9-Y10 -WY9-Y10 -WY11-Y12 -WY11-Y12 -WY13-Y14 -WY13-Y14 -WY15-Y16 -WY15-Y16 -WY25-Y26 -WY25-Y26 -WY27-Y28 -WY27-Y28
CORE
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
TO
X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100 X100
TERMINAL No.
-X2 :14 -X2 :15 -X2 :16 -X2 :17 -X2 :18 -X2 :19 -X2 :PE -X2 :PE -X2 :PE -X2 :PE -XP4 2 -XP4 4 -XP6 2 -XP6 4 -XP8 2 -XP8 4 -XP2 2 -XP2 4 -XP4 2 -XP4 4 -XP6 2 -XP6 4 -XP8 2 -XP8 4 -XP2 2 -XP2 4 -XP2 2 -XP2 4 -XP4 2 -XP4 4 CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE 42POL HTS CONTACT-OPEN END CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 0,6M CABLE CONNECTOR 1,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 1,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 1,5M CABLE CONNECTOR 1,5M IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS IDENTIFICATION KEY FOR SCS
TYPE
25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR 25x1,5mm PUR
ART. NR.
1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 1001865 700970 700970 700970 700970 700970 700970 700970 700970 700970 700970 700970 700970 700970 700970 700970 700970 700964 700964 700964 700964 38905 38905 38905 EH170
QTY SHEET
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
PE
PE
B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A
WH
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
:10
:9
X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X2 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X3 X4 X4 X4 X4 B1 B1 B1
M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC M12 Ang Twin suppress 24VDC
-Y9
-Y12 -Y11 -Y14 -Y13 -Y16 -Y15 -Y26 -Y25 -Y28 -Y27
-XPX2 -XPX2 -XPX2
-KEY1 -KEY1 -KEY1
-XPX2 :9 -XPX2 :39 -XPX2 :49
BN GN
:39
Cable List
CREATED: 2005-02-10 10:09
MACHINE TYPE:
LAT 2005-02-10
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SCS CANopen
CABLE LIST
: :
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
SHEET
51 52 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
2005-02-10
10:13
DRAWING DATE:
1002493
FROM
B1 B1 X0
PIN No.
:50 :20
CABLE
-WXP22 -WXP22 -WXP22
CORE
white brown Sheild
TO
X1 X1 X1
TERMINAL No.
-XP22 2 -XP22 3
-WXP22
TYPE
CABLE CABLE CABLE Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0 Can-Open 3x2x0,25 + 3x1.0
ART. NR.
1001860 1001860 1001860
QTY SHEET
1 1 1
=A1+X1/15.06 =A1+X1/15.06 =A1+X1/15.06
-XPX2 -XPX2
-E2
Cable List
CREATED: 2005-02-10 10:09
MACHINE TYPE:
EH170
LAT 2005-02-10
PLANT (=) UNIT (+)
SCS CANopen
CABLE LIST
: :
PLOTTED: FILENAME:
SHEET
52 52
REV.
STOCKHOLM SWEDEN
2005-02-10
10:13
DRAWING DATE:
1002493
11 Fault finding diagnostics

Fault finding in hydraulic system
NOISY PUMP OR EXCESSIVE HEAT Check oil level and that filter is clean. Check that pump is functioning correctly as illustrated in the "system test". Particularly check that setting of pressure relief valves are correct (as enclosed sheet) and that the pump suction line (inlet) is not blocked. Pump suction is checked by removing drain line and measuring flow at running pressure of 100 BAR. Maximum flow should be 1 litre/min. If greater than this, replace the pump. TWISTLOCKS DO NOT OPERATE Check manual operation of the solenoid valve. If twistlocks work then check electrical supply & solenoid.
NOTE! Blockading pin must be in the "up" position!
IF TWISTLOCKS DO NOT WORK Check that pump pressure is correct. Check pressure relief valve. When valve is operated manually the pressure should remain at working pressure. If it decreases check the seals in the cylinder. Remove the cylinder and ensure that the twistlocks are free to rotate. Check directional valve.
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
11 01 ENG rev.
Fault finding in electrical system

HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR STOPPED Possible cause 3 phase supply missing. Motor contactor not functioning. Feed from crane missing. Action______________ ____ Check cable, plug, socket. Check crane control signal. Check connection.
HYDRAULIC PUMP MOTOR RUNS BUT KEEPS TRIPPING OUT Action________________ __ Possible cause Pump pressure too high or pump faulty. Refer to Hydraulic section. Pump motor faulty. Change motor. Motor supply has one missing phase. Check to find where supply is connected and repair. TWISTLOCKS WILL NOT LOCK/UNLOCK Possible cause__________________ Pumps stopped. Crane spreader is fitted with the safety feature only work with all four landing switches actuated. If timer fitted timer faulty set wrongly. Check if fault is hydraulic by operating valve by hand. Check supply to solenoid if yes. Check leads and plugs to solenoids. Check blockading circuit. Action________________ __ Check pump procedure. Check that the spreader is correctly landed on the container. Replace or set to 0,5 or 2 sec. Refer to hydraulic section.
Replace solenoid. Repair or replace Check relays, check limit switch and adjust or replace. Check connection. Check supply at B and C junction boxes. Check connections. Replace main supply cable.
FLIPPER WILL NOT OPERATE Possible cause Pump stopped. Check if fault is mechanical or hydraulic by operating valve by hand. Check supply to solenoid if yes. Check flipper supplies from crane.
Action________________ __ Check pump procedure. Carry out mechanical hydraulic procedure. Replace solenoid. Check crane controls. Check plugs, socket and cable.
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
11 02 ENG rev.
12 Appendices
Units & conversion tables
LENGTH 1 ft 1m 1 in 1 mm WEIGHT 1 lb 1 kg 1 ton 1 Lt 1 tonne VOLUME 1l PRESSURE 1 bar POWER 1 Hp 1 kW TORQUE 1 Kpm = 0,3048 m = 3,2808 ft = 25,4 mm = 0,03937 in = 0,4536 kg = 2,2046 lb = 1 t = 2000 lb = 907 kg = 0,893 Lt= 0,907 tonne = 2240 lb = 1016 kg = 1,016 tonne = 1,120 ton = 1 mT = 2204 lb = 1000 kg = 0,9842 Lt = 1,103 ton = 0,21997 UKgal = 0,26417 USgal = 10 N/cm2 = 1,02 Kp/cm2 = 14,503 lbf/in2 = 0,746 kW = 1,341 Hp = 9,81 Nm = 7,233 lbf
FORCE 1 Kgf = 1 kp = 9,81 N = 2,2046 lbf TEMPERATURE dgr C = 5 (dgr F-32) 9 A = ampere o C = degrees centigrade c/s = cycles per second o F = degrees Fahrenheit ft = foot gal = gallon Hp = horse power Hz = hertz in = inch kg = kilogramme Kgf = kilopond force
l = litre lb = pound lbf= pound force m = meter min= minute n = newton s = second t = tonne v = volt w = watt m = micron
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
12 01 ENG rev.
Hydraulic symbols
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
12 02 ENG rev.
Electrical symbols
BROMMA CONQUIP AB
12 03 ENG rev.
OPERATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE FOR THE BROMMA TWIN TWENTY DETECTION SYSTEM (TTDS)
MARCH 2001 Revised APRIL 2002
BROMMA TTDS Troubleshooting Guide Revised April 2002
Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)

Table of Content
Introduction................................................................................................... 3
System Description........................................................................................................ 3 Sensing The Gap Between Containers ........................................................................ 6 Detecting a Container ................................................................................................... 6 Sensor Settings............................................................................................................... 7 Interface with Spreader and Crane Control............................................................... 8 Twin Twenty Detection By-Pass ................................................................................ 10 Maintenance................................................................................................................. 10 False Signals................................................................................................................. 10 Functional Description................................................................................................ 11
Limitations................................................................................................... 13 Procedure To Adjust Photoelectric Sensor On Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)........................................................................... 14
Operation Mode Setting.............................................................................................. 14 Distance Setting ........................................................................................................... 14 Indication Lights ......................................................................................................... 14
Testing The Twin Twenty Detection System............................................ 16 Wiring .......................................................................................................... 17 Pin Layout.................................................................................................... 18 Spares ........................................................................................................... 19 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 20
Procedure to Trouble Shoot the Twin Twenty Detection System........................... 20 Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Sensor ........................... 23 Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Controller (TTDC) ...... 24 Procedure to Checking Cable to TTDS Controller.................................................. 25 Procedure to Checking Sensor ................................................................................... 27

Introduction
System Description
The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) is designed to sense the existence of twotwenty foot containers in a forty foot ships cell by detecting the gap between the two containers or the sagging of the two containers. The twin twenty detection system is a tool to assist the operator in detecting the dangerous situation of two twenty foot containers under a spreader positioned in the 40 foot position. The majority of twin twenty conditions consist of two typical containers, although there are several other variables to consider. The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System was designed to detect as many types of flatrack and tank containers as possible without unnecessarily shutting down operations. Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System uses a seven sensor cluster to avoid many of the false indications that plague other twin twenty detection systems. Many twin twenty detection systems cannot differentiate between a twin twenty condition and an open top container, canvas tops, tank container, and lifts with overheights. The Bromma twin twenty detection system is designed to give a go signal during these lifts. By reducing the amount of false twin twenty indications that need to be bypassed, Bromma can offer a more reliable and productive system. The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System uses a cluster of seven photoelectric sensors located in the center of the main frame. See Figure 1. The five inner sensors are used to locate a gap between two containers. The two outer sensors, S95 and S96, along with the two outer sensors on the center cluster, S90 and S94 are used to detect the existence of the containers. The system can detect a 38mm (1-1/2) gap with a range of plus or minus 28mm (1-1/8) from the center of the spreader. The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System can also detect an unsafe twin twenty lift even is the containers where butted together and there was no gap. The idea is based on the fact that an unsafe twin twenty lift will lift the ends of the containers that are locked on to the spreader and ends at the center will not be lifted. By setting the outer sensors lower than the inner sensors, there will be an area where the TTDS will send an unsafe twin twenty lift even when no gap exists. When the outer ends of the container are lifted beyond the setting of the inner sensors, the TTDS go permissive will be switched off. The outer sensors should still detect the presence of the containers. The TTDS will interrupt the go permissive until the spreader is lifted beyond the range of the outer sensors. This means when the twistlocks are locked and the TTDS senses an unsafe lift, the hoisting should stop. Figure 2 shows the condition where the twistlock are locked and the outer ends of the containers are being lifted, but the ends at the center are not. The TTDS will determine that this condition is an unsafe twin twenty lift and discontinue the go permissive. Figure 3 show a typical unsafe twin twenty lift that will be detected by the TTDS.
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3

The Bromma TTDS can be mounted anywhere along the center of the spreader. It is recommended that the TTDS be mounted inside the main frame for maximum protection. The twin twenty detection system is designed so a failure of a sensor will not cause the system to fail and send a "go" signal during a twin twenty condition. Because the definition of a gap is two or more sensors, the system will not shut down if one of the gap sensors fails. The system will become more sensitive to a twin twenty condition. A failure is defined by a failure of the sensor, the relay wired to the sensor, or a loose connection. The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) is not intended nor will it detect all possible twin twenty conditions. The Limitation Section outlines the situations where the twin twenty detection system may give a false twin twenty indication or fail to give an indication.
Sensing The Gap Between Containers

The Bromma TTDS can detect a minimum of 38mm (1-1/2) gap between the containers. The Bromma TTDS defines a gap as two or more consecutive sensors not detecting an obstruction in their view path. Two consecutive sensors are used to define a gap to avoid false readings due to damage or variations of the containers. The center of the gap between containers does not have to fall in the center of the spreader. The spreader could be as much as 28 mm (1-1/8) from the center of the gap due to the spreader being landed toward one end of the container, floating twistlocks, or the flexibility of the spreader. For this reason, the gap sensing cluster is made up of five sensors to achieve a plus or minus 28mm (1-1/8) range. Because of the physical size of the sensors, the sensors are mounted in two rows. The two rows are staggered so any one sensor is halfway between the sensors before and after.
Detecting a Container
The two outer sensors, S95 and S96, of the twin twenty detection system are the primary sensors for detecting the existence of a container. The two outer sensors of the gap cluster, sensors S90 and S94, are used as secondary container sensors for tank containers and flat racks. If these four sensors do not detect a container, the twin twenty detection system will allow the container to be locked and lifted. This situation will occur on forty foot open top containers or loose fitting canvas topped containers. If any of the four container sensing sensors detects a container, the control is transferred to the gap sensing sensors. If two consecutive sensors do not detect the container, the TTDS will not give the go permissive. The two outer sensors, S90 and S95, are located 114mm (4-1/2) from the center of the spreader to ensure that two twenty foot containers are detected no matter where they are in the ship cell.

Sensor Settings
The inner sensors should be set low enough to detect sagging canvas tops but not too low where it will detect the load in an open top container. It is a known fact that two twenty foot containers can be lifted in a cell by a spreader in single container mode. The bottom of the containers will ride the cell guide and allow the crane to lift the two containers. Once the containers leave the cell, the ends at the center will drop and in most cases the container will fall. Even in the cells the ends of the container at the center will be lower in relation to the ends attached to the spreader. The inner sensors must be set so they go from high to low state in the event that two twenty foot containers are lifted in the cells. When two twenty foot containers are lifted in a cell, the end of the container at the center will be 5.4 inches [137 mm] lower than the ends supported by the spreader. To ensure that the inner sensors do not detect the container in this configuration, the inner sensors should be set so that the range is 5 1/4 inches [133.4 mm] below the twistlock housings. Deflection of the spreader and the 9/16 inch [14 mm] difference between the seated and the loaded position will ensure that the inner sensor will not detect the container if this condition occurs. Since the TTDS is located in different positions and the sensors are not mounted at the same elevation, it is best to set the sensors based on the bottom of the main beam. The type of spreader will determine the range of the inner sensors. See Table 1 for recommended inner sensor settings for different spreaders. Since the spreader will travel lower than the theoretical spreader height when it is landed on a container, the inner sensors will extend approximately 7 inches [178 mm] past the top of the container when the spreader is landed. On all but canvas top containers, this engagement should be adequate. The amount of the sag in the canvas top will determine if a canvas top container will give a false indication. In the case where an unsafe twin twenty lift occurs outside the cells, the ends at the center will not be lifted. This means the outer sensors need to be set so that once the go permissive has been interrupted, the hoist should stop before the containers are lifted out of the range of the outer sensors. On faster cranes where the stopping distance is too long, logic in the crane should be added to watch for the interruption of the go permissive with the twistlock locked and the spreader not landed. Once a predetermined time period without the go permissive has been reached with the twistlock locked, the hoist should be stopped, even if the go permissive returns. When the containers have been lifted high enough the outer sensors will no longer be able to detect the containers and the go permissive will be given. Bromma recommend a sensor setting of 12 inches [305 mm] greater than the inner sensors. The stopping distance of the crane will determine if additional crane logic will be needed. The difference between the inner sensor setting and the outer sensor setting needs to be greater than the stopping distance of the crane, or additional crane logic will be needed to properly detect the unsafe twin twenty condition. If the settings are less than the stopping distance of the crane, the hoist will be interrupted and then the hoist will coast until the containers are outside the range of the outer sensors then the go permissive will be given and the hoist will be able to rise again. Only a pause will be seen. See Table 1 for recommended outer sensor settings for different spreaders.

Table 1 Sensor Settings for Different Spreaders Type of Spreader New Type ASX-7 & BSL-6, AST-6, & BST-6 (12 1/4 from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) AST-6SCH (12 1/4 from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) Old Style ASX-7 and BSL-6 (9 from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) ASX-7 & BSL-6, AST-6, & BST-6 Spreaders with INRS Gable Ends AST-6SCH with INRS Gable Ends SSX40, SSX45, STR40, STR45 & STS45 with Standard Gable ends (6 3/4 [172 mm] from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) SSX40, SSX45, STR40, STR45 & STS45 with Bromma Classic Gable ends (12 3/4 [342 mm] from Bottom T/L Housing to Gable Tube) SSX40, SSX45, STR40, STR45 & STS45 with INRS Gable Ends Inner Sensor Setting (Inches from Bottom of Main Beam) [Millimeters] 16 [405 mm] 15 1/8 [384 mm] 13 [337 mm] 18 [457 mm] 17 1/8 [435 mm] 16 [425 mm] 22 3/8 [568 mm] 23 7/8 [606 mm] Outer Sensor Setting (Inches from Bottom of Main Beam) [Millimeters] 28 [710 mm] 27 1/8 [689 mm] 25 [640 mm] 30 [762 mm] 29 1/8 [740 mm] 28 [730 mm] 34 3/8 [873 mm] 35 7/8 [911 mm]
Interface with Spreader and Crane Control

The Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System should be tied into the spreader position circuit to deactivate the system when the spreader is in the 20 or 45 foot position. In the case of a twin twenty spreader, the system should also be tied into the center housing down circuit so the system is deactivated when the housings are down. The TTDS should be tied into the hoisting circuit. In the event the system is fooled by a small gap between the containers, the twistlocks can be locked and the containers could be lifted. As the two containers are lifted, the outer ends of the container are lifted beyond the setting of the inner sensors, the TTDS go permissive will be switched off. The hoist should then stop, only if the system is tied into the locked hoist permit. The twin twenty detection indication should not affect the lowering of the spreader or the unlocking of the twistlocks. The stopping distance of the crane determines if the hoisting of the container will stop within the range of the outer sensors. The stopping distance of the crane is based on a number of parameters, acceleration rate, deceleration rate and the hoist speed. Since each crane is set up differently, testing the actual crane may be the only way to determine if the 12 inches [305 mm] difference between the inner and outer sensors will be enough to stop the hoist. A test to determine if only the difference in sensor settings will be enough to stop the hoist is described below.

On faster cranes the sensor settings may not be enough to stop the hoist. When the TTDS is fooled by the two containers butted together and the two containers are lifted, the go permissive will be interrupted, but since the crane can not stop quickly, the spreader will be lifted passed the range of the outer sensors and the go permissive will be sent again. If no other logic is in the crane PLC, the hoist will start again. To avoid this, one of the two crane logic options should be added to the PLC. The first option would be to place TTDS latching logic to stop the hoist and keep it stopped if the go permissive is interrupted for a half a second to one second when the twistlocks are locked. The only way to hoist would be to cycle the twistlocks to the unlock position or active the Twin Twenty Detection bypass. The TTDS latching logic would need to be added in the PLC. It should be noted that is not a good idea to stop the hoist and keep it stopped based on just the interruption of the go permissive. As the spreader is landing or the containers are lifted, the TTDS will interrupt the go permissive momentarily as the sensors adjust to a different status. The interruption of the go permissive should be continuous over a period of time from 0.5 to 1 seconds. The second option would be to keep the hoist in slowdown mode for 2 second after lifting the containers. This would allow the hoist to be stopped within the range of the outer sensors.
Testing the Stopping Distance of the Crane The following test can be done to check if the TTDS sensor setting and crane controls are properly set to stop an unsafe twin twenty lift. The first test should be performed without addition TTDS latching logic in the PLC to check if the sensor settings would be all that is necessary. Properly set the TTDS sensors. Place two empty twenty foot containers on the ground so that the ends are butted together. Land the spreader on the containers with the center housings up. Tape a large piece of cardboard (18 by 24) to the top of the containers directly under the TTDS sensors. Lock the twistlocks to the outside ends of the containers. The operator should lift the containers at full stick. (Note: The containers should only be lifted about two to three feet) If the TTDS is set properly and the proper hoist interrupts are in place, the TTDS will stop the hoist and it should remain stopped. Activate the Twin Twenty Detection Bypass to see if it is working properly. Check to see if the crane can hoist the containers with the Twin Twenty Detection Bypass active. (Only lift the containers slightly).
If the test properly stops the hoisting of the containers, repeat the test two more times. If all three attempts are successfully, then additional logic in the PLC is not needed.

If any of the attempts fail to stop the hoist, the TTDS latching logic or the hoist slowdown needs to be included in the PLC logic and the test should be repeated. If the TTDS latching logic is used, start with a timer set for 1 second. Continue to reduce the time setting until the TTDS properly stops the hoisting of the containers.
Twin Twenty Detection By-Pass

Since there is a possibility that the TTDS will indicate a twin twenty condition when it is landed on a forty foot container or flat rack, the system must be equipped with a method to override the system. To do this, a twin twenty bypass should be placed either on the crane or on the spreader. The bypass should be keyed and only operated by authorized maintenance personnel. The bypass should be used only after the situation has been checked thoroughly. When the twin twenty bypass is activated, an audible alarm should be sounded to warn the workers that the bypass is active. It is the customers responsibility to determine if a twin twenty condition exists when the bypass is activated.
Maintenance
Normal maintenance of the system includes testing the system according to the Testing the Twin Twenty Detection System Section (attached) and cleaning the lenses. The operation of the system should be checked at every maintenance period to ensure the proper operation of the system. The lenses should also be cleaned at every maintenance period. The sensor will become more sensitive as the lens become dirty and the system will indicate a twin twenty condition where there is none.
False Signals
Some ports have encounter false twin twenty indications during heavy rains. A puddle can form directly beneath the sensor cluster and the wind and rain can produce ripple in the puddle. The reflective nature of the puddle and the ripples abnormally disperses the light from the sensors, leading to the TTDS indicating a twin twenty condition. The system should be bypassed until the container is unloaded.
10

Functional Description
The twin twenty detection system (TTDS) is designed to stop the twistlocks from locking if a twin twenty condition is detected. The system is also tied into the locked hoist permissive to stop the hoist if the system is fooled and the twistlocks are locked. The twin twenty detection signal should only stop the twistlocks from locking when the spreader is in the 40 foot position or the position of the spreader is unknown and the center housings are up. A keyed bypass switch labeled TWIN TWENTY DETECTION BYPASS, should be installed in a convenient location to bypass the twin twenty detection system. The bypass should only be used after the twin twenty situation has been checked. An alarm should sound when the bypass switch is activated to warn the worker that a bypass is active. The crane logic must contain the following interlocks for proper use of the TTDS: The crane logic must block the operator from locking the twistlocks when a TTDS go permissive is not given. The crane logic must block the operator from hoisting the spreader and container when the twistlocks are locked and a TTDS go permissive is not given.
The TTDS is bypassed under certain condition and a TTDS go permissive will be sent from the spreader. The logic in the crane should also include the bypasses to mimic the spreader. The valid TTDS go permissives that need to be supplied by the crane logic are as follows. Valid TTDS go permissives supplied by crane control: Spreader in 20 foot position. Spreader in 45 foot position. Center Housings are down. The Twin Twenty Detection Bypass is activated
The twin twenty detection indication should not affect anything when the spreader is in the 20 or 45 foot position, the twistlocks are unlocked or the center housings are down. The twin twenty detection indication should not effect the lowering of the spreader or the unlocking of the twistlocks. If the twin twenty detection indication effects the lowering of the hoist, then the crane may be stuck in a position it cannot recover. If the system is fooled and the twistlocks are locked, the TTDS can sense the sagging of the container at the center of the spreader and interrupt the go permissive and stop the hoist. Without the ability to lower the spreader and unlock the twistlocks, the containers will be stuck partial lifted.
11

If the twin twenty detection indication effects the hoisting of the crane with the twistlocks unlocked, the operator will not be able to raise the spreader to put down the center housing or the spreader will not be able to be removed to check to see if there are two twenty foot containers. Both of these conditions can be overcome using the twin twenty indication bypass, but frequent use of the bypass will be a nuisance. If the use of the bypass becomes routine, then the operator may use the bypass when there is a twin twenty condition just out of habit. Bromma strongly recommends that each twin twenty occurrence be thoroughly checked before the bypass is used. The logic for the twin twenty detection system is contained on the spreader. The logic on the spreader should be imitated in the PLC. The logic must be installed and maintained to ensure the safe operation of the spreader. There may be a momentary loss of the twin twenty detection permissive during the landing of the container as the photosensors adjust to their new status.
12

Limitations
The limitations of the twin twenty detection system are (see Figure 4): 1. There must be a 1-1/2 inch gap between the containers where the twin twenty detection system is sensing. 2. There must be a support between the end corner castings near the top of the container or flat rack. The support must be at least 3 inches thick and the side of the support cannot be more than 2 inches from the end of the corner castings. 3. The maximum recess along the top of a container between the corner castings is 2". 4. The twin twenty detection system has given false twin twenty indications during heavy rains.
Figure 4
13

Procedure To Adjust Photoelectric Sensor On Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS)
Use the attached Figure 5 as reference
Operation Mode Setting

1. 2. 3. The operation mode screw is mounted on the front face of the sensor. Rotate the mode screw to D for Dark On or to L for Light On. Photoelectric Sensors S90 thru S94 are set Light On. Photoelectric Sensors S95 and 96 are set Dark On.
Distance Setting
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Determine the type of spreader. Using Table 1, find the settings for the inner and outer sensors for the spreader. Place a black mat object the proper distance +/- inches [6 mm] from the bottom of the main beam for setting the inner sensors. Rotate the sensor distance adjustment screw on the inner sensors until the photoelectric sensor is activated. Repeat the procedure until all five inner photoelectric sensors are set. Place a black mat object the proper distance +/- inches [6 mm] from the bottom of the main beam for setting the outer sensors. Rotate the sensor distance adjustment screw on the outer sensors until the photoelectric sensor is activated. Repeat the procedure until both the outer photoelectric sensors are set.
Indication Lights
The green indicating light is illuminated when there is a stable light or dark condition. The red indicating light is illuminated when the output is active.
14
Figure 5
15

Testing The Twin Twenty Detection System
Items in parenthesis are for Twin Twenty Spreaders Only
Description Check each sensor individually to see if the green LED lights on each sensor are illuminated. Check each sensor individually to see that the red LED lights changes state when an object is place 6 inches below the sensor. With the twistlocks unlocked, (the center housings up) and the spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object about 6 inches below all the sensors. The LED lights on each sensor should be checked to make sure the sensor is tripped. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light. Clear the area 20 inches under the sensors. With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and the spreader in the 40-foot position, check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light. With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and the spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object approximately 6 directly below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should not lock and the twin twenty light should light. With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and the spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object approximately 6 directly below the other outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should not lock and the twin twenty light should light. With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and the spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object approximately 6 directly below all of the sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light. With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housings up) and the spreader in the 20-foot position, place an object approximately 6 directly below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light. With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, (the center housing up) and spreader in the 45-foot position, place an object approximately 6 directly below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light. With the twistlocks unlocked, the plungers up, the center housing down and spreader in the 40-foot position, place an object approximately 6 directly below one of the outer sensors. Check to see if the twistlocks will lock. The twistlocks should lock and the twin twenty light should not light. (This step is for Twin Twenty Spreaders Only) Accepted (Initials) Date
16

Wiring
Figure 6 shows the typical wiring scheme for the TTDS. See the electrical schematic of the spreader to determine the actual wiring.
Figure 6
17

Pin Layout
10 m
Male Socket on TTDS
Main Cable with Plug
The following is the pin layout for the main cable.
Wire No. 1 2 YL/GR 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Pin No. A B C D E F G H I J
Function Power Neutral Equipment Ground Common Supply Relay 1 TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.O.) TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.C.) Common Supply Relay 2 TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.O.) TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.C.) Fault Override (115 VAC)
18

Spares
The following is a list of typical spares. See the electrical wiring diagram of the spreader to determine the actual parts used. Part No. 38272 38273 38271 38274 RST3RKWT4/3-631/.6M UZD355A Description Twin Twenty Detection Controller (TTDC) for 120 VAC Twin Twenty Detection Controller (TTDC) for 220 VAC Twin Twenty Detection Controller (TTDC) for 24 VDC Main Cable Cable Between TTDC and Sensors Photoelectric Sensor
19

Troubleshooting
Procedure to Trouble Shoot the Twin Twenty Detection System
This procedure is used for Twin Twenty Detection Systems with the Bromma TTDS controller another procedure is used to troubleshoot the TTDS with relays. Position the spreader so it is raised at least three (3) feet from the ground in the area of the twin twenty detection system. There will be one relay mounted in the main junction box that is the go permissive for the twin twenty detection system. Check the electrical schematic for the spreader to determine the relay number for the go permissive. For this document, the go permissive relay will be called R100. When Relay 100 is powered, the go permissive is given. If Relay 100 is not on, then the twin twenty detection system is indicating a twin twenty condition. See Figure 1 for the sensor configuration. Check to see that the cables number corresponds to the sensor number. See Figure 1 for the sensor configuration. Cable S90 is on sensor S90, Cable S91 is on sensor S91, Cable S92 is on sensor S92, Cable S93 is on sensor S93, Cable S94 is on sensor S94, Cable S95 is on sensor S95 and Cable S96 is on sensor S96. Reconnect the cables to the proper sensors if the cabling is not correct.
When there is no object under the sensor cluster, the green LED lights should be lit on all the sensors. The red LED light should be illuminated on sensors S95 and S96. The LED light on Relay 100 should be illuminated. If the green LED light on some sensors is not illuminated and illuminated on other sensors, the cable to the sensor may be bad, the sensor may be bad or the controller may be bad. First, check the sensor according to the attached, Procedure For Checking Sensors. If the sensor is not bad, check the cable to the bad sensor according the attached, Procedure For Checking Sensor Cable. If the cable to the sensor is not bad, replace the TTDS controller according to the attached, Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller. If none of the green LED lights on the sensors are illuminated, the cable to the controller may be bad or the controller is bad. First, check the wiring to the controller according to the attached, Procedure For Checking Cable to Controller. If the wiring is not bad, replace the TTDS controller according attached, Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller. TTDS TTDS TTDS to the
Place masking tape over the face of the outside sensor S95. The red LED light should go off. The LED light in Relay 100 will not be illuminate. If the red LED light does not go out, check the sensor according to the attached, Procedure For Checking Sensors.
20

If the LED light in Relay R100 does not go out, the cable to the sensor may be bad, the cable to the TTDS controller may be bad, or the controller may be bad. First, check the wiring to the TTDS controller according to the attached, Procedure For Checking Cable to TTDS Controller. If the wiring to the TTDS controller is not bad, check the cable to the bad sensor according the attached, Procedure For Checking Sensor Cable. If the cable to the sensor is not bad, replace the TTDS controller according to the attached, Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller.
Remove the masking tape from sensor S95. Place masking tape over the face of sensor S96. The red LED light should go off. The LED light in Relay 100 will not be illuminate. If the red LED light does not go out, check the sensor according to the attached, Procedure For Checking Sensors. If the LED light in Relay R100 does not go out, the cable to the sensor may be bad, the cable to the TTDS controller may be bad, or the controller may be bad. First, check the wiring to the TTDS controller according to the attached, Procedure For Checking Cable to TTDS Controller. If the wiring to the TTDS controller is not bad, check the cable to the bad sensor according the attached, Procedure For Checking Sensor Cable. If the cable to the sensor is not bad, replace the TTDS controller according to the attached, Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller.
Place the masking tape back onto sensor S95, then individually add masking tape to sensors S90, S91, S92, S93 and S94. When the tape is placed on the sensor, the red LED light on the sensor should illuminate. If the red LED light does not illuminate, check the sensor according to the attached, Procedure For Checking Sensors.
After all the sensors have been covered. The LED light on Relay 100 should illuminate. If the LED light in Relay R100 does not illuminate, the cable to the TTDS controller may be bad, or the controller may be bad. First, check the wiring to the TTDS controller according to the attached, Procedure For Checking Cable to TTDS Controller. If the wiring to the TTDS controller is not bad replace the TTDS controller according to the attached, Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller.
Check the logic in the TTDS controller by removing the tape from two sensors. See the list below for the proper pair of sensors. The LED light in Relay 100 should go out. If the LED light in Relay 100 goes out, replace the tape and uncover the next pair. Sensors S90 and S91 Sensors S91 and S92 Sensors S92 and S93 Sensors S93 and S94
21

If the LED light in Relay R100 does not go out, the cable to the sensor may be bad, the cable to the TTDS controller may be bad, or the controller may be bad. First, check the wiring to the TTDS controller according to the attached, Procedure For Checking Cable to TTDS Controller. If the wiring to the TTDS controller is not bad, check the cable to the bad sensor according the attached, Procedure For Checking Sensor Cable. If the cable to the sensor is not bad, replace the TTDS controller according to the attached, Procedure to Replace Twin Twenty Detection System Controller.
If everything has worked properly to this point and the system is still not functioning properly on the spreader, check the wirings to the relay according to the attached Procedure to Check the Wiring to the Go Permissive Relay
22

Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Sensor
Remove the sensor cluster from the spreader by removing the bottom locknuts on the cluster shock mounts (See Figure 1). Remove cluster from mounting brackets. Remove screws and wiring from sensor. The sensors are held in place by two screws. Separate the bad sensors from the other sensors. Note the location of sensors in cluster. Unscrew the sensor cable form the sensor. Reinstall the sensor cable onto the new sensor. Reinstall the sensor back into the cluster and make sure all sensors are back in their proper order. Place the sensor cluster back on the support brackets and replace the shock mount nuts. Set the new sensor according to Procedure To Adjust Photoelectric Sensor On Bromma Twin Twenty Detection System (TTDS) Retest the Twin Twenty Detection System according to Procedure to Trouble Shoot TwinTwenty Detection System.
23

Procedure to Replace A Twin-Twenty Detection System Controller (TTDC)
Disconnect the cables to the sensors at the TTDC. Disconnect the main cable to the TTDC. Remove the nut holding the TTDC. Remove the TTDC. Place the new TTDC on the shock mounts. Reinstall the nut on the shock mounts. Reinstall the main cable to the TTDC. Reinstall the sensor cable to the TTDC. Make sure the cables are connected to the proper connections. Retest the Twin Twenty Detection System according to Procedure to Trouble Shoot TwinTwenty Detection System.
24

Procedure to Checking Cable to TTDS Controller
Before checking the cable, check all the connections of the cable to the terminal strips. Look for loose screws, bad crimps and frayed strands.
If any bad connections are found, repair and retest the TTDS
If a spare cable is available, temporarily wire the cable in the junction box. Disconnect the existing cable and plug in the spare cable. Retest the TTDS. If the TTDS operates properly, then replace the existing cable. If the TTDS is not functioning properly, reconnect the existing cable and follow the Procedure to Trouble Shoot the TTDS to determine the cause of the problem.
If a spare cable is not available, unplug the cable from the TTDC with the power off. Turn on the power. Carefully with a voltmeter meter, place one probe on Pin A and the other to Pin B. The voltmeter meter should read the proper voltage (24 VDC, 115 VAC or 220 VAC). See the electrical schematic to determine the proper voltage. If the meter does not show any voltage, measure and verify with the voltmeter that the proper voltage in on the wire terminations in the junction box. If not repair the problem in the junction box. If the proper voltage exists on the wire terminations, replace the cable.
If the meter reads the proper voltage, Carefully with an voltmeter meter, place one probe on Pin G and the other to Pin B. The ohm meter should read the proper voltage (24 VDC, 115 VAC or 220 VAC). See the electrical schematic to determine the proper voltage. If the meter does not show any voltage, measure and verify with the voltmeter that the proper voltage in on the wire terminations in the junction box. If not repair the problem in the junction box. If the proper voltage exists on the wire terminations, replace the cable.
If the meter reads the proper voltage, remove the power on the spreader. With the ohm meter set to check for continuity, check each of the wires for continuity. The following chart shows the pin out for the cable. Wire No. 1 2 YL/GR 3 4 5 6 7 Pin No. A B C D E F G H Function Power Neutral Equipment Ground Common Supply Relay 1 TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.O.) TTDS Fault Relay 1 (N.C.) Common Supply Relay 2 TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.O.)
25

8 9 I J TTDS Fault Relay 2 (N.C.) Fault Override (115 VAC)
If the meter shows any breaks in the cable, replace the cable.
If no breaks are found, follow the Procedure to Trouble Shoot the TTDS to determine the cause of the problem.
26

Procedure to Checking Sensor
If a spare cable is available, remove the suspected cable and install the spare cable. Retest the TTDS.
If the TTDS operates properly, then keep the spare cable installed. If the TTDS is not functioning properly, reconnect the existing cable and look for another problem.
If a spare cable is not available, unplug the cable from the TTDC and the sensor. With the ohm meter set to check for continuality, check each of the wires for continuity. If the meter shows any breaks in the cable, replace the cable.
If no breaks are found, follow the Procedure to Trouble Shoot the TTDS to determine the
cause of the problem.
27

EH170U

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

EH170U

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Operations manual

EH170U 1004850 20- 40

______________________________________________________________________________________________________ BROMMA CONQUIP AB 02 01ENG rev..1

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 1 of 3 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 03 09 ENG. rev. x

________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 3 of 3 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 03 09 ENG. rev. x

HOISTING GROUP H2 LOADING GROUP B4

4 Testing records and certificates

______________________________________________________________________________________________________ BROMMA CONQUIP AB 04 01 ENG rev.

______________________________________________________________________________________________________ 1 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 06 02 ENG rev.

______________________________________________________________________________________________________ 2 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 06 02 ENG rev.

______________________________________________________________________________________________________ 3 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 06 02 ENG rev.

Start - Up the spreader

______________________________________________________________________________________________________ 4 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 06 02 ENG rev.

______________________________________________________________________________________________________ 5 BROMMA CONQUIP AB 06 02 ENG rev.

PERIODIC MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

Nut Spherical washer

PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTMENT AND REPAIR OF MAJOR ITEMS OF THE SPREADER

Twistlock nut Spherical washer Key

Twistlock head ENG 07 02

Signal cable connection

Important tightening torques EH5/EH170

Telescopic motor EH5 / EH170

Telescopic motor EH5U / EH170U

0-1- Month. 03 rev.00

Limit switch box EH5 / EH170

Twistlock EH5 / EH170

Twistlock EH5U / EH170U

Flipper motor and gearbox

103Nm after 200 test cycles

0-2- Month. 03 rev.00

Inspection and maintenance periods

Inspection and Maintenance

Inspection and maintenance periods

BMG4 =Telescopic Motor BMG8 = Tower Motor

Every Year Every third month

Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG 4 and 8

Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG 4 and 8

Inspecting brake BMG 4 and 8

, setting the working air gap

Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG 4 and 8

Floa ting clear ance s [mm]

Inspection and maintenance of brake BMG 4 and 8

brake springs (11).

Floa ting clear ance s [mm]

Work done, working air gap, braking torques of brake BMG 4 - 8

135 150 8 135 151 6 40 BMG 4 100 260 75 112M 132S 6 6 -

184 845 3 135 570 8

G arbs en (near Hannover)

Tel. (0 51 37) 87 98-30 F ax (0 51 37) 87 98-55 s cm-garbs en@ s ew-eurodrive.de

Tel. +27 21 552 98 20 Fax +27 21 552 98 30 Telex 576 062

Tel. +27 31 700 34 51 Fax +27 31 700 38 47

8 Spare parts and service

ISO, STD, LEFT ISO, STD, RIGHT

Floating ISO, 100 Floating ISO, 100

DESIGNED PLOT DATE

Illtek 021029 Exploded View Tower

EH5 Tower New standard

See SP-52002 Included in Pos 48 Included in Pos 48

den 10 oktober 2002

Include pos. 10,17,21,26,34

den 10 oktober 2002

Included in Pos 48 Included in Pos 48

Included in Pos 48 Include Pos. 3,4,32,33,47